Documentos de Académico
Documentos de Profesional
Documentos de Cultura
!I
THIRD EDITION
Previous Editions
by Austin F. Rogers
and Palll F. Kerr
Ncw York
Toronto
1959
London
t
To
the Memory of
LEA McILVAINE LUQUER
1864-1930
\'
OPTICAL MINERALOGY
Copyright
. 20 21 22 - MAMD - 9 8765
fs nN 07 -O:J~ 21O-r,
Preface
Austin F. Rogers, the senior author of the first two editions of this text
and professor emeritus in mineralogy at Stanford University, passed away
at Berkeley, California, in April, 1957. His wise counsel as a former
professor and his judgment as a mineralogist have been greatly missed
during this revision. On the other hand, many readers, particularly those
most familiar with Professor Rogers and his work, will recognize the
influence of his teaching and will remember portions of the text which
remain unchanged in the third edition.
Sixteen years have elapsed since the second edition of this text
appeared. The fidelity of the readers who have maintained a steady
demand over this period indicates that the general features of the second
edition have been found useful and consequently they are retained.
The first objective in this revision has been concern over the student
who has found difficulty with the phraseology or explanations of previous
editions. Within the limitations of space every effort has been made to
prepare a text which could be used with a minimum of supervision and
a maximum of self-instruction. Optical mineralogy is acquired by the
student with greatest facility with a good set of illustrative material
under competent classroom instruction. On the other hand, experience
has shown that a considerable number, lacking classroom facilities and
desirous of learning the techniques described, have made considerable
progress with representative thin sections and the text alone.
The format of mineral description has been retained. The length of the
tcxt is essentially the same. However, each mineral description has been
reviewed, many have been revised, a few have been added. Descriptions
of opaque minerals have been reduced in order to make space for other
material. Selected references have been added in an attempt to extend
thc scope of the text without undue enlargement.
Th e polarizing microscope has undergone considerable evolution in
n'c('nt years. Ncw illustrations have bcen substituted to call attention to
ill q)l'(lVCd cqu ipmcnt now available. Ph ase microscopy is illustrated. The
(' lla plcr intend cd to g,lide th e stlld ent in thc selection of methods of
'~ I'i lldill g thill sec liolls ha s hcc n rcviscd. A chapter is includ ed to serve as
iO lI olillino ill a(;('pliri ll g a working knowl edge of the universal stage. The
vli
/1
PIlE FACE
1,," 1111" .11 ion tables have been revised in an attempt to make th em more
'1 " I,d III lhe solution of the problem of identifying unknown min crals.
'I'll " I, 'x t is intended primarily for thin-section study, but both thc
"'/I ', llifhU IS and the tables will be found useful for work with min cral
II', JiIl IIl I S. The feldspars have been the subject of considerable rcvision
I I Ill' ligh t of recent studies. Other mineral groups have not b een so
di lll "lv, ly revised, although frequent revision will be noted throu ghout.
'1d'i II pplie's to the pyroxenes, amphiboles, chlorite, serpentine, the clays,
1111 IIVII por i.tes.
' 1'1 11 1 W I ilcr is particularly indebted to colleagues and research assoIII I ( \~ II I Columbia University who have offered suggestions. Profcssors
l in "oldervaart, Brian Mason, and Ralph J. Holmes; Miss P. K. HamilIII , It" s('arch Associate; Mr. Martin Molloy, Mr. William Bassett, and
1,'. ' )!lvis M. Lapham, Graduate Assistants, have all provided assistance
l VII I h)lls ways. The manufacturers of optical equipment have co1>" 1'11",<1 in furnishing a number of illustrations. Mr. E. O. Rowl and,
,II hlll'lIl nl'y Technician, Kings College, London, has advised on thini'(' lioll 1Il('lllods. Numerous conversations with instructors who have used
't"OViOIiS cd ilions have been particularly helpful.
Paul F. Kerr
Contents
Preface.
vii
Abbreviations
xiii
Types of Preparations- Materials for Thin Sections-The Mineral ChipCutting the Chip to a Thin Section-Special Thin Sections.
Chapter 2. The Polarizing Microscope .
11
38
46
64
Polarized Light- Polarization by Reflection- Polarization by AbsorptionDouble Refraction (Birefringence )- Optical Indicatrix- Nicol Prism- Interference between Crossed Nicols- Phase Difference- Interference ColorsApplication of the Color Chart to the Study of Minerals-Determination of
Hetardation with a Berek Compensator- Determination of Thickness of Section- Direction of the Vibration of Slow or Fast Rays-Extinction-Elongation- Anomalous Interference.
hapter 6. Convergent Polarized Light .
Goneral Statement- Formation of Interference Figures- Uniaxial Interference
Figures-Vibration Dircctions in Uniaxial Crystals- Positive and Negative
Si~ 1l of Unla.xia1 Crystals- 13iilxial Interference Figures- Eccentric Biaxial
1'Igur<ls- OpUclil Dlroctions in Biaxial Mincrals-Index EllipSOid (Optical
b:
86
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
Indicatrix) - The Axial Angles 2E and 2V- Variation in Axial Angle-Determination of the Optic Sign of a Biaxial Mineral- The Optic-axis FigureDispersion in Biaxial Intcrference Figures.
'hapter 7. The Universal Stage.
111
Chapter 14. Silicates: Chain Structures (Inosilicates) .
Purpose-Stage Assembly- Graduated Circles- The Stereographic Plot'Adjustment- Orientation with the Universal Stage-Location of the Uniaxial
Optic Axis-Optical Directions in Biaxial Crystals- Illustrative MountsIllustrative Exercises- Stereographic Net.
:hapter 8. General Features: Color, Mode of Aggregation, Cleavage and
Orientation .
124
142
Crushed Fragments-Methods of Mounting-Immersion Method- Index Determinations by Immersion- Form of Mineral Fragments- Immersion Media
- Standardization and Care of Liquids.
~hapter
152
302
xi
Scapolite Group.
Zeolites: Analcine-Heulandite-Stilbite- Chabazite- N atrolite--Mesolite-Thomsonite--Scolecite.
344
181
Mineral Groups
:::hapter 11. Elements to Hydroxides
Elements: Graphite.
Sulfides: Sphalerite-Pyrite--Pyrrhotite--Chalcopyrite.
Halides: Halite--Fluorite.
Oxides: Periclase--Corundum- Hematite- Ilmenite--Rutile- Cassiterite.
Multiple Oxides : Spinel- Magnetite-Chromite--Perovskite.
Hydroxides: Diaspore--Brucite--Boehmite--Gibbsite--Cliachite--Limonite.
185
209
236
383
Index
427
Abbreviations
SYM BOL S F OR I N DICE S OF R E FRACTION I N G ENERAL USE
Symbols used
in this text
Symbols used
by D ana,
Joha nnsen,
Larsen and
Berma n
Uniaxial
Extraordina ry ray .... . . . . . ..
Ordinary ray . ..... , . . . . . . . . .
n,
nw
Ne
No
Biaxial
Least v alue ........... . . . . .. . .
Interm ediate v alue .. ... .. .... ..
Greatest value . . . .... ... . ... . ..
na
n fJ
noy
a
(3
-y
Np
Nm
Ng
Symbols used
by Winchell
:l V -
d ll
ABBREVIATIONS
PART ONE
Mineral Optics
CHAPTER
MINERAL OPTICS
>f individual crystals in a thin section with the rock mass from which the
ection has been cut.
Materials for Thin Sections. Few students of mineralogy prepare their
'Wll thin sections, but it is desirable for all to know how thin sections
Ire made. With natural manual dexterity and patience students have
earned to make sections equal to those ground by professional section
nakers.l The speed may not equal that of the professional, but with a
ittle care the section cut may b e equally satisfactory.
The technique employed varies with the nature of the material. Grindng sections of compact igneous, sedimentary, and metamorphic rocks is
i routine process. Friable or fractured rocks and unconsolidated materials
;hould be firmly cemented with a p enetrating binding substance before
in 6 hours at 50C or in 1 hour at lOOe. Thin sections cut from decomposed granite in which kaolinite has replaced feldspar retain sharp crystal
boundaries with this treatm ent.
The earlier stages in the preparation of an ordinary rock section are
illustrated in Figure 1-1. The first problem involves the choice of material
and a decisiOl~ concerning the direction of the cut. A specimen suitable
for effective study with the microscope is selected. Such a specimen may
contain fine-grained materials not easily studied by the unaided eye,
structures that yield readily to examination with the microscope, or any
one of those numerous minor features so effectively revealed by microscopic examination. The direction in which the section is to be cut should
be clearly marked on the specimen.
Shield
/
Shield
","'-
Copper disc
I
I
?y '
~
... .., ,....
(a)
"
(b)
Abrasive
/'
pan
Abr:asive
//
pan
/'
....",
//'
,---~~=~~-----~/
FIG . 1-2. A mineralogical saw consisting of a hard rolled copper disk used with
carborundum.
\
'.
(e)
1-1. (a) A rock selected for a thin section and sawed to obtain a chip. (b) A
sawed chip of proper dimensions for a thin section (bottom surface smooth). (e)
The chip mounted on a glass slide with Canada b alsam ready for the first stage of
grinding.
FIG.
being mounted on a glass slide. One method involves a preliminary heating with the mineral specimen immersed in Canada balsam either in an
open dish or under a vacuum b ell jar. Methyl methacrylate "lucite" has
been used by Bell (1939) to impregnate friable material under a vacuum.
Exley (1956) has impregnated friable kaolin specimens with a synthetic
resin supplied by Bakelite, Ltd. A friable specimen is cemented with a
mixture of (1) resin, (2) a modifying agent, (3) a catalyst, and (4) an
accelerator. The four materials (with corresponding trade numbers) are
mixed in order as follows: resin, 100 g (SR 17431); modifying agent, 10
to 15 g (Z 17453) ; catalyst, 1 g (Q 17447); and an accelerator, 2 g
(Q 17448). The mixture is said to gel in 2 hours at 25C. It will harden
, The foll owin g list is furnish ed for the convenience of readers who wish the names
of techni cians ITI nkin g thin sec tions:
D. M. Organ ist, Box 176, Ncwa rk , Del.
C " C)"g" ntv , :12<1 S(,\H' nll c rilorll !laB, '11 9 SI. nllcl Amsterclam Ave ., New York
27 . N .Y.
l"' f',1 II n\l! lil H, I:HlO S. MO III ('I "Y 1'1I )s lid ., MO Ili<" 'oy Pilrk, Calif.
A\ "~ I II'''\( ' I' 'I'I1I1I1I1I1 V')V , 0:;11 1I11 '1~" \ AVi '., I.", A\t os, C" ll r.
1I,,"\ ,,\pll V(l il 11, ,,'1" " I\(lri N , MI I,1l 01' A VII " 1'11 '11 1.1.'" 11, ( ;11111.
'\
'
,,'....
The Mineral Chip. The first step in the manufacture of a thin section
involves the preparation of a mineral chip with a smooth smface suitable
for mounting on a glass slide. The chip may be broken from a specimen
and ground flat on one side, or a slice of suitable dimensions may be
sawed directly from a specimen. An ideal chip is about 1 inch square and
Ys inab thick.
Where it is desired to cut chips, several types of saws are available.
In each case, however, the cutting action is actually grinding along a
groove rather than sawing in the ordinary sense of the word. The grinding action is accomplished with an abrasive powder. The saw itself is
usually a metal disk. The abrasive may be fed against the disk in loose
particles, or it may b e imbedded in the outer rim. Abrasives may be
either carborundum or diamond powders.
Figure 1-2 illustrates an ordinary mineralogical saw. It may be a hardrolled copper disk that operates over a trough filled with carborundum
alld sludge. The edge of the rotatin g disk picks up carborundum and
rllhs it against the specimen. If a proper mixture of mud, carborundum,
and water is maintain cd , it is possibl e to grind a n arrow channel comp lvll'ly throll gh all in ch or so lid ;'1'1 ;11' 1:1. in :1 few minnl cs.
MINERAL OPTICS
MINERAL OPTICS
ingly thin, although coarse particles may be plucked from the clay mass
and will protrude from the balance of the 1m.
A smooth surface is carefully prepared by polishing on dry groundglass plates. While still moist, the surface is covered with amyl acetate
and pyroxylin. After the preparation is dried for from 5 to 6 hours, the
dry 1m formed by the pyroxylin is peeled from the clay surface with a
knife blade. The 1m is then mounted with Canada balsam on a glass
slide and covered with a cover glass.
Special thin sections are occasionally made in which the area of the
section may measure as much as 3 inches by 4 inches although the thickness is usually greater than normal. Such sections may provide a survey
of textural relations which extends beyond the area ordinarily covered
by a thin section. They have also been used in a limited manner for
lantern projection either directly or with polarized light derived from
superimposed polaroid sheets.
Specimens are frequently examined which contain both h'ansparent
and opaque minerals. The technique of polishing metallic minerals and
the methods of examination employed are beyond the scope of this text,
but it should be pointed out that a number of laboratories have found
it advantageous to prepare dual-purpose thin sections. These sections are
not only ground to the conventional thickness, but one surface is polished
to allow examination of metallic constituents in reflected light in addition
to the customary study with transmitted polarized light (Rankama, 1941;
Kennedy, 1945) .
REFERENCES
Bell, James F.: Notes on the Uses of Methyl Methacrylate "Lucite" in a Geological Laboratory, Ecan. Geal., vol. 34, pp. 804-811 , 1939.
Exley, C. S.: A Method of Impregnating Friable Rocks for the Cutting of Thin
Sections, Mineral. Mag. , vol. 31, pp. 347-349, 1956.
Isachsen, Y. William: A Petrotome Modificat ion for Cutting Extremely Thin
Rock Sections, P1'Oc. Penn. Acad. Sci., vol. 25, pp. 109-112, 1951.
Kennedy, George C.: The Preparation of Polished Thin Sections, Ecan. Geal.,
vol. 40, pp . 353-360, 1945.
Keyes, Mary G.: Making Thin Sections of Rocks, Am. J. Sci. , 5th ser. , vol. 10,
pp. 538-550, 1925.
Meyer, Charles: Notes on the Cutting and Polishing of Thin Sections, Ecan.
Geal., vol. 41 , pp. 166-172, 1946.
Rankama, K.: An Improved Technique for the Making of Thinned Polished
Sections, Ecan. Geal. , vol. 36, pp. 561-563, 1941.
Ross, C. S.: Methods of Preparation of Sedimentary Materials for Study, Ecan.
Geal. , vol. 21, pp. 454-468, 1926. See also Am. J. Sci. , 5th ser. , vol. 7,
pp. 483- 485, 1924.
Howland , E. 0 .: A Rapid Method for the Preparation of Thin Rock Sections,
Mi7l eral. Ma g ., vol. 30, pp . 254-258, 1953.
10
MINEHAL OPTICS
CHAPTER
l2
)late, the gypsum plate, the quartz wedge, and the compensator are also
Hstinctive.
The polarizing microscope as employed for the examination of minerals
ltilizes both plane-polarized light and light with the polarized planes
~rossed. For ordinmy inspection a lower polarizing device is left in place
)elow the condenser, and the upper polarizing device remains at
one side. For examination between
crossed planes, opposed polarizing
plates, or nicol prisms2 fit in the
optical train at right angles.
A serviceable polalizing microscope for general use equipped
with polmizing plates (polaroid)
is illustrated in Figure 2-1. A rotating stage with spring clamps
holds the thin section. Special
high-quality polarOid used for such
microscopes furnishes sha11), black
extinction and yields well-developed interference figures .
A polarizing microscope with
a deviating prism and inclined
tube for convenient observation is
shovm in Figure 2-2. The names
used for the several pmts are given
at either side of the photograph. A
thin section appears in position on
the stage. The stage not only roFIG. 2-1. A student model polarizing
tates but may be raised and lowmicroscope equipp ed with polarizing ered. The analyzing nicol prism
plates (Bausch and Lomb Optical Co.).
and the Amici-Beltrand lens are
Both the analyzer plate and the AmiciBertrand lens are sealed in the tube and
enclosed in the tube between the
aip in or out of the optical path as the
objective and the eyepiece.
proper knob is turned. The stage may be
Both sectional and complete
rotated and also raised and lowered.
views of a polarizing microscope
with polarizing prisms are shown in Figures 2-3 and 2-4. As illustrated,
the optical train from the mirror upward consists of the polarizer
(Ahrens type ), lower fixed lenses of the condenser, removable upper
lcnses of the con denser, object in position on the stage, objective,
' '1'1,, It'I'II' 1Ii1''' / is 111'1 (' 11 IIsed 10 ill(li (;al"(; Ihe polarizin g devic;c II scd in th e microNt''' lh'. II j , (i t',i VC' d 1'''"11 III(' pr bll' llI'igill ally dl'sigll ud by William Nicol. The prisms
1111 11' 1I ",d " " ' ,I" , I IIII I ' IIS CI" 1I ,,",i1al' "'O''l' l' lli uil' IIL Lypu. Polarizing plates may also
I", I, ClI ".. I,",,,.I.
13
Pinhole disc
Openinq for
accessory plates
,.
Objective clutch -
{ris diopllroqm
J:,jaJ!
Objective
Rototinq stoqe
(0150 vertical
motion)
~
Combined
coarse
and fine
adjustment
2-2. A polarizing micro scope with polarizing plates and a deviating prism
(E . Leitz, Inc.) . The features shown are suitable for most microscopic work. The eyepiece tube is inclined to permit observation at a convenient angle, the analyzer and
polarizer are polarizing plates, and either a mirror or substage illuminator may be
employed.
FIG.
14
MINERAL OPTICS
eyepiece
"
Coarse focllsing
od/Ilstment ----~-_,
'f Body
Compensating lens
Ahrens analyzing
prism
,1
Protecting plate
~-CampensatinQ
lens
~Pmfp('tlnfl plates
diaphragm
_~, ~
__'.
___
--,~
,-
FIG.
15
MINERAL OPTICS
miform illumination. If the objective is placed in focus and the eye)iece removed, the used aperture of the condenser may be observed by
ooking down the tube of the microscope. This may be termed the conlense1' ci1'cle. It is a bright circular area encircled by a dimly lighted band
Eyepiece
llIt.
M icroscope tube
~r;::
Tube diaphragm
Ami ci-Bertrand lens
----------~
-~
_"i
,./
./
li mb _ _ __
~ack-ond - p i n i o n
housing
Eccentric d omp
Milled ring
Bulb holder
E;lectric cabl e
Circular bose
FIG. 2-5. Section al view of a research polarizing microscope (Carl Zeiss, Gottingen,
W est Germany). Thc instrument is constructed with an inclined tube, deviating
prism, polarizing pl ates, intern al illumination, and eccentric centerin g objectives.
or rill g. T,he lattcr is somctim es termed the objective circle. The objective
;ircl e is 1I0t hound ed hy a diaphragm hut is limited by the margin of the
O\lj( 'cli vO lellses . In Irll croscopi c adjusLm ent, it has b een found that the
('(llId"IIS('I" (" it'd, ' sll Ottid I)( ) as II Ci\rly C(I1I ,11 Lo Lh e objective circle in
d llllll( l(( II' li S plIss lltl, ', wll lH lliI t'HIi Silt g glUI'll, Tlli ~ is pll rli cul \l rly important _
17
in using objectives yielding high initial magnification with correspondingly high numerical apertures. Oil-immersion objectives usually require
the use of immersion condensers in order to avoid the loss of useful
magnification from glare. Either corrected water or oil-immersion condensers may be used. The numerical aperture of the condenser should be
less than the numerical aperture of the objective by a small amount.
Conoscopic Observation. The arrangement of the image-forming
and illuminating beams in conoscopic observation differs in part
from the orthoscopic assemblage.
The object may be considered as
an originating source for the observation of interference images which
appear in the objective circle. The
light rays which pass through the
condenser diaphragm have passed
through the polarizer and are polarized. The rays are parallel to
each other on emerging from the
condenser front lens, but then become convergent to an extent which
depends on the aperture of the
substage. The convergent rays pene trate the object, which modifies
the light transmitted and develops
unusual optical effects,
The rays diverge above the objective circle and pass through a FIG. 2-6. A polarizing microscope previpolarizing device with a plane at ously illustrated in section (Fig. 2-5)
. I
I
I'
th
(Carl Zeiss, Gottingen, W est Germany) .
rig lt ang es to the po .anzer ( e F eatures of this microscope are pol ariz:llIa Iyzer ). They merge Il1 the plane ing plates, eccentric centered objectives,
(If Lh e fi eld stop in the eyepiece to a rotating nose piece, built-in illuminad
.
f tl
b' r
tion, inclined tube, and vertical as well
pro uce an Image 0
le 0 Jec Ive as horizontal stage adjustment.
:tperLure stop. The field-stop image
is seen in the eyepiece and forms an image on the retina of the eye.
Thc position of the exit pupil dep ends upon the objective employed.
'1' 11(' dis Lance of the image in the fi eld stop from the Bertrand lens will
,!Iso (Iiflcr. Th e position of the eyepiece must be adjusted to permit a
" H'ltS at tI lc neIcl stop.
Th o illla gc of th e ohjcct, which simulates a light source, is brought by
tli n Alltici - Ikrlrancllcns Lo Lh c pla ll e of 110 0 diaphragm in the microscope
Jtli l('. 'I' ll( ' ('y('pi( 't'( , 111( '11 ope rates Lo brill g Lh e ilila ge inLo th e plane of the
MINERAL OPTICS
18
19
orthoscopic
Conoscopic
Eyepiece
source
Bertrand lens
.a
~~
oll'llumination
Lens
to concentrate light
(Light Mter
~
~
?:2
Analyzer
lie'
~ "ource
lield
II
-Objective cire/e
.::::::::::
Objecttve
Sample
Condenser
t:Field diaphragm
Mirror
FIG. 2-8. Diagram showing the relative dimensions of the different fields in the microscope and their relation to the illumination. (After Belling. )
0/_~
Polarizer
Mirror
(al
(bl
FIG. 2-7. A diagram showing the path of light through the microscope. (a) eonoscopic observation, high magnification, Huygenian ocular, Amici-Bertrand lens, polarizing prisms, crossed nicols, and an au xiliary condenser immediately below the object
are illustrated. An optical pattern is obscrved in the eye. (b) Orthoscopic observation, crossed nicols, intermeuiate magnification, Huygenian ocular, and polarizing
prisms are illustrated. A realistic flat picture of the object is formed in the eye.
exit pupil of the microscope. The pupil of the eye is placed at this level
to observe the interfercnce figure.
Parts of the Microscope. The parts of a polarizing microscope equipped
either with polarizing plates or nicols are indicated in Figures 2-2, 2-3,
and 2-5. The names of the mechanical features are largely self-explanatory, but a number of the optical items will receive further comment.
Oculars. The ocular consists of a tube which fits snugly into the tube
of the microscope, ordinarily with a small sel screw lo hold it in a fixcd
position with cross hairs north-south and east-west in the field of view.
An eye lens is located above and a field lens below. A visual ReId stop
with crosshairs, cross lines, or a ReId micrometer lies above the Reld lens
in the Huygenian ocular (Figure 2-9a). The ReId stop lies below the
ReId lens in the Ramsden-type ocular (Figure 2-9b) . The image plane
and the plane of the crosshairs should coincide.
Oculars used in modem petrographic microscopes are ordinarily of the Huygenian
type or a simple modification. TIlese are
usually used in combination with 40 mm or
16 mm or cOlTesponding objectives. Where
'ombinations giving higher magnifications
are desired, the ocular is similar to the Huy(al
(b)
gcnian ocular but contains a specially cor- FIG. 2-9. Sections of positive
reclcd cyc-Icns arrangement giving a flat and negative oculars. (a) The
field . Such corrcction is particularly impor- Huygenian ocular (a negative
ocular) . ( b ) The Ramsden
lant for photomicrography.
ocular (a positive ocular).
Thc IIuygenian ocular is frequently called
a negative ocular. The eyepiece as a whole has no external focal plane
on the field-lens side. The Ramsden ocular is described as a positive
Deu/m. The foca l plane li es below the field lens and the object image is
form cd by th l) ohjcctive in lhi:; plane.
on'pollsatillg oculars arc cOllstru cted lo accompany apochromatic
objcellv('s, III ol'dor lo securo Ih n h('st I'('s lilts, oClilars magnifying more
MINERAL OPTICS
20
than ten times should b e of this type. Ordinary 5 X and lO X oculars are
satisfactory for most work with the polarizing microscope.
The Filar micrometer eyepiece (Figure 2-10) is designed for accurate
horizontal measurement across the field of view. A small cross line is
moved to and fro. The movement
is recorded on a drum at the side
of the eyepiece. A fine line through
the center of the field parallel to
the screw axis serves as a guide
in orienting the object with reference to the direction of movement
of the crossline. In the lower section of the field, a scale ruled in
0.5 mm with every second interval
numbered serves for counting screw
revolutions.
Micrometer eyepieces are also utiFIG. 2-10. The filar micrometer. The
lized when the dimensions of particudrum records the movement of a crossline which traverses the field of view.
lar objects in the field of view are de(Bausch and Lomb Optical Co.)
sired (Figure 2-11a). The Huygenian
eyepiece contains a scale divided into 0.1 mm movable by means of a
screw at the side. The eye lens is focused on the scale. Such eyepieces are
useful in determining the axial angle of interference figures with the
microscope. The eyepieces should be calibrated with the aid of the stage
21
(0)
(b)
(c)
(0)
(b)
(c)
FIG. 2-11. (a) Micrometer ocular; (b) scale in a micrometer ocular; (c) grating
micrometer. (Carl Zeiss, Gottingen, W est Germany.)
22
MINERAL OPTICS
The optical tube length divided by the focal length equals the initial
magnification. Several manufacturers stamp the initial magnification for
a standard mechanical tube length 3 on the objective. This figure multiplied by the power of the eyepiece gives the magnification for a standard
tube length. This should be corrected , however, when the analyzing
prism is inserted (unless the prism mount contains a correcting lens).
Corrections may b e determined by using stage and eyepiece micrometers .
The working distance is the distance b etween the objective and the top
of the cover glass of the microscope slide when the objective is in focus .
The numerical ap erture (N.A. ) of an objective is a measure of the
largest cone of light th at it covers from an object point at the principal
focus. N.A. equals n sin p., where n is the index of refraction of the
23
(bl
FIG. 2-13. Diagram illustra ting the conve rgence of ligh t by means of cedar oil placed
in front of the lens of an oil-immersion objective. (a) Air alone without ced ar oil;
( b) with cedar oil.
medium b etween the object under examination and the objective 4 and
p. is one-half the angle of the cone of light entering the lens. The numerical aperture furnish es a criterion of the quality of an objective. Other
things b eing equal, at any magnification, the intensity of the image dep ends upon N .A.; th e resolving power is directly proportional to N.A.;
the depth of focus is inversely proportional to N.A. In two objectives
haVing the same focal distance and therefore the same magnification, the
one with the greater N.A. will take a larger cone of light from the object
and will yield a brighter image. In general, with ordinary lighting, the
limit of useful magnification for an average observer lies between 500
and 1000 times the N.A.
Oil-immersion objectives are used for high magnifications where a high
degree of resolving power and correction are required. The oil should
agree in both dispersive power and index of refraction with the front
lens of the objective. The effect of oil immersion on the cone of light entering the front lens of an oil-immersion objective is shown in Figure 2-13.
3 Bau sch and Lomb Op tical Co. and Spencer L ens Co. = 160 mm , L eitz = 170
mm, Zeiss
170 mm.
Air ( n
1) in tho case of a dry objective and speCially prep ared cedar oil
( n = 1.515 ) in un oil -hnll1lJrs ion objective,
Achrom a t ic .. . .. .. .. ..... . .
Ac hromatic ... . ... . .. . .... .
A,hrom a tic .... . . . .. .. .. ...
A po..i1l'om a tic ........ ......
A po(' hromat.ic . .......
A po(' hrom a t ic (oil imm ersion )
EquivaMagnificatio ns
lent
Mag ni fiwit h ocul a rs
cation
focus,
mill inumb er
meters
5X lO X 15X
- --
40
32
16
8
4
2
3. 2
4.3
10
23
46
92
16
22
50
115
230
460
32
48
43
65
100 150
230 345
460 690
920 1380
Workin g d istanee,
m illim eters
N. A.
- --
34.5
27 .0
5.8
0 .85
0 20
0 . 11
0 . 12
0 . 15
0 .25
0 .65
0 .95
1. 32
After L eitz .
T hcre are limits to the resolving power of the microscope, even with
Ilu ) hest lens systems available. As long as the increase in magnification
I('s lil ls in b etter vision of an object and more definite separation of detail,
III(' magnification may b e said to be "useful. " When the object merely
IIt 'c'omcs brgcr without aI)Y increase in resolving power, the magnifica110 11 is "empty." So-callcd empty magnifications of great magnitude are
possi blc.
I"or praclical p urp oscs the uppcr limit of "useful" magnification with
111 0 polari zin g microscopc is about 1800 :1. 5 L arger magnifications, as
All 1111 1IIIIII l'I'hinli o hjC'cli ve (Ca rl Zeiss ) p rim a ry mag nifica ti on 120, N .A. 1.3, free
\\ 111ki ll /: .!I , III II ' I) O.OH 111111, i ll ('llI lI hill ll li o ll w ilh a 15 X OCill aI', shou ld yi eld a magnifl1'11 1111 11 111 1111 II I' IKOO : I.
24
MINERAL OPTICS
1.30
0 .85
0 .65
0 .30
136 , 000
89 , 000
68 ,000
31, 000
25
1",(:. 2-14. A sectional view showing a prism in position in the substage assembly.
'\ "'<;l ion of a sub stage assembly containing a polarizing plate (filter) is shown in
1,'lg.2-4. (Am erican Optical Co.)
hri ng the image of an interference figure into the focal plane of the
dar. The device was originally used by Amici (1844) and was later
oI d:lptecl by Bertrand (1878).
IlIlerference figures may b e observed without the Amici-Bertrand lens
il lli c ocular is removed. For superior results, an Amici-Bertrand lens with
01 IO(, lI sin g d iaphragm and an auxiliary magnifier to fit over the eyepiece
1)('1
j ',
II St t! .
( ; () IIr/ f' IIS('J' . T llfCO co mpon ents may be present in a condenser system
.. I Ih' Iy pe sel cclcd forillu slrali on. Tn ordin ary examination with low(1"\\/(' 1' oiJjvclivos a lens compon ent with an illuminating ap erture of
,dhli ll 0.22 is Il s('d . III work in g willi hi gh powC'r or in obtainin g inter-
26
/1 \\
27
The mica plate and gypsum plate (G erman- Glimmer and Gips ), together with a centering pin, are illustrated in Figure 2-18. The slow-ray
directions in both the mica and gypsum plates are indicated.
Berek Compensator. The compensator is designed to fit the
tube slit above the objective in
the same opening used for the
gypsum and the mica plates. It is
employed in the d etermination of
the order of interference colors
bel:\veen crossed nieols.
A calcite plate with the c-axis
vertical is inserted in the accessory slot of the microscope. The
plate forms a window in the compensator and is rotated by turning a graduated drum. T.he compensator (Figure 2-19) is rotated
IIntil the color of the mineral is
neuh'alized (becomes gray) . The
rolation of the compensator nee('S5ary to bring this about is a
Ill('asure of the retardation.
A compensator to measure small
differences in retardation is shown
il\ Figure 2-20. A mica plate with
. 1 re lardation of YaO A red is tilted
II)' lurning a h orizontal graduated
dlllm.
OlJiect Slide. Various lengths
d lid widths of object slides may
hI' Iised, but the thickness is of
,',I( 'a(' 1' importance. Immersion
IOlld( 'nsers are mad e to work to
111", 1 adva ntage with slides from
II l) I() 1.0 m m lhiek. Thus slides
FIG, 2-16, The fine ad justment. ( American
iJ II I 'lI{led for slud y at hi gh mag- Optical Co. )
Ilili(': dions sll olil d con ronn to this
IIIII''' "('SS ir th e mos t sa lisfactory res ul ts are to be secured.
~>1i( h's 2G mm w ide hy 45 111m long arc gencrally used for mounting
Ill ill ."('(' lioIlS or mi ll era l:; and rocks. Sli ch sli des fit easily on the rotating
. 11l1~1l of lil t ' polnri zill g lili eros('ope yeL ;l rc la rge c nough to contain a
1:111111 ,, !z('c1 sli( '(' II l1d II lso II 11 11 )('1 of' sllil ahl e tlill H'lI sions. Lo ng slides
28
MINERAL OPTICS
c;.;.r
~'"
"".
Quartz
/ -3 ard.
~~~,"="1!...C!:>..1
'"',.
The quartz wedge mounted on a glass plate and in a metal frame. The
arrow marks the slow-ray direction. Ordinarily a wedge covers four orders from the
thin edge to the thickest portion. (Am erican Optical Co.)
FIG. 2-17.
Mica
Gypsum
red
0Nr
LN
(0)
1/4
--
Fast
Slow
0L
(b)
IF'"
Slow
(c)
2-18. The gypsum plate (a), mica plate (b), and a centering pin (c). (E .
Leitz, Inc.)
FIG.
directly against the bottom of the cover glass. In case the slide is
poorly mounted and a space intervenes b etween the top of the slice and
the bottom of the cover glass, the extra distance should be considered
as so much additional thickness of cover glass. In order to obtain the
best results with objectives, cover glasses of standard thickness should
b e employed .
Precautions to Be Observed in the Use of the Microscope. Even under
the h es t conditiolls mi crosc(lpe work prodll('('s :I ('('rtain allloHnt of stra in
29
upon the eyes. It is essential, therefore, to employ the best possible conditions of work in order to reduce such strain to a minimum.
The student should assume an erect but not too rigid position. Such
a position with the microscope tube
inclined allows him to work with
maximum comfort.
Both eyes should b e kept open
while looking through the instrument. If it is difficult to do this at
IIrst, a shield should b e placed over
the eye not in use. It is also a good
plan to learn to observe equally
well with either eye and not to de- FIG. 2-19. The Berek Compensator. (E.
.
Leitz Inc.)
vclop the so-called 1nlC1'OSCOpe e y e .
,
.
Care of the Instrument. A polarizing microscope is expensive. Properly
Ilscd, it should last a lifetime. Otherwise, it may become useless with
littlc real service. Most of the precautions to be observed in the use of
the instrument are such as should
be applied to any piece of fine apparatus. A few, however, are of
special nature and should be specially mentioned.
Fine-textured lens paper or, still
better, a camel's-hair brush should
be used for cleaning all optical
parts. This applies to the ocular,
the objectives, the substage system,
the mirror, and the two nicols.
Objectives should be brought
into focus by moving the tube of
the microscope upward rather than
downward. Possibility of contact
between the lower lens of the objective and the thin section is thus
I"..
!2 20. A cOlllpensator to mcaSUl e
llilo ill dili'ercnces in retardation. Mica avoided . High-power or oil-immer1'"111 ', II willdow in the accessory plate.
sion objectives should be cleaned
II !l Illy 1)(' lilted liy lurning the drum.
with
lens paper and xylol or ben11,11 " ,t:t ld atioll is y", red. (E. Leitz,
zinc (not alcohol).
III'
Chemicals should not be used on
lilt' ~ I "I.'t 1111 I('ss sp('ci:11 preca utions are takcn to protect the objective.
(lIl l"" ti v,'s 'lill y Ill' prol('('I ('d hy lit e usc of cover glasses fastened to the
I"\\'~' r 1('ll s. OI'I':l sioll;tlly i lll old objective is reserved for chemical work
d"" Il,
30
MINERAL OPTICS
31
,~,~w~~_"""",.
FIG.
2-21b. A strong lamp for general utility. (Am erican Optical Co.)
I",, :. 2-2 1c. A low-vollage lamp with V-slots for filters. (B ausch and Lomb Optical
(II )
', 11111'('( : atinRnily with respect to the object plane. The two annuli when
, \d( 'lly t'O Il Ct'lllric and. supcr imposed produ ce a phase difference of one' I" I"I('J' w;lv(' lcll gtll .
Iloll I " <I;[l'k" ( ' (JIII I'us l and "hl'i ght " (,Oll t ra st may he produced by conb'ol
Iii 11111 111111 IIJiv!(III 'SS wiJi<'i I ('() lill'ihIJl \'s In 11,( , pll:ls(' sllii't. Where the
32
M1N!,;RAL Ol'T1CS
33
ries of trial exposures will first be necessary. The exposure reading for
each exposure, as well as the time, should be recorded, When a satisfactory exposure has been secured, the time and exposure reading should be
noted. For example, suppose the time is 10 seconds and the meter reads
"5" when a good photograph is secured. For another exposure the meter
~\ 1
, I - II--,}
=
.'"
'I ~
I t~JjIIi ,1.~~ ,
#'
' \:.~.~
. >.~ ~ ~.~.
~.J~~,
~,.,
~~"~"'.
:
i::- t
f.:."
r('ads "2.5." Then the required time for the second exposure would be
G scconds.
Where larger photomicrographs are desired cameras equipped for cut
fi lms or plates may be uscd in place of the small camera mentioned
above. rll gcncral , photomicrographs of thin sections are taken with
:1.2X Or 'lO X objeclivcs si nce th e depth of th e scction interfcres with the
I OC Il S at lli gh IlIil gnifi calioll. AI III(' sa mc lime the Lextnrcs ord in arily obs\'rv\,d 01'1( '11 II PP('III' tt) h('tll ' l' II d Vll lllll j.(t ' ti l low\'!' II lilglljfkaliOl1s.
MINERAL OPTICS
34
1.
2.
3.
4.
35
Image centered
1. Centering the Stage with the Field. The stage is centered when the
axis of rotation coincides with the tube axis of the microscope, the tube
axis standing perpendicular to the
center of the field of view. Screws
on the side of either the objective
collar or the stage (Figure 2-25) are
used to align the tube axis and the
stage. A simple procedure is fol, lowed. While looking through the
instrument at the field of view, pick
out an easily recognizable point, and
then rotate the stage. The point
should describe a concentric circle
of rotation about the intersection of
the cross hairs. If it does not, rotate
the stage until the point is farthest
from the intersection of the crosshairs, bring it in halfway by means
of the centering screws, and then
bring it to the center of the stage by
actually moving the slide itself. Rotate the stage, and repeat the operation if the centering has not been
completed the first time.
FIG. 2-24. Photomicrographic camera,
exposure meter, and viewing lens.
2. Crossing the Nicols. The planes
(Courtes y of Paul Rosenthal, 505 Fifth
of
vibration of the hvo prisms
Ave., New York 17, N.Y.)
should be set at right angles to each
other. The plane of vibration of the analyzer is usually fixed by the manufacturer either from left to right or up and down as one observes the
microscopic field. The lower nicol is adjusted at right angles by rotating
it in the substage collar until the field becomes dark, with both nicols in
the path of li ght. The nicols should remain in th e position giving maximllm darkn css. A small pin usually fits into a notch at this position.
3. '/' es(ill {!, (I, c Cmss lwi'l's. The (Toss klirs 'in Ihe oc ular mav h c cithcr
Stage
Stage
FIG. 2-25. Diagram illustrating centering the field of view of the microscope.
II
,j6
MINERAL OPTICS
(0)
(b)
FIG. 2-27. Determining the vibration plane of the lower nicol : (a) elongated
tourmaline fragments; (b) biotite in thin section.
out from the tube. These indicate either the vibration direction or the
normal to the vibration direction, depending upon whether the slide is
biotite or tourmaline.
REFERENCES
Allen, R M.: "The Microscope," D. Van Nostrand Company, Inc., Princeton,
N.J., 1940.
Amici, G. B.: Ann. chim. et phys., 3d ser., vol. 12, p. 114, 1844.
Beck, Conrad: "The Microscope," R & J. Beck, Ltd., London, 1938.
Belling, John: "The Use of the Microscope," McGraw-Hill Book Company, Inc. ,
New York, 1930.
Bennett, Alva H., Harold Osterberg, Helen Jupnik, and Oscar W. Richards:
"Phase Microscopy," John Wiley and Sons, Inc. , New York, 1951.
Berek, Max: "Anleitung zu optischen Untersuchungen mit dem Polarisationsmikroskop," Verlag Schweitzerbart, Stuttgart, 1953.
Bertrand, E.: Z. Kryst ., vol. 1, p. 69 , 1877.
Bcrtrand, E.: 13I/II. soc. fmm; . min e'm l., vol. 1, pp. 27, 97, 1878.
Bcrtrand, L. , and M. TIOllballlt: "L'cmploi cl\.l Mi croscopc Po1::tris:lllt," Paris ,
I D3fl.
37
CHAPTER
39
40
MINERAL OPTICS
41
Light Vector. The action of light may be described as depending upon
the periodi c altern ation of a light vector that lies parallel to the plane
of the wavefront and in isotropic media is perpendicular to the direction of propagation. In anisotropic media the vector is still parallel to the
plane of the wavefront but, aside from certain limited positions, is not
perpendicular to the direction of propagation.
In the case of monochromatic light, the light vector follows the laws of
simple harmonic motion, the vibration period T dep ending upon the color
of the monochTOmatic light. The wavelength A- i.e., the distance between
two successive like points on a wave train- is equal to the velocity of
propagation v multiplied by ~he vibration period:
A
= vT
f = "}.
or
v = fA
12
MINERAL OPTICS
43
goes a change in velOCity. A corresponding change must occur, therefore,
in either the wavelength or the frequency. Since the vibration period remains the same for a given color, the change occurs in the wavelength.
The wavelength will differ even for the same color in different bodies;
(0)
R
,. jL
'\\:
/N--
FIG. 3-1. The harmonic curve produced by movement around a circle combined with
motion along a straight line.
(b)
(e)
14
MINERAL OPTICS
!iolet is 0.0000393 cm. In terms of millimicrons (the units commonly em)loyed in dealing with light) , the figures are:
Red light = 759 mM
Violet light = 393 mM
White light, or ordinary light , is a combination of all the different
wavelengths visible to the eye in one simultaneous effect. When only
c>ne wavelength is observed, light is singly colored, or monochromatic.
White light may b e considered composed of seven different colors. These
grade into each other, forming a continuous spectrum. The colors of the
spectrum are frequently represented by arbitrarily chosen wavelengths
representing mean values of the various colors, as follows:
R ed
Ora nge
Y ellow
Green
Blue
Indigo
Violet
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
700 mM
620 mIL
560 mIL
515 mM
470 mIL
440 mIL
410 mM
1\ A
~Gfileetf;n
Yellow
/,/,;Oronqe
VAt)
x- Ex- Ultro:
roys tremf I violet,:
I
U.
v. './
\~
Visible
spectrum
3,900.00
390. 00
0.39
0.00039
F I G.
A{
Red
,
'.
\
___
-'"
_----
_-/-Infro red
'w"'-7,600.00 10,000.00
760.00
1,000.00
0.7 6
1. 00
0.0 0076
0.001
Au
MfL
fL
mm
45
47
REFRACTION
the trace of the plane normal to the incident beam I strikes the surface at
II, the point 15 is still a considerable distance above the bounding plane.
The positions 12 , l a, and I ., together with corresponding intermediate
CHAPTER
R efraction
bo =~
sin i
or
also
be
sin r = bo
be
bo = sin r
or
Air
I,
Rs l\
b\
\
- .-
Wafer
\
\
\
or
\
\
R;\
"t
\
\.
rA
\
\
be
. = - .-
sm '!,
sm r
ao
sin i
be = sin r
\
FIG.
ao
n = be
4-1. Light b eing refracted on p assing from a rare into a denser medium.
0 1'
sm '!,
- .smr
It appears from the foregoing equation that for any angle of incidence
the ratio of the sine of the angle of incidence to the sine of the angle of
MINERAL OPTICS
48
n = v
(N aD)
Indices of refraction
n = 1. 4338
n, = 1.5533; nw = 1 5442
nw = 1 .6585 ;n, = 1 .4863
nw = 1.6461; n, = 1.6417
na = 1.5301;n~ = 1.6816;ny = 1 6859
(Yellow) n = 1.7714
(Yellow) n = 2.3692
* Quartz,
49
REFRACTION
Fluorite
Illumination
Index of
refraction,
n
Illumination
Index of
refraction,
n
1.43095
1.43963
2.40735
2.46476
Dispersion . .. .... . . . . .. .. . .
0 .00868
0 .05741
All min erals have some disp erSive power, but fluorite and diamond
represent approxim ately the two ex tremes.
On aCCOlin t of the d ispersion of min erals , accurate de terminations
of illlli <.; os of l'l'i"r;lclioll a rc mud e w ilh monochromatic light. In
MINERAL OPTICS
50
tt ! /
<,;r
c;.~?!!t ft
REFRACTION
51
52
MINERAL OPTICS
sphere and the mineral. The light from the mineral is r eHected through
the hemisphere in part and produces an image in the obs erving telescope
focus ed at 0, as illustrated in the figure . The upper half of the field will
be dark, while the lower half is illuminated (or vice versa if the image
is inverted). If monochromatic light is used and the mineral is isoh'opic,
the boundary between the light and dark areas will b e sharp, marking
the critical angle accurately (Figure 4-5a), O n the other hand, in the case
of white light the colors of the spectrum lie between the light and dark
Images observed
53
REFRACTION
eral from the side and is refracted downward through the hemisphere
as shown in Figure 4-6. In this case the upper half of the fi eld of view
is dark, and the lower h alf is illuminated. Otherwise the same principles
prevail that apply to the oth er method. The conh'ast between the two
fields is more pronounced when the mineral is illuminated by grazing
incidence.
Whether employing total reHection or grazing incidence, the index of
refraction of the glass hemisphere must be accurately known. This is
usually ascertained by determining the index of refraction by total reHection in reference to air with the mineral plate removed, before de-
Mineral plate
./
I
I
Glass
hemisphere
I
I
I
I
I
I
(bl
Isotropic
FIG.
(dl
Anisotropic
( 1
(a 1 Monochromatic
light
C
Isotropic
Anisotropic
4-5. Illumination from below in determining th e critical angle by total reflection.
~:~:(\\\
FIG . 4-6. D etermination of the index of refraction with the incident beam grazing the
surface of the hemisphere.
"
54
MINERAL OPTICS
Figure 4-7 is an illustration of one of the standard Abbe (Zeiss) refractometers commonly used in determining the indices of refraction of
liquids (also of minerals and crystals). The refractive index is read off
a graduated sector, and the instrument may be quickly set for reading
directly. A scale is arranged in the image of the eyepiece that gives the
values of indices of refraction for all angles within the range of the instrument, which extends from nD = 1.3 to nn = 1.7.
A refractometer of this type consists essentially of a double prism
that receives the liquid to be tested, a t elescope for viewing the line of
the critical angle, and a scale sector for reading the angle. The double
prism is made up of an illuminating prism F (Figure 4-8) with a
ground-glass surface and a refracting prism P that operates on the
principle of grazing incidence. The
refracting prism takes the place of
the glass hemisphere in other refractom eters. A compensating device is inserted in the telescope to
approximate monochromatic light
(D line of sodium). The refractometer is usually adjusted for use
by testing the instrument with a
glass plate of known index.
Index of Refraction by the Prism
Method. In Figure 4-9 a beam of
FTG. 4-7. The Abbe refractometer. (CaTl
monochromatic light strikes the
Z eiss, Inc . )
prism ABC. At AB the beam R is
bent toward the perpendicular OP.
At BC the beam R' emerges and is bent away from the p e11)endicular
O'P'. R' continues in a straight line from this point, making an angle of
deviation d with the original direction.
When the angle d is the minimum that can be observed when the
prism is turned with respect to the b eam (the angle of minimum deviation) and the angle p of the prism is also known, the index of refraction
of the glass of the prism may be computed. The formula by which the
index is computed is
n
sin Yz (d + p)
= ---'-0::....:.,,.....,..'----"-'-
sin Yz p
p = angle of I he prism
d = fl. ll l-!; le of millimum devirtl,ioll of Lh e hea1U
n = ir~d ex of rdn tetioll of ('11 0 priHI(\
55
REFRACTION
FlG .
When the beam of light striking the prism is not monochromatic but
consists of the various wavelengths that combine to produce ordinary
light, a spectrum is produced as shown in Figure 4-10.
The prism formula is paIi:icu!arly useful for determining the inB
d ices of refraction of glass prisms,
lranspaI'ent crystals, and hollow
P-', ,
,--'
,.-/ p '
"
prisms filled with oil. A prism is
'..-1'<',
/,.'/0'
d
,~
adjusted vertically on a one-circle
goniometer and the prism angle
R
Ill eas ured by obtaining reRections
lirs t from one side and then from
A
--0
Ihe other and reading th e an gle on
FIG , 4-9. A bcam of light bent to one
Ill e gradu a tcd circl e. 'W ith th e same side by pass ing throu gh a glass prism.
';('I-Ilp a b eam oJ light is passed
1III"OII gii Lll e prism a nd the an gle of minimum deviation is measured. The
1I 1t\( 'X or wrr;t (;liull is lill'lI (;OIlIPUlccl directly from th e formul a given above,
IIli li zili g III(' 1III g\(o of III(' prislI) a lld lil t! all g lo o\' minimum deviation.
"'--::1
MINERAL OPTICS
56
57
REFRACTION
p arts are b eveled and cemented to a solid glass wedge. If the walls of
the hollow prism are made of glass with p arallel sides, correction for the
glass is not necess ary. It is b est, however, to assume an exaggerated b evel
and mount th e two sides in oppos ed p ositions. Any existing lack of parallelism will be largely corrected in this way. Index of refraction determinations using this method are useful for determining the indices of refraction of liquids b eyond the range of commercial refractometers . The
method is also suitable wh en a refractometer is not available and as a
check when it is available.4
If the same prism is always used, a chart may b e prepared givin g the
index of refraction corresponding to each angle of minimum d eviation
for a given w avelength . If the chart covers the range of indices of refraction from 1.400 to 1.850, it will include all ordinarily determined
values. Indices of refraction may b e determined with the light of a sodium
flame obtained by holdin g an asb estos sh eet previously saturated in salt
in a fan-flame burner. Light from a mercury-vapor arc or white light
transmitted through a standard color RIter is also occasionally employed.
A h elium-gas tube gives an ideal sodium line.5
A convenient method of securing a sodium flame h as been suggested
by F. Lowell Dunn, M.D. , of Omaha, Nebr. H e uses a coarse alundum
RItration crucible filled with salt and susp ends it over a Meker burner .
A molten h emisphere of NaCl form s in the bottom of the crucible, which
gives a sodium flame of extremely high intensity. The burner should b e
p laced under a hood and at a safe dist ance from the microscope.
SpeCial light bulbs giving a strong sodium light h ave b een developed
by the Gen eral Electric Company (Figure 4-12). These require about
20 minutes to acquire the proper color value but after developing the
correct intensity fw-nish an excellent source of illumination.
T he refractive indices of the various types of glass used in optical
equipment are determined to the eighth decimal place with sodium light,
mercury-vapor light, and several other light sources. Such precision is
not employed in examining minerals with the microscope, nor is it possible without a speCial goniometer.
T he D etermination of the Index of Refraction with the Microscope.
T he index of refraction of a mineral is seldom determined completely in
('xamination of thin sections . The slices are mounted in Canada b alsam,
and the usual t est consists in ascertaining whether a given mineral has
3
/\
~
//\
///
d,
d,
~;:""
%:f
~~~~E========-,
~.
'Ii~'\
! JndlqO
Violet
"/p
~F
F IG. 4-10. Diagram illustrating the variation in the angle of minimum deviation of a
prism with the wavelength of light.
3 Bakelite resinoid, baked at 70C for 10 hr and followed by baking at 125 for
I() hI', will make a sol id prism. Bakelite vamish containing china oil is affected by
j"d"X li(l' licl s anc! sholl lcl he avoid cd.
Ii ollow prisills of sl've r:11 lypcs have heen developed by Dr. E . S. Larsen of
11 "I'v"I'd tJ niv('I's ity, Dr. C. S. Hoss of Ihe U.S. Ccologieal Survey, and Dr. H. E.
tl'\ , " wi" of Iho (;,,"p hy, il',, 1 I ."hol': ll ory.
n 1 '~ "l p l () yl ' d \" 11 " , 1:t " "t: tI () tl l '~ of II ", U.S. C\'ologica l S," vcy,
I
58
4-12. Sodium laboratory arc furnishing a strong source of sodium light. (N ela
Specialty Division, Lamp Division of General Electric Co.)
FIG.
an index of refraction greater or less than b alsam. The indices of adjacent minerals are also compared with each other.
The indices of refraction of adjacent transparent substances can b e
compared in several ways. The two most useful methods are the method
of central illumina tion and that of oblique illumination.
A method of direct determination with the microscope exists, but unfort unately it is not sufficiently accurate with thin sections.
The M ethod of Central Illllmination . The test is b est made with a
magnification of 80 or grea ter, with th e iris di aphragm p artly closcd . It
is quite scnsitive lo small diffe rcnces in refrac tive indi ces a t sll ch maglIill c: Lli olls. Ir ITIOII ()(' llrO!1):lli (' li ght is ('nlpl oy('d, il is p oss ihle to (Ii s-
REFRACTION
59
MINERAL OPTICS
30
( n = 1.50), and B has a greater index, 1.70. A cone of light rays enters
the two minerals from the balsam below, divided evenly on both sides
)f the bounding plane. The cone of light may be represented by the rays
1, 2, 3, and 4 with angles of inclination as indicated in the diagram.
The critical angle in mineral B with respect to the bounding plane is
about 62. The rays of light within B (3 and 4) which strike the surface
,
'\2]
--------'
"',
H t
~
Tube raised
FIG.
'.
Tube at focus
Tube lowered
Reflected I and 2 ~
> balsam.
zoneu
ZoneM -Zone L
20
r-45"
-+-
'\,4
FIG. 4-14. A theoretical explanation of the movement of the light line in central
illumination. (Modified from Hotchkiss.)
YZ at an angle greater than the critical angle are totally reflected. The
rays of light within A (1 and 2) are split at the bounding surface, part
being refracted into B and part being reflected back into A. The comparative intensity of the reflected and refracted rays depends upon the character of the boundin g planc. If thc contact smface is highly polished ,
morc li ght is rcncctcd and less rcfractcd. If th c smfacc is rough, as is
IIslially th o case, more' li ghL is rdra CI('<l inLo 13.
61
REFRACTION
'6
32.
MINERAL OPTICS
63
REFRACTION
REFERENCES
Becke, F.: Sit:::;bel'. Akad. Wiss. Wien, Cll , Abt. 1, pp. 358-378, 1893.
Graham, G. W .: Mi11eml. Mag., vol. 15, pp. 341-347, 1910.
Hotchkiss, W . O.: Am. C eol. , vol. 36, pp. 305-308, 1905.
Saylor, C. P.: Accuracy of Microscopical Methods for Determining Refractive
Index by Immersion , Nat. BUT. Sta.ndards, Research Paper 829, vol. 15,
pp. 277-294, 1935.
Wright, F . E.: The Methods of Petrographic-microscopic Research, Carn egie
I11st. Pub. 158, 1911.
" Anolh er sirnple W[lY 10 see\ll'c Ih e ('IT('e l of oh li qii e illuminalion Sii ggcs led by Dr.
If. DOiiiiay ('o"" i , l ~ in shadiii g 11\\; ndd hy partial ly iii M' rting the (nul lQ CO\\-
J. D .
Irlinlng tho
(,(cot
65
CHAPTER
through a nicol prism. The instrument was used before the advent of
the modern polarizing microscope for the study of mineral plates.
Polarization by Absorption. Tourmaline yields polarization by absorption. Light that strikes the clystal vibrating in a variety of planes is
strongly absorbed except along one plane. The rays of light that emerge
limited to this plane of vibration are thus plane-polarized. The crystallographiC axis c (often the long direction
of the clystal) lies parallel to the plane of
vibration.
Observation through another plate of
tourmaline cut in a similar fashion and
superimposed at right angles effectively reveals the polarization. Light transmitted
through the two is eliminated where plates
overlap and the overlapping portion is
dark (Figure 5-3).
Thin clystals of a sh'ongly absorptive
I(%(WR1rJ Miner ai
compound,
iodocinchonidine-sulfate, were
I
described in 1852 by William Bird HeraI
I
path , M.D. (Figure 5-4). Because of their
.I
strong
absorption in one direction corre'1
Jml:wP",m
1
I
I
Ic -axis
M
x'. a
'Ab,m,
l ::... .
mum
tlon
Ic -axis
r:..:...oxis
.fI
Glass plates
MINERAL OPTICS
~s;~
67
5-7). The hll/o light rays have been differently refracted, and the indices
of refraction are different. The extreme indices of calcite are 1.516 and
1.658 with a difference of 0.142. 1'1, the position indicated the two indices
are far apart.
A large quartz sphere such as the crystal ball more than a foot in
diameter in the United States National Museum in Washington exhibits
easily visible double refraction. H ere the
indices are 1.544 and 1.553 with a difference
of 0,009, To exhibit the same separation of
images shown by calcite, quartz must have
a thickness some 15 times as great. The
calcite of Figure 5-6 is about 4 inches across ,
Even a quartz sphere of museum size does
not show as much separation of images.
No double refraction is noted when crystals such as calcite or quartz are obs erved in
the direction of the principal crystal axis (caxis) which is also the optic axis. The same FIG. 5-6, Double refraction illustrated by a cleavage rhomb
applies for all hexagonal or tetragonal of transp arent calcite or Icecrystals.
land spar,
The direction of the optic axis is one of
isotropy. In any other direction the mineral is anisotropic. In the latter
cases light is polarized into two rays vibrating at right angles to each
other. One vibrates at right angles to the optic axis (the onlinary my),
the other in a plane p arallel to the optic axis (the extraordinary my). In
Iceland spar
r-
o
FIG. 5-5, Two disks of herapathite (Polaroid) mounted on glass pl ates photographed
1111
1
1. 11,1. ,1
ie
~o
QiJ
e
r;/
.0
osQ,
\0(\
\~p,
'F. K vVri g hL
iI;, ~
lo J Original
( b ) Dou ble refroction
(e ) Tra ns mitted '
image
in to e and 0 rays
double image
I" ,c , 5-7. Se p:lra lioll of eX lraordin ary ( r ) and ordinary (0) ray images in Iceland spar.
I': dcil( ' 111( ; OI'<iillal'Y ray viiJr:ltes parallcl to th c lon g diagonal of a
, 11() llIiJi (' L, ('(, or 1111: c1(,:l V: l g <' rll()lllhollf'dron as shown in F iglll'c 5-8, Th e
"\ I r:I()l'd i11 :11')' 1':1)' vihl'nl('S ill :1 pl :II1( ' p:lssing lhl'oll gh the oplic axis a nd
pnl':IIld I() 1111' slll)!'1 di ll l ~lI l1 j ll.
68
Optical Indicatrix. The indicatrix serves to illush'ate the optical features of a crystal. It consists essentially of a surface generated around a
point with the indices of refraction serving as radii.
I
The indicatrix for tetragonal and h exaOXIS
gonal crystals (Figures 5-9a,b) is a spheI
raid of rotation, The index for the exh'aordinary ray shows a range in values,
while the index for the ordinary ray remains constant. The index coincides
with the axis of principal symmetry in the
crystal (c-axis) . \ Vhen is greater than
w the spheroid is prolate and the crystal
is optically positive (quartz) . When is
less than w the spheroid is oblate and the
crystal is optically negative (calcite ).
I
The indicatrix for orthorhombic, monoclinic, and triclinic crystals is a triaxial
FIG. 5-8. The extraordinary and
ellipsoid (Figure 6-16) and is related to
ordinary rays in a calcite cleavthe symmetry of crystals in these three
age.
systems. It forms a useful device for explaining the optical properties of biaxial crystals.
The principal section of a uniaxial indicatrix (Figure 5-10) may b e
used to examine the directional features of a wave normal and the corresponding ray where both are inclined to the <L'{es. The section is prolate
Ie'
c-axis
and
optic axis
c-axis
and
optic axis
_ -1----)/.)-;
~'-....~~
-r--~///!~
~---::::-- .:::- - .-/'/~
::-::::- +- --~./.?
~
(0 )
F I G.
(b)
with the major ax is LL' cqual to 2 corres ponding to the c-axis of thc
crysLal. T ho m in or axis 55' is ('cli ial Lo 2", a nd li es in a pbn c normal Lo
th o ('-;Ixis or tll O er),s t,al .
69
MINERAL OPTICS
ro
~alcite is used, and a prism is made of two parts cemented together with
Canada b alsam. The two h alves form
a prism of the type illustrated in Figure 5-11. Light entering the base of
the prism is broken into extraordinary
and ordinary rays. The extraordinary
ray has an index of refraction
n = 1.516 at the angle of incidence
for the prism; th e ordinary ray has
an index of refraction n = 1.658. The
index of the extraordinary ray is close
to the index of refraction of b alsam,
n = 1.537. The index of the ordinary
ray, however, is considerably greater.
Both rays strike the cementing plane
of b alsam obliquely. The obliquity of
the ordinary ray exceeds the critical
angle b etween the ordinary ray and
ordinary
ray
b alsam . As a result, it is not refracted
n=t.516
through the b alsam but is reflected
to the side of the prism. Since the
extraordinary ray does not exceed the
critical angle b etween the extraordinary ray and balsam, it passes on
through the prism with little deviation.
The extraordinary ray is polarized
with
one plane of vibration; conse\1<.-22
quently, the light emerging from the
\
'
'--.1
\\V2'- '
prism and made up entirely of the
,
"--- --\\
extraordinary ray is plane-polarized.
Modifications permit an enlarged
\
field (Thompson) and a more com\
e'_
\
--~
pact prism (Ahrens) . In the Ahrens
\
prism (Figure 5-12) the optic axis of
calcite lies at right angles to the path
of light through the microscope.
Interference between Crossed Nic. .
.
oIs. When two nicol prisms arc superFIG. 5-11. Thc polarIZatIOn and devla.
' I 'tl tl " I
. f 'b " r
lion of light in a nicol p risill .
ImpOSeC WI ] len p anes 0 VI 1.1 IOn
at n ght an gles to each oth er, th e
ni cols a rc saicl (:0 'bo crossed. Th e pol:iri zill g rn icrosco pc is norm all y Iised
witll th o prisilis ill tlli, s positio ll . OIl C'C ' ;I<i jll s'd , 111( ' pl ;ill C of each lI icol
\'
71
remains fixed, but the upper nicol slides in or out of the tube of the microscope. Crossed nicols produce darkness when the stage is unoccupied or
when it holds optically isotropic materials such as glass or opal or crystals
of the isometric system of crystallization. Minerals crystallizing in crystal
systems other than the isometric are anisotropic and in most positions
produce a range of interference colors b etween crossed nicols.
In Figure 5-13 polarized light is shown passing through a mineral plate
after leaving the lower nico!. Light strikes the lower surface of the mineral plate vibrating in one plane. On entering the plate, it is broken into
Uppernico!
Extraordinary ray
Ordinary ray
Optic
axis
--\l<iperO-\
"-
'"
.~
"<
"<
'"~
~
'~
Lower nieo!
5-13. The vibration directions of
the extraordinary and ordinary rays in
an anisotropic mineral illuminated with
polarized light.
FIG.
two sets of rays. Both sets are polarized, but at right angles, and light
travels at different velocities within the mineral along each plane. As a
result, when the two sets of rays emerge on the upper side of the plate,
one set has traveled farther than the other. Both travel along a straight
line to the analyzer and continue to vibrate at right angles.
Irregular grains of anisotropic minerals on the stage of the microscope
resolve light from the polarizer into the separate extraordinary and ordinary rays for each min eral ( F igure 5-14 ). A wide range in directions may
r(,S IlJ t b ut in cach crys tal the extra ordinary and ordinary rays are at
righ t a ngles.
In Lh c ;In alyzcr, wh c Lh er p ohiro;cl or a ni col prism, the two rays are
I'!'solvc'd 10 ;1 sill g lo pl:111 0 as indi cnlcd in F ig llt'c 5-:15. Thus the two rays
oll\()rgo frolll lho Hll:l ly:t.<.,'I' vi hrul,ill g ill tll O ~':l Il\O pl nno, H owever, the in.i.-
72
MINERAL OPTICS
tial phase separation due to the mineral is retained. As a result, when the
ordinary and extraordinary rays emerge from the analyzer they are in a
position to interfere, and interference colors are observed. An outline of
the mechanism is shown in Figure 5-16. In this relationship the separation
of the e and 0 rays, as determined by the thickness, position, and indices
of the mineral, yield phase differences as waves emerge from the analyzer.
Here resolution of effective components of each takes place into the
plane of the analyzer, as illustrated diagrammatically in Figure 5-15.
As a result of this resolution, two rays emerge from the analyzer.
The interference color produced depends upon the nature of the
light and the amount of retardation of one set of waves with respect
1
1
1
',I
Anolyzerlt e
plone
u- 1
I ,(
/
/
1
/
to that of the other. The retardation can b e determined with a fair degree of precision from the inteIference color and is expressed by the
Greek letter 6.. The value of 6. is expressed in millimicrons (millionths
of a millimeter = mp' ), the same units used to measure the wavelength
of light.
The retardation may be changed through a wide range by (1) varying
the thickness t of the min eral, (2) changing the orientation in such a
way as to change the indices of refraction n 1 and n 2 of the two rays
emerging from the mineral. This relationship may be expressed by the
equation
Do
t(n 2 -
nl)
of ruhaclion for
0.
73
Phase Difference. The two rays emerging from the mineral have
a phase difference P. This difference is equal
to the retardation divided by the wavelength:
p_Do
A
it follows t hat p =
t(n 2 -
nl)
1
1
to ~
re$olved
in
onalyzer
5-17).
Midway between, maximum intensity occurs.
Here the r etardation is [( 2n
1) /2]1.., and the
components of the waves in the plane of the
upper nicol are equal and on the same side of
the line of transmission. The resultant wave is
equal to the sum of the two components (Figure 5-18) .
Interference Colors. If the mineral plate lies
with the planes of vibration parallel and p erpendicular to the planes of the polarizing devices, no light passes through the analyzer, and
the mineral is in a position of extinction. On
the other hand, if the plate is rotated to either
side, the field of the analyzer is no longer dark
but becomes illuminated with interference
colors. The interference colors vary with the
lh iekness of the mineral section, the nahlre of
lhe mineral, the way in which the mineral seclion is cut, and the light employed. The exLower I nicol
planation of the relationship of these various
fac lors involves many of th e prin ciples of opti- FIG. 5-16. Sorting of rays
(';1 I min e ralogy. It is des il'ablc for the sake of simby the analyzer when the
p liC' iLy Lo consid er Lh c variables one a t a time. mcob arc crossed.
If HlO Llli ck \\ css of a min e ral p'ictLe h e tween. cross ed nicols is cilanged,
~1 1()\l g ll III(' ol'i( 'llillli(JlI r(' ma ills 111 0 S lllll(', a eh:llI go ill ilil orfc rence color
MINERAL OPTICS
74
75
>.
""0
L..
Ii
0-
Q)
=>
Q)
.c
.c
3:
Q)
3:
L..
;:
(l)
'0
Q)
'"
>-
""
=>
m
.c
a.
-0
'"
n::
First order
'"=>
m
t--
V>
OJ
OJ
L..
""
.<::
V>
'3:
0
;:
0
~
~
Second order
t i t t
! !
Upper nicol
,0
cQ)
;:
~
1I=0
90
180
270
360
450
540
630
720
810
900mp.
0.10
EO
:t><
0('{' )
Anaif"r
Anolyzer
1
-J
I---===---
n>..
FIG. 5-17. Resolution of waves in analyzer for retardation of whole wavelength
or multiples.
(2n+1l >..
2
FIG. 5-18. Resolution of waves in analyzer fo r retardation of one-half wavelength or multiples.
with increase or decrease in thickness along the wedge. Anyone thickness yields a uniform band of one color across the wed ge. The quartz
wedge should be placed on the stage of the microscope and moved b ack
and forth in order to observe the full range of color due to varying
thickness .
Each portion of the wedge is subject to the equation
/: :,. =
----i>-
t(n2 - nl)
Since the optic axis of the wedge remains parallel to the stage, (n2 - n 1 )
is fixed and equals 0.009, the accepted value for quaTtz. Consequently,
the retardation tl vaTies with the thickness t.
When t is zero, the retardation in any li ght is also zero, and the fi eld
of vi cw is dark. In white light, wh en t in creases, a definite sequence of
;olors OI IS I I( :S. Starli" g wiLh gray and COlltinlling Lhroll gh bluish gray,
wllil. " )'1' lIo w , Orilll g\', ill til(' m<i!"r 11 :1111('11 , LII(' co lors arC' sLrikill g to til"
Quortz
n 2 -n l = 0.0.0.9
o.ptic oxis
I) I11111I
Lower nicol
0.05~
[
)
'-j
FIG. 5-19. Interference colors due to a portion of a quartz wedge between crossed
nicols with white light.
eye. In the thicker portion of the w edge, however, less contrast appears ;
and in w edges several times as thick the colors at the thick end are faint
iridescent tints.
If the source of illumination is monochromatic the effect produced is
illustrated in Figure 5-20. In this case, when the thickness reach es such
a point that the retardation becomes equal to one wavelength, the two
monochromatic waves are equal and opposite in phase and nullify each
other, causing darkness . As a result, dark bands will occur at all points
where th e retardation is a whole multiple of A. Conversely, at odd multiples of ~ A , maximum intensity will occur. Here the two waves are
equal and in th e same phase.
The inLc rference colors du e to white li ght may b e considered as a composiLe of the varioliS wavelengths of Lhe spec trum . The rela tionship of
111 0 ilil("l"l"c l"( 'II C(' co lors Lo Lll e 11101l0cill"OmaLic co mpon ents is illustrated
ill Fi glli'( ' :5-2 1. Th <, r;) ll g(' in ilit er r('I"(' I1('(' colors tllroll gh rom orclers is
Ii
MINERAL OPTICS
..... =2~
..... =).
ll"'O
..... =3).
..... =4).
1111
""
~Optlcoxis
"IG. 5-20. Altern ate dark and light bands produced by monochromatic light with a
luartz wedge between crossed nicols.
1'1
lo:
~
qj
""
..:::
I
'I.>
"
2 nd Order
Order
:;...
~ ~
'I.>
<::
'I
'I.>
Order
<::
'I.>
'I.>
'I.>
yd
<::
<::
'I.>
lo:
~
~
""
I
" ~
'I.>
<::
'I.>
!5
lo:
". ""<::
Order
<::
'I.>
'I.>
>
""
'I.>
~
:::,
l': 'I.>
~ <::J ct:
41h
<::
J:""
~
I
l':
?>
~~
'I.>
77
shown at the top of the figure. The corresponding cumulative monochromatic wavelcngths are shO\vn below.
The various monochrom atic beams, on p assing tlll'ough a wedge, produce d ark bands at different thicknesses. Likewise, maximum intenSity
occurs at corresponding interm ediate intervals . The difference between the
wavelengths at the opposite ends of the spectrum is such, however, that
the first dark band for violet occurs almost in the first position of maximum intensity for red. For violet the band is approximately 410 m""
and the wavelength for r ed is about 700 m",. At ..... = 410 m", the interference color is elose to orange. The orange is a composite in which the
colors at the red end of the spectrum predominate and colors at the
violet end are minimized. The p er cent of maximum intensity for red
at ..... = 410 m", is about 83. The maximum intenSity for red OCCurs at
y:! A or 350 m",. The p er cent of this maximum at 410 m", would be
~
~
~ ~~ ~
= 83 p er cent
2000
= 0.009
the relation between thickness and retarda tion is shown in Figure 5-22.
"Vhere n z - n 1 is maximum a normal sequence of colors prevails for
most anisotropic minerals. A few, such as idocrase, with abnormal dispersion fail to follow the normal sequence and must be considered independently. However, the relationship of the chart is adequate to yield
the color of quartz of a given thickness or the thickness of quartz haVing
a given interference color.
5-21. Thc rclalionship betwccn int(!;fcrcncc colors cluc to mono chrom ati c light
and colors cluc to while ligh'.
FIG.
MINERAL OPTICS
LLL
Q)Q)QJ
Q\ CJ"I 0'1 Q)
Q)
V'J
OJ
QJ
79
drum is graduated with a vernier reading to tenths and may be calibrated to read degrees.
The plate in the compensator is held in a small ring that may be
easily removed, and a plate of different thickn ess may be substituted.
The range of the plate ordinal'ily employed covers retardations from zero
to the fourth order.
The axis of rotation of the compensator is arranged diagonally to the
polarization planes of the two nicols. If the planes of the nicols are
north and east, the tube slot holding the compensator will be north,
west. The compensator is marked with two arrows: H I, parallel to the
HJY
Hit
--~
H2
(l)
~-->
H2
Cr
VI
VI
HI I
H2
C,
-;C
\,
~4~
\
f0j1
~
!
Plate
!
I
I~
~
~~~
!
5-23. The vibrat ion directions and movement of the color rings in the ReId of
the ocular when using the Berek compensator.
FIG.
axis of rotation or along the access ory slot, is the slow-ray vibration direction; H 2 , at right anglcs to the axis of rotation, indicates the trace of
the projection of the plane containing the inclined c-axis of calcite and
marks the fast-ray vibration direction.
The compensator is first set with the plate horizontal within the frame
and inserted. Between crossed nicols a large dark cross will appear in
the field . When this cross coincides with the crosshairs of the microscope, the compensator is in the zero position (see Figure 5-23) . If the
comp ensator drum is then turned either to the left or to the right, the
variou s orders of interference colors appear in the field in a sequence
corrcs ponding to th e order of th e quartz wedge.
The co mpensalor may bc uscd to determinc thc rctardation ot a
minora l gru.in hotwoo\\ crossed nicols as fo llows : T ho !:.'lain in question
MINERAL OPTICS
; moved to the center of the field and placed in the 45 position with
he slow-ray vibration diJ:ection of the mineral parallel to H 2 of the
!ompensator. The compensator is then inserted and rotated first to the
ight and then to the left, stopping in each case ""hen the interference
:0101' of the mineral has been completely reduced to extinction. The
neasured difference between the opposite readings is divided by two
md the value inserted in a simple formula supplied by the makers of
he instrument. Solution of the formula gives the correct retardation for
he mineral grain.
A view of the Berek compensator is shown in Figure 2-19. Figure 5-23
ndicates the views obtained in the microscope field with the com pen;ator plates horizontal and rotated either to the right or to the left.
The vertical sections in the lower
part of Figure 5-23 indicate the inclination of the c-axis, and the
upper diagrams represent corresponding microscope fields . With
monochromatic light, light and
dark bands are produced on either
side of a central cross. With white
light, the bands on either side of
the dark cross indicating the zero
position are colored.
When the compensator is inserted above a doubly refracting
crystal in a thin section, the dark
J\/V k,!I - A \/11 / 1\--- A
cross disappears. As the plate is
[1 2 3
4
5 6
7
8 9 \
rotated, however, the interference
colors are changed until complete
FIG. 5-24. Determination of thickn ess of
compensation occurs as mentioned
section in quartzite.
above.
Determination of Thickness of Section. Let us suppose that Figure
5-24 represents a thin section containing numerous small quartz grains
in random orientations. Grains 1 to 9 along the horizontal crosshair in
the field of the microscope are oriented with optic axes in the positions
shown in the sectional view. Most are inclined; occasionally a fe~ are
vertical and a few are horizontal. Horizontal axes are in the correct
position to provide a maximum value of (n2 - n , ). All are of uniform
thickness; hence grains with horizontal axes will show the highest order
of interference or maximum rctardation. In a thin scction th e grains with
the hi gh es t order inlerfcrcncc color as ohservec1 hy means o[ ll lO color
churl will b e grain s ill a posilioll to ('xllihil Ih e Ina xillllli1l ("II" - n, ).
In Ih o casu at hllllcl ) ~r:Jill Ij is ill lho corrm;1 posilioll . If grllin tl shollld
h o slnt w yullow. Iho II lick lIess o\' till) I1cclioll us dol('I'll Ii III'd I>y I ho colo)'
81
chart would be 0.03 mm. Other interference colors appear, but only those
with axes in an approximately horizontal position will be as high in the
first order as straw yellow.
In any thin section, if sufficient grains of a known mineral are present
in random orientation and the highest order of interfeTence color can
be determined, it is possible to ascertain the thickness of section by reference to the color chart. It is also possible to reverse the process if the
thickness is known and determine the double refraction of an unknown
mineral. Likewise, in a slide containing hvo or more minerals, one of
which is known, it is possible to determine the thickness of the section
from the known mineral and determine the double refraction of the
unknown minerals from the determined thickness and the observed interference colors.
Direction of the Vibration of Slow or Fast Rays. It is frequently
important to ascertain the planes of vibration of the two rays vibrating
at right angles in an anisoh'opic mineral grain. The two rays have different indices of refraction, the one with the greater index being the
slow ray and the one with the lesser index, the fast ray. The determination of the fast- and slow-ray directions is accomplished between crossed
nicols, the location of the two rays b eing established by observing the
position of extinction. When the mineral b ecomes dark, the vibration
directions of the two rays are parallel to the planes of vibration of the
nicol prisms . Since the planes of vibration of the nicols are parallel to
the crosshairs in the ocular, the vibration planes in the mineral will also
be parallel to the crosshairs when in the extinction position.
A mica plate or gypsum plate is used to tell which of the two rays is
fast and which is slow. When the positions of the vibration directions
of the rays are ascertained, the mineral is turned from extinction to the
position of maximum interference. Next, either the gypsum or the Inica
plate is inserted in the tube of the microscope with the slow-ray vibration
direction parallel to one of the vibration directions of the Inineral. If the
order of color increases, the parallel direction is the slow-ray vibration
direction of the mineral. If it decreases, the direction represents the fast
ray. One direction being known, the other is the opposite. The mica
plate is usually used for minerals with weak double refraction, and the
gypsum plate is employed in the case of stronger double refraction.
When the mineral has very sh'ong double refraction, a quartz wedge
may be us ed. Since the quartz wedge var-ies in retar'dation from zero
to the fourth order, a variety of colors will be produced, the color at
a particular part of the wedge depending upon the thickness. When
the slow ray coin cid es with th e slow-ray direction in the mineral, a corros polloin g reinforcement in relardation will occur. Thus the color of
{li e IIlill(~ral will sllIl (knly cli:lI1 g(: 10 :1 ('olor of hi gh e r ord er, dep endent
IIpOIi 1111 ' porlioll or 111 11 w( d ~( ' S IIJl()'illllll)~ c(l . W III'Ii 1110 slow-ray d i-
"I
I
82
MINERAL OPTICS
83
1
0
':':. :::;::::'
,8... . . . .r
.; -
'5. ,
-- '
-- -'
III
FIG. 5-25. Relative positions of greatest and least illumination in parallel, inclined,
and symmetrical extinction as observed between crossed nicols.
nicols, with the cleavage parallel to the vibration directions of the two
nicols, the extinction is said to be parallel.
A number of minerals crystallize in such a way that sections are elongated, square, or rectangular. Square or rectangular cleavage patterns
may also be observed. If these minerals become dark between crossed
nicols, with the cleavage directions parallel to the vibration planes of
the nicols, they are said to have parallel extinction.
Inclined or Oblique Extinction. Many minerals extinguish betw'een
crossed nicols when cleavages or crystal boundaries lie at oblique angles
to the planes of vibration of the two nicols. These are said to have inclined extinction,
In this case it is necessary to know the position of either the fast-ray
vibration direction or the slow-ray vibration direction in the mineral
grain. The extinction angle is usually determined in terms of the slower
of the 1:\'10 rays, or the one having the greater index of refraction. The
nature of the two rays is detenn.ined with one of the accessory plates
of th e microscope.
Sove ral difTorenl an ~l o.~ of ox tin ction arc IIsliall y ohs(lrv('d for th e sa mc
millt 'l'iIl ill :I l!:iv (,11 ~ ('(' li()lI , Os iilllslr;iI('d ill l'i l!:"I'1' !)-2(i. Th o ma ximum
FIG. 5-28 . IIed cnbergite of Fig. 8-33 between crossed nicols in the position of
_48 0 ,
maximum extinction. C 1\ Z
being measured . Next, the direction of vibration of the slow ray is verified
by using an accessory plate. A serics of readings should be repeated with
different crystals until it seems certain that the largest angle for a particular mineral has been found. When the angle is determined, it is necessary to refer to a description of the optical directions in the crystal in
order to ascertain the proper reference plane for the extinction angle.
The min eral dcscriptions in Part 2 of this text include the angles of
extinction. Th e angle between Z and the c-axis of a crystal is frequently
recorded . Since Z .is a slow-ray direction and prominent cleavages or
crystal bound ari es are ofte n refcrred to the c-axis, it is usually possible
to inle rpre t lh e ex lin Clion from th e orientation diagram. Figures 5-27
antI 5-28 furni sh ill llslralions of' sli ch illtorpretalions.
SYI/III/ e/ri('{t/ K r lil/l'li ol/ . 1\ 111111111('1' of Illillc 'r;ll s fOl'ln cleava ge pattcrns
84
MINERAL OPTICS
'
85
Idocrase in thin section often shows an unusual sequence of intederence colors, Berlin blue predominating. Although this mineral is tetragonal and normally doubly refracting, the interference colors do not
follow the color chart and are anomalous. Clinozoisite, zoisite, brucite,
and some varieties of chlorite furnish other examples of anisotropic minerals that yield anomalous interference colors.
Equal interference areas are frequently produced in isotropic bakelite
through shain. In Figure 5-29 a portion of a small bakelite frame cut
in the form of a T is shown benveen crossed nicols. The T would have
a shape illustrated by the insert, the portion photographed being outlined by the dotted lines. The photograph was obtained by utilizing
monochromatic green (5461 A) in the mercmy spectrum.
REFERENCES
Ahrens, C. D. : New Polarizing Prism, ]. Roy. Microscop. Soc., vol. 9, pp. 397398,1886.
Berek, M.: Zur Messung del' Doppelbrechung hauptsachlich mit Hilfe des
Polarisationsmikroskops, Centro Mineral., Ceol. , pp. 427-435, 1913.
Bouasse, H.: Optique cristalline double refraction polarisation rectiligne et
elliptique, Paris, 1925.
Drude, Paul: "Theory of Optics," trans. by Mann and Millikan, Longmans,
Green & Co. , Inc. , New York, 1925.
Groth, P.: "The Optical Properties of Crystals," trans. by B. H. Jackson, John
Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, 1910.
Hartshorne, N. H., and A. Stuart: "Crystals and the Polarizing Microscope,"
Edward Arnold & Co., London, 1934.
Johannsen, A.: "Manual of Petrographic Methods ," McGraw-Hill Book Company, Inc. , New York, 1918. A summary of the various types of polarizing
prisms will be found on pp. 158-175.
MacCullagh, James: Crystalline Reflexion and Refraction , Trans. Roy. Irish
Acad., vol. 18, pp. 31-74, 1837.
Miers, H. A.: "Mineralogy," 2d ed., rev. by H. L. Bowman, Macmillan & Co.,
Ltd. , London, 1929.
Schuster, A., and J. W. Nicholson: "Theory of Optics," Edward Arnold & Co.,
London , 1924.
Thompson , S. P.: On a New Polarizing Prism, Rep. Br. Assoc. Advance. Sci. ,
vol. 51, pp. 563-564, 188l.
Tutton, A. E. H.: "Crystallography and Practical Crystal Measurement," 2d
ed., vol. 2, Macmillan & Co., Ltd. , London , 1922.
Weinschenk, E.: "Petrographic Methods," trans. by R. W. Clark, McGraw-Hill
Book Company, Inc. , New York, 1912.
Winchell , A. N.: "Elements of Optical Mineralogy, Part I: Principles and
Mcthods , 5th cd., John Wiley & Sons. , Inc. , New York, 1937.
VI/right, F . E.: Thc Transm iss ion of Light through Transparent Inactive Crystal
Plalcs, clc. , Alii . ]. Sci., 4lh SCI'. , vol. 31, pp. 157-211 , 1911.
Th o slllCl(' liI' is rd"rn 'd It) ('tlm nwnl s hy T lll1('l1 :llId Morc), rcgn rclill g cc rtain
flllld illl" ' lli ld op l!"11 1 PI'OP"l'li" H (1\111 , MIIII'I'(dngls / , VIII. 17, pp . 8G5-:3130, 1(82 ).
CHAPTER
flO
87
88
MINERAL OPTICS
89
the cross aJ:ms marks the point of emergence of the optic axis, and its
deviation from the center of the field is a measure of the angle b etween
the optic axis and the axis of the microscope.
Although uniaxial figures are frequently eccentric in position, the cross
arms remain parallel to the planes of vibration of the nicols. Because of
--__
I I
II
----1.....J _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ -1 L ______ _
\
\
I:
I
I
--:~ ~:
//\
/
I,
I,
II
II
II
II
, ___ J
II
IIi-~r---l i/
.....
I I
,',
" \\
I'
II
II
90
II
45
II
J L __ 6
l r-- ;
'I
"-
II
FIG.
---...
L_
\
\
II
II
,
'-'
\
!'II
"
.k'
,I
chromatic light is passed through a quartz wedge. The colors in interference figures produced by white light are a combination of the different monochromatic wavelengths in an analogous manner to the interference color chart where white light may be considered as a
summation of the various monochromatic wavelengths.
Uniaxial Interference Figures. In hexagonal and tetragonal minerals
the optic axis coincides with the c-a;ds of the crystal. Likewise, the center
of the cross in the interference figure marks the optic-axis position. If
the optic axis of the mineral coincides with that of the microscope, the
uniaxial figure will be centered with the two arms crossing at the intersection of the cross hairs in the microscope.
However, if the optic axis is inclined to the axis of the microscope,
the point of intersection of the cross arms will fall away from the intersection of the crosshairs. It frequently falls outside the field of th e microscope. If the center of the axial cross does not coincide with the centcr
of the field, the point of interscction of the arms will move arou nd the
crossh air intcrsection wh c n th e slage is rot.llcd , desc ribin g a circle a nd
r O llll'nin ~ In il s nri ~ innl posilion Ilrll'l' rol:llin g ;1(iOo. '1'11 (' inlCl's('c lioll of
I',I',
\ /~
1'1
I I
, I
-j
//
i
I
,-
/
/
\
\
\
\
\
II
---
"
6-4. Uniaxial interference figure in eccentric positions. Dotted lines indicate the
movement of the figure around the field of the microscope as the stage is rotated.
F IG .
this fact the arms sweep the field first from one side, then from another
as the stage is rotated. It is important to note whether the arms remain
parallel to th e cross hairs, since anns in certain biaxial figures also cross
the field. Th e la tter are curved or crescent shaped, however, and swing
across th e fi eld rather than sweep parallel to the nicols . Several eccentric
posiliolls of a unia xial fi gure are shOvvn in Figure 6-4.
1'11 0 nlllnhcr or color bancls inlillia xial inle rference figmes varies with
90
MINERAL OPTICS
the thickness of the section and the double refraction of the mineral.
Thick sections may give a number of orders of colors, whereas a thin
section of the same mineral may not yield bands of color above the first
order. If two plates are made of different minerals, both of identical
orientation and having the same thickness, the mineral with the greater
double refraction will develop the greater number of color bands. The
relation between uniaxial figures due to mineral plates of the same thickness but differing in double refraction is shown in Figure 6-5.
Vibration Directions in Uniaxial Crystals. In uniaxial crystals one significant ray vibrates parallel to a plane that includes the c-axis of the
crystal; another vibrates parallel to a plane at right angles. The two ~u:e
refracted differently and consequently travel different distances in passing through the mineral plate.
When the rays vibrate parallel to thc nicols, resolution is zero, and
darkness occurs- hence the axial cross in the interference figure. At the
45 position the greatest intensity occurs, and the interference colors
are most brilliant.
When two sets of rays are formed by the passage of light through a
uniaxial crystal, one set travels with uniform velocity in all directions
and is known as the ordinary ray; the other varies in velocity with direction and is called the extraordinary ray. If light were to radiate out
from the center of a solid mass of such an anisotropic medium, at a given
instant the wavefront of the ordinary ray would be spherical, whereas
the wavefront of the extraordinary ray would be ellipsoidal. Any section
of the wavefront produced by the ordinary ray would th ereforc he a
circle. One section of the wavefront due to th e extraordinary ray would
be a circle; but others would bc cllipses. Figure 6-6 illu strates scclions
which includ e the optic axis . If the velocily or lh c eX lraorclinary ray "is
greator, th e ellipse li cs oill'sid e lli c circle, :l l1d lli e rnincr:il is optically
91
negative. If the velocity of the ordinary ray is greater, the ellipse lies
within the circle, and the min eral is optically positive. Uniaxial positive
and negative minerals are listed in Ta ble 10-8.
The velocities represented in the diagram Figure 6-6 are the reciprocals of the indices of refraction. The ray velocities have equal values
in the direction of the c-axis, where the circle and ellipse coincide, and
are most unequal in a direction at right angles to the c-axis. The greatest
and least indices of refraction are observed at right angles to the c-axis.
C
FIC ,
C -axis
= optic axis
Negative
Posi t ive
6-6. Sections of ray surfaces for uniaxial minerals.
92
MINERAL OPTICS
93
"Yo \
==-f-I
tr
FIG.
/I
(+)
~
(-)
Positive
6-9. The vibration dircctions in both
acccssory platc and min cral for a uni axial
posi tive figure.
FIG.
F IG.
fi gure. T he direct ion of the two dots forms a plus with the vibration
dil'ecti oll of the slow ray or th e mi ca plate in positive uniaxial minerals
and a minliS whon th e minerals arc n egative. This relationship is empiri cu llilid indi (':llivl ' hili il se rv('s to kee p in mind th e fast- and slow-ray
Vihrnl ion din '('1iOll s ill IIl1 ill Xill l ( rys tll is ( Fi glll'o 0- 1() ).
94
MINERAL OPTICS
If minerals have strong double refraction the gypsum plate may be more
useful for determining the optical character of a uniaxial mineral than is
the mica plate. With the gypsum plate two bright blue areas often form
in opposite quadrants of the interference figures. These stand out particularly in figures given by minerals of moderate or intermediate double
refraction. '''hen the optical character is positive, as in the case of quartz,
the two blue areas occur in opposite quadrants parallel to the slow-ray
vibration direction of the gypsum plate (see Figure 6-11a). When the
optical character is negative, as in the case of calcite, the two blue areas
occur in opposite quadrants at right angles to the slow-ray vibration direction of the gypsum plate (see Figure 6-11h). The blue areas at times
,..
~Q
-\'/,
~~
()~
of emergence
of optic oxis
\"~ Point
I
I I
/'
Isogyre
Red
--
95
..........
o "\
~.A v~
Acute bisectrix
XorZ
<:>'0/........ \
lsogyre
(0)
(b)
FIG. 6-11. (a) Uniaxial positive. Quartz cut perpendicul ar to th e optic axis as viewed
in the interference figure with a gypsum plate. (b) Uniaxial negative. Calcite cut
perpendicular to the optic axis as viewed in an interference figure with a gypsum
plate.
form dots (second-order blue) , but these should not be confused with
the mica dots (first-order black with a bluish fringe) .
Biaxial Interference Figures. Under normal conditions minerals crystallizing in the orthorhombiC, monoclinic, and triclinic crystal systems give
biaxial interference figures. Rarely, because of crystallization under
strain, hexagonal or tetragonal minerals, normally uniaxial, are anomalous
and produce biaxial figures.
Biaxial interference figures are produced by the same optical arrangement of the microscope employed for uniaxial figures. Unlike uniaxial
figures, curves of biaxial figures assume different relative forms as the
stage is rotated. Double refraction , orientation, and thickness of section
govern the character of biaxial interference figures.
As the stage is rotated a biaxial figure assumes a range of complex
patterns. Figure 6-3 illustrates a symmetrical biaxial interference figure
in two positions at 90 and 45 . The 45 position is the most useful for
ordinary optical determinations aud is often employed in the study of
biaxial minerals . Th~ figure in this position ts Qescribed as &Q qqut
hisectrix flguro at 45.
Point of
emergence
of optic axis
ZarX
6-12. The parts of a biaxial interferencc figure pe11)endicular to the acute biscctrix in the 45 position .
FIG .
are not so black or so sharp as in the case of minerals with weak dispersion,
Points of El1tergence of the Optic Axes. The vertices of the two crescontlike curves mark the points of emergence of the optic axes , The
amount of separation of these points differs with different minerals but
is a constant for an individual mineral. The line between the two points
of emergence subtends the optie axial angle.
Johannsen has suggested the word m elatope for the point of emergence,
Plan e of the Optic Axes. The plane of the optic axes, or axial plane, inc/lld es th e lwo points of emergence of th e optie axes, the aeute bisectrix
dil"('cl ioll, nntl tlt o oht nse hi sectri x direction.
Co /O,. Ho"rls. Iliterf('rcil cl' co lor hands roprosentin g positions of equal
I t"illrti lil i011 111'0 di slrii>lilcd ill SY "lIl ll' lri (': d CIII"VCS arolliid lli e points of
"lIlt l r g "II< '( 1 or I/ li l Ilplk II \ ( 'S 11 11<1 II I', ( 'I II/( 'd I,WII" III'() ,,/ol!r' ( ''' ''''('S .
96
MINERAL OPTICS
x,
Y, and Z. The three axes X, Y, and Z are distributed in the interference figure as shown in the diagram. Y is normal to the plane of the
optic axes. If the acute bisectrix is X, the obtuse bisectrix is Z, and vice
versa.
Optic Normal. The direction at right angles to the plane of the optic
axes is referred to as the optic normal. It is the axis Y.
Eccentric Biaxial Figures. Since biaxial minerals as observed in thin
section may be cut at any angle, a variety of modifications of the biaxial
interference figurcs result. A single isogyre may swing across the fi eld
in one figure, another may yield an optic axis, another may show the
Zorr
if",
97
imum velocity for the mineral lin". Light traveling normal to Z vibrates
parallel to the axis and has the minimum velOcity for the mineral Ilny.
The axis Y lies at right angles to the plane of X and Z. Light traveling
normal to Y vibrates parallel to the axis and has an intermediate velocity
l/nl3.
In a given mineral, light Vibrating parallel to X will form the fast
ray. Light vibrating parallel to Z is the slow ray, and light vibrating
parallel to Y will be intermediate in velocity. Thus, when the direction
of observation lies along the X axis, XZ will indicate the slow ray and
XY the intermediate ray; similarly, when the direction of observation
is the Z axis, ZX will be the fast ray and ZY the intermediate ray. When
the direction of observation is the Y axis, YX will be the fast ray and YZ
the slow ray.
The fast- and slow-ray directions corresponcling to the various directions of observation along the axes may be indicated as shown in the
table below.
Direction of
observation
Two rays
observed
Velocities
F aster ray
Slower ray
F aster ray
Slower ray
F aster ray
Slower ray
--YorjJ
1
if",
FIG.
Zorr
6-13. Biaxial ray surface.
acute bisectrix, etc. The most useful figures for optical determinations of
mineral properties are either acute bisectrix or optic-axis figures. In opticaxis figures (see Figure 6-24) the convex side of the isogyre in the 45
position indicates the direction of the acute bisectrix.
Optic-axis figures and most acute bisectrix figures are given by mineral
sections showing comparatively low-order colors between crossed nicols
in parallel light. Examination of a number of crystals of miscellaneous
orientation between crossed nicols will often quickly reveal those most
likely to give interference figures of useful orientation in convergent light.
Optical Directions in Biaxial Minerals. In all biaxial min erals the
various optical features may be conveniently oriented by refcrence to
three axes, X, Y, and Z, arranged at right angles to each other (Fi gure
6-13) . X, Y, and Z indicate th e easc of vibration of li ght in the min eral.
Li ght t ravolill g norm;,tl 10 X vihr~tl('s para11 (" 1 l o lh (' ax is and has Lhc ntaX-
Vlhen the direction of observation lies along the X axis, light Vibrating
parallel to the plane XZ will have the greatest index of refraction, and
light Vibrating parallel to the plane XY will have an intermediate index
of refraction. When the direction of observation lies along the Z axis,
light vibrating parallel to the plane ZX will have the least index of refraclion, and light Vibrating parallel to ZY will have an intermediate index of
refraction. Wh en the direction of observation lies along the Y axis, light
Vibrating parallel to the plane YX will have the least index of refraction,
and parallel to YZ will have the greatest index of refraction.
\i\1ithin certain limits, the axes X, Y, and Z have positions in minerals
lhat arc depend ent upon thc system of crystallization. In orthorhombic
lI1 in erals, X, Y, and Z arc flxcd with respect to the crystallographic axes
(f, b, and G. In th e monoclini c systcm on c of the three axes (often Y)
coin cid es wit'lt th e crys t;tllogr:tphi c ax is I) . Tn the lriclinie system there
<l1'1l II() liJrlil ll 1iOlts of posit iOIl Il ('c'ordilt g to t It o crys lall ographi c axes.
MINERAL OPTICS
~8
Axial directions
"1
z
Least velocity ..
Ci
X
Greatest velocity.
(3
y
At right angles .
n'Y
l/n" and l/n~
M a jor semiax is .....
n~
l/n" and l/n'Y
Intermedi ate semiaxis .. . . .
ncr
l/n'Y and l/n~
Minor semi axis . . ......... .
Prim ary optic axes
Secondary
optic
axes
Optic axes .. ... .....
or binormals
or biradials
Single
Double
Surface . .. . ... . . ..... . . . .
99
--'-
"~
ixOs\ (}
o~ o~
-<9
"
,/
/
0<
Zorr
'"
i-.x()~ (} o~~
o
-<9
--'~
~'
0_ <?r......
-<9 "
"
. o{
"
S\o\"
0
X orlX
",
o_J"
-<' ......
-<9
Biaxial negative
00
MINERAL OPTICS
:tlly the figure is a triaxial ellipsoid. The ongm lies at the center of
1.e ellipsoid, the coordinate axes are the axes of the ellipsoid, and the
oordinate planes are the principal planes.
The semiaxes of the ellipsoid are assigned the values of the indices
f refraction n", n(:1, and ny. The principal sections are any combination
I
:'~y
+r
~!)
f
.x
101
axes, or binoT11wls. These are sometimes called the primmy optic axes
and differ slightly from the secondary optic axes (biradials) of the biaxial "lave surface.
The optical properties of light rays may be determined in any given
directioI'l in a hiaxial ellipsoid as shown in Figure 6-18. The semia;'(es
are ny, n{3, and n it, resp ectively, and S'S represents the direction of propagation of light along a given line. If the direction of S'S is known, the
Opt/c axis _
-1"\
'1
6-15. Sections of biaxial ray surface. (a) Section pCl1)endicular to Z. (b) Secion perpendicular to X. (c) Section perpendicular to Y.
<IG.
Rod/us = np
r orZ
I
f]orY---f]or Y
r orZ
FIG.
in which a plane contains hvo axes. These sections are ellipses and have
as major and minor semiaxes any pair of the values 11.'" 11.{3, and llry.
With the exception of the two circular sections, all of the plane sections that are cut tlu-ough the center of the ellipsoid are ellipscs (Figure
6-17) . The two circular sections include thc semiaxcs with lcngth n {3;
thus the kngth of the radins of each circu lar section cqualsn(J. T he direclions perpencl iell ht r to tilt, l wo cirCli htr seelions a r(' ca II eel th e oJ)! in
If the direction of the diameter S' S is known, the position of the planes
tangent to S'S at th e two ends of the diameter also becomes known. It
is then possible to pass a p arallel di ametral plane through the ellipsoid
intersectin g the eenter and equidistant between the two tangent planes.
T ho tliam c tral plano thro ugh the center will cut an elliptical section in
:I II hili Lwo possihl e posilions or 5'S. Th ese two exceptional positions are
1110 oplic ;lX('S, :llId Il('ro tli e secl ions Cll t are circ ular. The elliptical seelioll flll"lIi sll('s 11I('; ISllr( 'IIH"lil s frolil wllicll 111(' op ti cal properLies ca.n b e
,02
MINERAL OPTICS
letermined. The diametral plane will have major and minor a;xes. ThesE'
.xes mark the vibration directions of the two rays traveling along S'S .
['he major and minor radii represent the refractive indices of the waves
lssociated with the two rays, equaling n 2 and n 1 The wave normal coresponding to the ray propagated along S'S and vibrating along the
najor axis lies in a plane through S'S and the major axis and is normal
:0 the axis. Similarly, the wave normal corresponding to the ray prop a~ated along S'S and vibrating along the minor axis lies in a plane tlu"ough
,'S and the minor axis and is normal to the axis.
103
the oblique rays, as illustrated in Figure 6-20. The angle 2E is the angle
in air, while 2V is the internal angle.
Mallm"d's equation (D ' K sin E) may be used to determine the approximate axial angle with th e microscope. In the equation, K is a constant for a palticulm" microscope,
D is one-half the distance b etween
.---2E
the points of emergence, and E is
one-half the axial angle in air.
The computation of the axial
angle in a mineral from the observed axial angle in air depends
upon the formula
sin E
= n f3
sin V
When n sin V is equal to 1, the FIG. 6-20. The relation between the observed angle 2E and the angle 2V in
angle 2E becomes 180, and the biaxial minerals.
axial angle in air cannot be measured. The value of an observed angle may be reduced to measurable
dimensions by immersing the objective in oil of known refractive index.
Large axial angles need to be measured with a rotation device. Such
devices for rotating crystals in a vertical circle may be adapted to the
stage of the microscope; otherwise special apparatus must be employed.
,,
\\
/,'/ /
" '"
,,
"
"'''''\
I'"
,,
I
,,
} :'
,, ,,
\
(01
F I G.
(b)
(a ) Aragonitc
2V
19
'/l y -
The foregoing di scll ssion is largely based IIpo n a paper, T hc Hay Sl\]'fa ce, the
Opt ical Indica trix, ancl T heir Iliterrelation , by D r. C eorge ' TIIIIl'1I ( '"Vll si i. A Clld. Sd.,
vol. 23, p. 235, 193.'3 ).
,,
,, ,
,, ,,
,, ,
11"
= 0.155
(b) Barite
2V = 37 30'
Il y -
11 "
= 0.012
Variation in Axial Angle. Figure 6-21 illustrates two biaxial interforenco figun.l~ 10 tho 45 position. The figure on the left represents
L04
MINERAL OPTICS
llagonite and that on the right represents barite. The sections have each
been cut normal to the -acute bisectrix and are approximately equal in
thickness. Two variables remain to produce differences in the diagram :
variation in the axial angle 2V and variation in the double refraction
n2 - n
The figure on the left represents the approximate position of the two
isogyres in relation to the field of the microscope for 2V = 19 (aragonite). The figure on the right represents barite drawn to the same scale
with 2V = 3730'.
The dotted lines indicate the distribution of the color bands. Aragonite
has a double refraction of 0.155, and barite is 0.012. Aragonite has more
bands for the same thickness of section.
It is worthwhile to record in a notebook the relative positions of the
isogyres for angles in the neighborhood of 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30,
35, and 40. Such a record will assist in determining the approximate
axial angle of an unknovm mineral. Charts E, F, and G in Table 10-10
give values for common minerals.
It should be remembered that if the thickness remains the same, the
number of color bands of interference figures will increase or decrease
with increase or decrease in double refraction.
Determination of the Optic Sign of a Biaxial Mineral. The optic sign
is conveniently determined with the mineral in the 45 position with a
quartz wedge. In some cases a mica plate or gypsum plate may be
preferred.
W'hen the direction X is the acute bisech'ix, the mineral is negative.
If Z is the acute bisech'ix, the mineral is optically positive. As stated ,
X, Y, and Z are the axes of ease of vibration. Light traveling through a
clystal normal to X has the maximum velocity for all directions in the
crystal. Light traveling normal to Z has the least velOcity.
A biaxial negative crystal in the acute bisectrix position at 45 may
be used to illush'ate the d etermination of the optic sign (see Figure
6-22). A biaxial figure of this type is first observed carefully in order
to note the position of the color bands, both in the central area and
within the two small areas inclosed by the concave portions of the
isogyres. A quartz wedge is then inserted in the accessOlY slot with the
slow ray parallel to the axial plane. Movement of the color bands takes
place as the wedge is inserted.
The displacement of the color bands in a negative crystal is indicated
by the arrows in Figure 6-22. As the wedge thickness increases the color
bands in the cenh'al area move toward the two "eyes," or melatopes,
of the interference fi gure. At th e same time th e bands on the oppositc
sides of the isogyres within th e two small nrens move away from th c
)1lclalopos. As tho w (',(l f;0 is wilhdrawn , the lI1 ovom(' nt i ~ rov('I's('d . I r a
j
105
.,.fb
~' (-'I;&'
'l,())
:-.. ~ \t>s~
.0
<ilv oo,e
\,,~e S\O~
{o~
~,4.~
:-. iio,~
q,o,0
~
;..,0 \
\"i"'o~ -\
<i;P
FIG. 6-22. The determin ation of the optic sign with a bhudal negative interference
fig ure.
1 the slow ray of the quartz wedge is parallel to the direction Z, increase
in retardation occurs as the wedge thickness increases. If the quartz
wedge is always ins erted as indicated in Figure 6-22, an acute bisectrix
biaxial negative interference figure in the 45 position will always show
movement of the color bands toward the melatopes in the central area.
Conversely, a biaxial positive figure treated in the same way will show
movement in the opposite direction. Since the slow-ray vibration direction in thc qu artz wcdge is marked, the slow-ray vibration direction in
tho intcrl'crence fi gure is easily determined by comparison. Directions of
movcment for posilive and nega tive bia;d al fl gures in monochromatic
light will i th e slow-ra y viilratio ll direc lion of all accessory plato superim[)()s<'<l (l 1't ! S I IOW Ii ill Figlll'\ ' 023.
06
MINERAL OPTICS
107
Without wedge
FIG.
Negative
1 to Bxo
Positive
Negative
F IG. 6-23. Positive and negative biaxial crystals ( in dicating th eir appearance with a
mica plate in monochromatic light ).
Positive
1 to optic axis
v
1 to optic axi s
F IG . 6-25. Movem ent of the color b ands to be exp ected as the quartz wedge is inserted in acute bisectrix and op tic-axis interference fi gures of opp osite sign .
MINERAL OPTICS
[)S
) designate the character of the dispersion. Thus, if the axial angle for
~d r is greater than that for violet v, the dispersion is expressed r > v.
n case the reverse is true, the formula is r < v.
In many instances the dispersion can be determined by direct observaion of the biaxial interference figure (Figure 6-26). If the isogyres of
r>v
r <v
Bille extinqllished
red shines throllqh
109
Bille extinqllished
red shines throllqh
F IG. 6-26. Biaxial interference figures illustrating dispersion r > v and r < v. The
colored fringes as observed in the interference figure are reversed from the axial
angles existing in the crystal due to extinction.
These types are b est distinguished by the use of light of various wavelengths. Red and blue color filters placed in front of the mirror of the
microscope are convenient.
REFERENCES
Inclined
Horizontal
(el
(b)
FIG. 6-27. Dispersion fringes for monoclinic crystals. (a) Crossed dispersion. (b)
Horizontal dispersion. (c) Inclined dispersion.
Crossed
to)
the interference figure (r > v) have a distinct red fringe on the convex
edges, the angle for red is greater than for violet. Both isogyres should
be observed b efore reaching a conclusion. On the concave sidc of thc
isogyre, as illustrated in the figurc, red li ght is extinguish ed , and conseqnently the concave fringe is bIlle in color. Blue is extin gui sh ed on tho
convex side, and I"he f",ill gc is red.
10
MINERAL OPTICS
Nahlstrom, E. E.: "Optical Crystallography," John Wiley & Sons, Inc. , New
York, 1943.
Ninchell, A. N.: "Elements of Optical Mineralogy, Part I: Principles and
Methods," 5th ed., John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, 1937.
Nright, F . E.: The Index Ellipsoid, Am. ]. Sci., 4th ser., vol. 35, pp. 133-138,
1913.
_ _ : The Formation of Interference Figures : A Study of the Phenomena
Exhibited by Transparent Inactive Crystal Plates in Convergent Polarized
Light, ]. Opt. Soc. Am., vol. 7, pp. 779-817, 1923.
CHAPTER
Purpose. The universal stage (Figure 7-1) is designed to tilt the plane
of a thin section at various angles to the plane of a microscope stage. It
contains a series of graduated circles (Figure 7-2) which measure the
angular positions of tilted sections. Such a device aids in the determination of optic orientation, 2V, optic sign, the directions of pleoclu'oism,
FIG. 7-1. A four-axis universal stage showing the upp er hemisphere an d four graduated circles fo r angul ar measuremen t. (E. L eitz, In c. )
112
MINERAL OPTICS
113
?late in the center. Two glass hemispheres are provided to make the thi!1
,ection visible at various angles of inclination. One is fastened beneath
the glass plate and the other above the thin section. Special objectives
are inserted in the microscope to obtain images from the curved surface
of the upper hemisphere. Cedar oil or glycerin is used to make optical
contact above and below the thin section, also behveen the lower hemisphere and the glass plate. The polarizing microscope employed must
provide a large working distance between stage and objective and the
Upright
orc (4)
:UI
e}-3
00
-a.
. r2
3
N
INS
I
-u.--- I
Upright
orc (4)
Outer vertical
circle (2)
c/1'
Inner upright
circle (4)
7-2. Diagram of a four- axis universal stage. Four graduated circles are indicated.
Axes OV and IV arc perp endicular to circles (l) and (3), while axes NS and EW
lie in the planes of the inner and outer circles.
FIG.
area for horizontal rotation must be broad. Usually only research microscopes are adequate.
Graduated Circles. In the ordinary four-axis universal stage, measurements are made on four graduated circles, with the stage of the microscope providing a fifth circle. The axis of the microscope remains in the
same vertical position at all times and may be deSignated as Am.
The four movable axes lie respectively normal to the four graduated
circles (Figure 7-3) and may be deSignated as OV (vertical to outer
circle) , IV (vertical to inner circle) , EW (normal to circular drum), and
NS (normal to Wright arcs). When the stage is set with each circle at
zero, OV and IV are vertical, EW is horizontal east-west, and NS is hOlizontal north-south.
The outer circle of the universal stage rotates around OV and lies in
a horizontal plane in the zero position. An inner circlc holds thc slide
and hemispheres. It lies in a horizontal plane in th e zero position and
rotates around IV.
Thc outer circle is ,not o lll y frec to roLate nrOl llld th n OV axis, bu t il
1
I
FIG.
Axis of microscope
Am
I
I
--A 2
"
F lc. 7-tl. Diag ra m of a ri ve-ax is universal stage ( a[[er Emmons). Axes AI, A and
"
1\, :Iro pc rpClldicld ar to Ihe planes or th c circles 1,3, and 5 . The planes of the circles
tl ru ti lted IIrol ll, d HA('S A" A" Hlle! A".
114
MINERAL OPTICS
may be tilted from the horizontal in either direction about the EW axis .
The angles of tilt are measured on the vertical drum at the side of the
stage.
The inner circle measures angles around the IV axis. This circle may
be tilted around the NS axis . Angles of tilt are meas ured on the two
graduated Wright arcs which curve upward from the outer circle.
The five-axis universal stage contains a
\le re of pro/eel'.'
third inner circle as illustrated in Figure
5P~o-?
7-4. This circle holds the slide. Emmons
( 1943) recommends a five-axis stage and
points out that the additional motion provided by an inner fifth circle is actually a
simplification.
The Stereographic Plot. The angular
relations of a universal stage may b e conveniently plotted by means of a stereographic projection. Here the crystal is
imagined
to lie at the center of a sphere.
Stereographic construction
The principal axis of the crystal coincides with the nOlth-south polar axis of the
~o.v.,o\Or~/'>6'
sphere, The equatorial plane cuts the crystal and also the spherical system into upper
and lower halves. In such a projection the
points of intersection of radii with the
.-- --....-, ;--N
,
8
A
spherical surface are projected on to the
equatorial plane (Figure 7-5) , thus reducing a large variety of angular measurements to a circular, two-dimensional plot.
Projection of a crystal face to the equaPlone of stereographic projection
torial plane is accomplished in two operaFIG. 7-5. The projection of tions, A radius normal to a crystal face is
crystal faces A and B to A' and
extended to the surface of the sphere,
B' in the plane of stereo graphic
projection . Faces parallel to the
Then a chord is drawn to the opposite pole
vertical axis are projected to
from the intersection of the normal with
the circumference.
the spherical surface. The intersection of
the chord with the equatorial plane is the point of spherical projection.
Where faces are parallel to the north-south polar axis, the radii lie
within the equatorial circle, and face positions are plotted on the circumference. V\There a face radius coincides with the principal axis and
lies along the north-south pole, the face is proj ected as a point at the
center of the equatorial plan e.
In order lo pial opli cal posilions, opl ic ax('s lYl;l Y h(' Ir('atccl as race
radii 1I()1'lYlal I() ilnn g illary eryslal fll ('('s . TIlliS 111<')' wi ll a pp< 'ar ; IS pOilll s
Oil Iho S loJ'C ;o~rllplri( ' !,rojl '!' l!o" . !\I'( '~ ()r ('il'(,II's l'OPII 'SI'ldill g lI 11g"llIJ' posi.
115
tions are drawn on the projection forming a so-called stereo graphic net,
Where the angular relationships are known from measmements with a
universal stage, various positions may b e plotted directly on the stereographic net essentially as latitude and longitude may b e located on a
map. It is convenient to plot positions on a transparent overlay placed
on the net.
Positions are recorded in terms of (phi) and p (rho) angles (Figme
7-6), The angle is measured clockwise in the horizontal plane from the
Crys ta l a ngles
Brookite
Ellenville, N.Y.
'"
Forms
cOOl
b OlO
a 100
1140
m 120
y 01 2
x 011
t 20 1
e III
n 22 1
z 122
o 121
(rho)
000'
9000'
9000'
9000'
9000'
(p hi)
000'
9 000'
2249)'i '
4005'
000'
000'
9000'
5917'
59 17'
4005'
4005 '
1 540 ~~'
29 18'
6200'
4 7 4 1 ~ '
6531)1,'
3615).2 '
5543'
(Frondel, 1944)
o
o
'
001,
b!
Oil
C, 012
o o
o
010
I, ~O~l10 1220121
t 201 \ 221
a
100
~O.
//~
/
b
FIG. 7-6, A crystal drawing of brookite with a corresponding stereo graphic projection
east-west axes. The angle p is measured along a vertical plane from the
north pole of the stereo graphic net.
Brookite furnishes one of the most remarkable examples of disperSion
observed among mincrals and m ay be used to illustrate a stereographic
net. The optic plane lies along (100) for violet while the optic plane for
red is (001) . The optic directions as shown in Figure 7-7 may be compa red with tho gco melTie relalions of tll e crystal (Figmc 7-6) by means
of L.hc storeogJ'llpiti c rrojecLion. The re la tive posilions of the optical di
1'('(' lions rnllv flo flll/ sln li nd wi llt 111 0 I/lliV(IJ'Sfd SI'IlKO,
116
MINERAL OPTICS
Adjustment. A modern, well-constructed universal stage ordinarily requires little adjustment. Nevertheless, attention should be directed to
centering both horizontally and vertically. The Rrst step is to center the
microscope stage with the objective, using a dust particle on the glass
plate of the universal stage as a reference point. Next, the microscope
stage is locked and the outer circle of the universal stage is rotated, the
center of rotation being brought into coincidence with the crosshairs. A
small amount of horizontal leeway permits adjus tment on the screws
which fasten the universal stage to the microscop e.
Vertical adjustment is largely Rxed by the construction of the stage.
Vertical deviation from the center of rotation may b e detected by the
"""
............
"
"""
->0-.
///
""
:
,. _ _
" I
" ,/c=',
YorX '-,-
,,"
//
/' ~ // a,<.\
"I"
C::::;...
c:J
Q)
f\.;::
.+
I..c)
9--
--<
,,,
'-"
1\
.-<
~~
>' =555.5
b=Zj
,-'
', ' - ,
/'"
-<
''-'':;~
0=
XorY
FIG. 7-7. The range in the optic plane and 2E for brookitc with the wavelength of
light as plotted on a stereographic projection. All variations are with refercnce to the
crystallographic axes (I, b, and c.
mar
~\
/ //
I
~
a way that the relative inclinations of the optic axes of several crystals
may be shown on the same stereographic net. When the planes of the
usual polarizing microscope are in alignment with the universal stage,
the east-west crosshair will ordinarily mark the plane of the analyzer
and the north-south crosshair the plane of the polarizer. The inclination
of each optic axis as Rnally measured will furnish angular readings on
the graduated circles which may be simpliRed to cp and p to plot on
a stereographic net (Figure 7-8).
Location of the Uniaxial Optic Axis. The angular inclinations of optic
axes in uniaxial crystals can be measured as truncated by the plane of
~~--1t~
I'
117
(0)
(b)
(c)
7-8. Stereographic projections showing steps in the orientation of the optic axis
of a uniaxial crystal. u. Op tic axis inclined at random to th e plane of a thin section .
b. Rotated about the outcr graduated circle to extinction. c. Tilted by the drum to
coincide with the axis of the microscope. The crosshairs mark the planes of the nicols.
FIG.
the thin section (Figure 7-9). The measurement of cp and p for a single
optic axis is accomplished in two operations, each depending on extinction.
First, the axis is to be rotated until it lies along the east-west extinction plane of the microscope. Th e various circles of the universal stage
and the microscope stage are set in initial position. The inner horizontal
circle of the universal stage is rotated until the crystal under observation
is in the extinction position. The optic axis will then lie within either the
north-south vertical plane or the east-west vertical plane.
Second, the a;xis is to b e tilted until it is vertical and in coincidence
with the axis of the microscope. It will be assumed that the optic axis
lics in the north-south plane. In this case it may be tilted to the vertical
position by turning the drum on the side of the universal stage. The
vcrtical position is recognized by a simple maneuver. As the drum is
lllrll cd , thc microscope stagc is oscillated slightly to right and left until
;t point is nolcd at whi.ch extinction p ersi sts on either side notwithstandiii I-.>; th e rolalion . Su ch a point is lh c optic-axis position . If rotation of the
dn lll1 cause's Lhe cryslal lo leave eX lin ction , thc optic axis lics within the
('lIs l-wesl ve rti cal plane. hi this casc the inn cr horizontal circle is rotated
00 , '1'11 0 oplic IIx is w ill lhell li o Itloll g th e norlh -~o ulh planc. Tho pro-
118
MINERAL OPTICS
[J
~
- ~ -~
"'-----1
(a)
(b)
(el
7-9. Manipulation of a si ngle optic axis to coincide with the microscope axis.
(a) The uniaxial axis is shown in inclined position on the thin section (above) and
on the stereo graphic projection (below). (b) The crystal is rotated to the extinction
position about the vertical inner axis of the universal stage. (c) The axis is tilted to
coincide with the crosshairs by turning the dnIm on the east-west axis.
FIG.
119
The sign of a uniaxial crystal is determined with the mica plate, gypsum plate, or the quartz wedge. When the direction of the optie axis in
an individual crystal is known, the crystal may be tilted in the 45 position to observe interference colors along the axis. If the slow ray is
normal to the axis the mineral is positive and, conversely, if the fast ray
is normal to the axis the mineral is negative.
Optical Directions in Biaxial Crystals. The main objectives are to detennine X, Y, and Z in terms of east, west, and vertical; to determine
2V; and to determine the sign. These may be accomplished by observing
maximum interference and extinction.
The circles are set at zero. The inner circle is then rotated to extinction.
The vertical drum is next rotated. Extinction may possibly remain whieh
indicates that the coincidence of X, Y, or Z with the east-west <Lxis has
already b een accomplished. If extinction does not remain the drum is
turned to the position of maximum illumination. The inner circle is then
tilted along the Wright arcs to the right or left to minimum illumination.
The drum is then returned to zero. Extinction should be complete, indicating a coincidence of X, Y, or Z with the east-west axis. If extinction
is not complete estimates of m<Lximum and minimum illumination should
be repeated. When satisfactory extinction is obtained the cf> and p angles
can be indicated on a stereographic net. The next problem is to determine
which of the three-X, Y, or Z- coincides with the east-west axis.
If Y coincides, the optic axes will lie along the vertical plane at right
angles to the east-west axis. In this case, if the drum is turned, a position
of minimum illumination will identify an optic axis. The axis position
may be verified by rotating the microscope stage. The crystal will remain
dark between crossed nicols during rotation. When verified, the position
of the optic axis should be recorded on the stereographie net.
If either X or Z coincide with the EW axis, rotation of the drum with
the microscope stage hu-ned at 45 will cause an increase in interference.
T hen the drum is returned to zero and an accessory plate used to note
whether the optical direction parallel to the EW axis is X or Z.
The final operation is the measurement of the second plane of optical
symmetry. The microscope stage is returned to zero. The tilt on the
YVright arcs is returned to zero. Then the inner circle is rotated 90 to
lhe second extinction position. The manipulations indicated above are
then rep eated in order to determine which of the remaining two optical
d ircc tions lies at 90 0 to the EW axis as already identified.
Illus trative Mounts. Special thin sections are convenient to illustrate
lho initial opera tion of a universal stage. A section cut at random from
illl irrcglllarly oriented clilstcr of small, well-d eveloped , h exagonal qualtz
(rys lals provid('s a II sefll l exa mple of a uniaxial positive mi.n eral. The
I IOX III!;()J 111 I olillill( \S I"lII"lIi sll ~(' ()Il)('lri('[l l g lli(les lo ass ist in visualizing the
120
MINERAL OPTICS
~S~
121
the plane of the optic axes is marked with ink on the slide- or b etter,
with a line drawn with a diamond point.
The universal stage is then set in position and centered. With circles
and stage in initial position the muscovite slide is mounted b etween the
hemispheres with the line indicating
------ .... . . .
the axial plane parallel to the NS Outer
..... /:-~Tf - . . , ",
clrcle
.
.
.
.
.
~I"
"\ \
7
axis. A large sheet of a single muscovite crystal will yield an observable
/
\ \ \\
I ,
I I
gOO-type biaxial interference figure
I I
~ ~
"" EW
in this position. The stage of the
f f
Arc f ~. uxfs--~
j I !:}
0
microscope is n ext set at 45 to the
' \
,
I
/"
~I~
"
125
GENERAL FEATURES
X<Y<Z
CHAPTER
Color and Pleochroism. Many minerals are colorless, but color when
present is a distinctive feature. Deeply colored minerals are more likely
to be colored in thin sections than minerals with pale tints.
Minerals showing nahlral color are listed in Table lO-2. Among these,
isotropic minerals yield no color change as the mineral is rotated in planepolarized light. Anisotropic minerals exhibit a change in color in varying
degrees as the stage is rotated. The change in color produced is known
as pleochroism. Natural mineral color in thin sections is observed with
the polarizer alone.
Hexagonal or tetragonal colored minerals are dichroic- i.e., the pleochroic coloring of minerals in these two systems as exhibited with the
polarizer is twofold.
Orthorhombic, monoclinic, and triclinic minerals, when colored in thin
section, exhibit tluee diHerent colors and are trichroic.
The pleochroic colors are normally oriented with the axes X, Y, and Z
of the crystal. In addition to the conventional colors of Table 10-2, white
or neutral may represent a pleocluoic change. Since X, Y, and Z are the
vibration axes, color distribution is related to ncr, n/3, and ny and also the
optic axes. The correlation of the relationships is best accomplished by
reference to the interference figure in order to determine the directions
of the axes. As soon as the acute bisectrix Z (if the mineral is positive )
or X (if the mineral is negative) is knmVI1, the Bertrand lens and analyzer
may be removed from the microscope tube and the corresponding nahual
color ascertained. The color produced by light vibrating in a plane at
right angles to the axial plane is Y. The third color will b e due to light
Vibrating parallel to the direction of the obtuse bisectrix. This will b e X
if the mineral is positive or Z if thc mineral is ncgative.
In pleochroic lmiaxial minerals, li ght Vibratin g parallel to th c optic
ax is is on c color, whercas li ghl at righl ~ lIl gks is anolil cr.
Bia xial milll' rais ('xllihil v;lI"y ili g clC'gn 'c's of ah ~ ()rpl iOIl of color. In ('om12/1
FIC . 8-1.
F IC . 8-2.
FIG. 8-1. ( X 33 ) Incipient crystals of rodlike aggrega tes in a groundmass of volcanic
glass.
FIC. 8-2. ( X 33 ) Shatter cracks in halloysite (crossed nieols ).
126
MINERAL OPTICS
FIG. 8-3.
FIG. 8-4.
FIG. 8-3. ( X 33) Rounded sections of pisolitic bauxite made up of the mineral
cliachite. Interstices ( around holes in the section) contain gibb site.
FIG. 8-4. (X 33) Cellular structure of wood preserved in opal.
frequently exhibits flow lines, cracks, or concentric fractures. Opal is usually banded and may exhibit a play of colors. Shatter cracks are distinctive features in minerals of colloidal origin (Figure 8-2).
Cliachite, the amorphous mineral found in bauxite, occurs in pisolitic
forms frequently cracked and fractured at random. Interstices between
pisolites may be RIled with gibbSite forming aRne-grained gray-andwhite mosaic of small crystals (Figure 8-3).
The rounded, more or less spherical forms assumed by amorphous and
metacolloidal minerals in open spaces are frequently described as colloform.
Materials of OrganiC Origin. In the study of thin sections, structures
are occasionally encountered that are residual from organic life. Diatomaceous, radiolarian, or foraminiferal organisms have distinctive structures frequently preserved in minerals. Fossil diatoms and othcr micro1 The term micl'o(l /H ol'pholl s is lI scd bco[\ lIs0 X-my slll <i i('s hllvc shown 111('se materiab to have direclioll ul pr()p o rli c~ sC II ~ il iva In sllorl WIIVC I('lI gl li s.
GENERAL FEATURES
127
scopic remains are usually opal and have the optical properties of that
mineral. The original structures of the microorganisms, however, are
on many occasions well preserved (Figure 8-7). Foraminifera are apt
to yield calcite, usually Rnely crystalline in nature, and difficult to distinguish from aragonite unless the structure is suffiCiently coarse to permit the rhombohedral cleavage to d evelop (Figure 8-8).
Fragments of former vegetable matter preserved as carbonaceous
material- lignite, etc.- are usually black or brown in thin section. Cellular structures of wood as preserved in lignite are quite distinctive in
thin section. Opal formed by the replacement of wood frequently exhibits cellular structure (Figure 8-4).
FIG. 8-5.
FIG. 8-6.
FIG. 8-5. (x 33) Chalcedony between crossed nicols showing both radial aggregates
GENERAL FEATURES
.~,
''''
. -'t'
10
,. t ~ _
It'
'e . ,
'"
....
'\
..-
",
.. ,,~
!\ ,.,. '
. >
."",
FIC.
8-7.
FIC.
8-8.
FIC.
8-9.
FIC.
8-10.
Fic. 8-11.
FIC. 8-12.
8-7. ( X 33) The fine microorganic structures preserved in opal-forming fossil
di atoms. Diatomaceous earth from Lompoc, California.
FIG. 8-8. \ X33 ) Calcite in sections of fo ssil foraminifera scattered tluough carbonaceous shale.
FIG. 8-9. ( X 33 ) Mosaic structure in chalcedony. A "salt and pepper" aggregate of
small crystals photograph ed between cru ssed ni eols.
FI G, 8- 10. ( X33 ) A pulariza tion cross ill fo ss il ror:llllill irL' ra of c:il c il o arra llgcd in
CO Il C(' III, ie.; hand s or ntdiu l ri lwrlih' c' ysl:ds.
1'10. H- II. ( X :3:1) N", .ll,li k., (,yst!ds "I' , illiIlIlIlJiI,' ill '1"1"1 / .
1" 0 . Ii 12, ( ":\:l) I':,dll ,d' id 1" y' llIJ.. III 111111'1" , ('11111 101,,1. '/" 1"" III ',il lIl 'l III g lll'.s.
. 1 ~1l
FIG.
129
MINERAL OPTICS
130
GENERAL FEATURES
131
FIG.
FIG.
FIC.
FIG.
FIG.
FIG .
8-13.
8-14.
8-15.
8-16.
8-17.
8-18.
F IG.
8-13.
FIC .
8-15.
FIG.
8-16.
FIC. 8-17.
FIG. 8-18.
( X33 ) Bands of asbestos fi bers in serpentine (crossed nieols) .
( X33) Needl elike crystals of tourm aline arranged in radial groups.
( X33 ) Schiller structure in hypersthene.
( X33 ) Pleochroic halos in biotite.
( X33 ) Bladed crystals of kya llitc.
( x33 ) Sphene twinn ed parallel to th e lell gth or th e , (clion.
FIG.
F IC.
8-20.
FIG . 8-19.
8-19. ( X33) Anh edral crystals of hornbl ende associated with qu artz.
8-20. ( X 33) Subhedral garnet in quartz.
MINERAL OPTICS
132
GENERAL FEATURES
133
FIG. 8-21.
FIG. 8-22.
FIG. 8-21. ( X33) Euhedral hornblende associated with biotite in thin section.
FIG. 8-22. ( X 33) Apatite crystals in thin section ( crossed nicols) .
FIG. 8-26.
FIG . 8-25.
FIG. 8-25. ( x 33) A euhedral crystal of analcime.
FIG. 8-26. ( X 33) Isometric crystals of garnet showin g anomalous aniso tropism and
banding b etween crossed nicols.
FIG. 8-23.
FIG. 8-23. ( X 33 ) Skeleton crystals of corundum in mica shist.
FIG. 8-24. ( X33 ) Andalusite containing symmetrically arranged carbonaceous inclusions.
MINERAL OPTICS
134
FIG . 8-28.
8-27.
8-27. ( X33) Nepheline crystals showing both hexagonal and rectangular outFIG .
FIG.
lines.
FIG. 8-28. ( X 33) A euhed ral crystal of olivine.
of the adjustments of the microscope are occasionally found in thin sections. Barite crystals may be square, rectangular, or elongated, with
parallel or symmetrical extinction. Staurolite crystals (Figure 8-29) are
often rectangular or rhombic. Andalusite forms symmetrical rhombic
crystals (Figure 8-24) .
Monoclinic C1ystals. The pyroxenes, amphiboles, monoclinic feldspars,
sphene, mica, epidote, and a number of other less common monoclinic
minerals are frequently found in euhedral crystals in thin sections. The
crystals exhibit inclined extinction when sections are cut either p arallel
to or near the plane of the a- and c-axis. Certain sections, however, may
be so orient ed as to furnish either symmeb'ical or p arallel extinction.
Each monoclinic crystal is an individual problem in optical orientation
and should be considered by itself.
Figures 8-21 and 8-30 furnish comparative examples of euhedral amphibole and euhedral pyroxene. The views demonsb'ate both crystal
boundaries and cleavap;e.
GENERAL FEATURES
135
FIG . 8-29.
FIG. 8-30.
8-29. ( X33) Euhedral staurolite crystals in a gro und mass of mLlscovilc a il e!
other minerals.
FIG . 8-30. ( X 33 ) Euhedral crystals of pyroxene.
F IG.
alone. In grinding thin sections cleavage planes often develop which appear in the nnished section as lines or b ands of varying width.
Some minerals separate only occasionally or break along planes of
twinning. This may be called parting. It is not always present and may
not continue to nner and nner particles. In an individual sp ecim en, in so
far as the effect produced is concerned, cleavage may b e indi sting lli shable from parting.
Cleavage is a crystallographic feature and may b e discussed in terms
of direction. Cleavages in one, two, or three direc tion s arc freq uent;
Huorite and diamond cleave in four directions, while sphalerite cleaves ill
six directions.
In the app ended tables for identifyin g common min erals enco llnterod
ill thin sections, cleavage planes, fra cture planes, or th e tC' llcJ ell cy to break
p:l l':dkl to cerlain cknnite dil'c('[iol1 s is incii calcd ror each of Lhc IIlill C'l'nls
ill c\lI(kd .
e /m'mgt' i ll 01/ (' I)ir('('/ ill // . 1\ 1111111\ )(' 1' or IlIill( 'rllls hnvo :I sill gk plall (1
of u!(;\V:I).!;( ', 11I1 1 ~ ( ()vill ' 11 11<\ lOp ll '/. 1)( ' iI' ~~ ( '~II I11pl\ ~ ( I'ig lll'i' H :l l ) . III tldll
136
MINERAL OPTICS
section, crystals showing one direction of cleavage usually exhibit systems of parallel lines. Occasionally, a cleavage plane may be almost
parallel to the section, in which instance practically no cleavage lines will
appear.
In the case of fragments , minerals with one direction of cleavage
usually lie flat upon the microscope slide and h ave irregular boundaries.
The interference color is nearly always uniform for the area of the fragment except on the outer edge, where a number of color b ands will b e
observed, forming color contours of minerals having strong double refraction. Frequently, similar orientation of interference figures occurs
in such fragments since m any lie in the same position.
GENERAL FEATURES
137
stricted to the isometric system, where both sections and fragments are
eaSily confirmed by the isotropic character of the material.
Rectangular cleavage resembles cubic cleavage in its appearance in
both thin sections and fragm ents (Figure 8-35) . Minerals haVing r ectangular cleavage, however, may be easily distinguished owing to their
anisotropism b etween crossed nicols.
FIG. 8-33.
FlG. 8-34.
8-33. Euhedral pyroxcne crystals shOWing two directions of cleavage ill a groundmass of feldspar.
FIG. 8-34. Andalusite with cleavage in two dil-ections at about 90 0 , cut by veilliets
of nne muscovite with cleavage in one direction.
FIG.
FIG. 8-31.
FIG . 8-32.
8-31. Anhcdral topaz crystals with broadly spaced cleavage in onc direction with
penetrating muscovite having closely spaced clcavage in one direction.
0
0
F IG . 8-32. Anhedral hornblende with cleavage at 56 an d 124 in a groundmass of
feldsp ar.
FIG.
Cleavage in Two Directions. Several common min erals develop prominent cleavage in 1:\'1 0 directions. The pyroxenes, amphiboles, and feldspars are outstanding illustrations.
Common hornblende of the amphibole group is distin guished from
pyroxene by a difference in cleavage angle. The cleavage of hornblende
(Figure 8-32) parallel to the rhombic prism {ll O} is in wo directions
at 56 and 124 . The cleavage of the rhombic prism in the case of
pyroxene (Figure 8-33) is approximately 87 and 93 .
The two directions of cleavage may b e at 90 in orthorhombic or tetragonal minerals. Figure 8-34 illustrates andalusite (orthorhombic), with
wo directions of cleavage at about 90 (89 12').
Cleavage in Three Directions. The types produced due to cleavage in
three directions vary considerably. One of the simplest types is th at produced by cleavage p ar allel to the faces of the cube. In thin scctions
cleavage of this type produces square or triangular p atterns . In fragments
the boundaries tend to b e square or rectangular. Cubic cleavage is re-
138
MINERAL OPTICS
cleavage are usually Rat lying, with a fairly well-developed rhombic section, and vary in relief with direction. The edges usually show wedgelike
or inclined swface boundaries.
Cleavage in three directions is frequ ently produced by breaking parallel
to various directions in crystals of the orthorhombic, monoclinic, and
triclinic systems. In most instances, the part of the mineral under examination presents a special case. As a rule, however, cleavage of this
type produces a crisscross of almost rectangular pattern in thin section,
and in fragments the boundaries either are almost rectangular or may
be Rat lying, with wedgelike edges.
Cleavage in Four Directions. One common Inineral, RUOlite, has cleavage in four directions parallel to the faces of an octahedron (Figure
8-35). Cleavages of Ruorite in thin section tend to develop triangular or
rhombic patterns. In fragments the outlines of individual fragments are
triangular or in-egular with pointed edges. These are easily detected between crossed nicols on account of the isotropic character of the mineral.
OccaSionally spinel is found with an octahedral parting imperfectly developed but somewhat resembling octahedral cleavage. The diamond has
octahedral cleavage but, needless to say, is not common in thin sections.
Cleavage in Six Directions. Sphalerite is one of the few minerals with
cleavage parallel to the six different directions of a dodecahedron. The
outlines of this figure may occasionally b e detected in pieces of sphalerite
within sections due to the intersections of inclined cleavage planes. In
fragm ents sometimes almost perfect dodecahedrons may b e observed.
Tendency to Break in Elongate Directions. Some minerals exhibit a
decided fibrous structure, being made up of numerous small needles
visible as parallel crystals b eneath the microscope. These may vary in
size from small elongated blades to minute capillary fibers . Coarser minerals of this sort change from fibrous to bladed shapes.
Orientation_ The optical orientation of a mineral involves the correlation of the optical directions with crystallographic directions. In biaxial
minerals the problem usually involves locating the position of the acute
bisectrix, optic normal, and axial plane with respect to the axes a, b,
and c of a crystal. The orientation of uniaxial Ininerals concerns the relation of the optical system to the c-axis.
In the following discussion it is assumed that the reader is faIniliar with
the simple rules of description of crystals in the various systems and the
conventions of orientation; othelwise a text on geometrical crystallography should be consulted.
Isometric System. Optical orientation in isometric crystals is eliIninated
since isometric crystals are isotropic, hence becoming non-directional as
far as light is concerned.
TetragofUll and I-Jexagorw-Z Systems. The optic axes of uniaxial minerals
are parallel to the c-axos of tetragonal or hexagonal min enlls. The clirc:c-
GENERAL FEATURES
139
tion may agree with either the fast or the slow ray of the mineral, depending upon the optic sign.
Orthorhombic System. The crystallographic axes a, b, and c of orthorhombic minerals correspond with the vibration axes X, Y, and Z but
not necessarily in the order named. The crystallographic axis a, for instance, may be X, Y, or Z, and the same substitutions are possible for
crystallographic axes band c. If two vibration axes are fixed, however,
the third becomes known. It is also evident that X and Z define the position of the axial plane; thus, if a = Z and c = X, the axial plane includes
a and c. The axial angle 2V may vary in amount within the axial plane.
Orthorhombic crystals are indicated in several ways. The extinction is
parallel to a, b, or c. Thus if a, b, and c can be ascertained from some
FIG.
prominent cleavage or crystal outline, the nature of the extinction becomes known. Recognizable cleavage and crystal faces aid in examination. Good dispersion is useful.
When the positions of a, b, and c are once ascertained, the interference
figure will furnish criteria for the relative fixation of X, Y, and Z. The
position of the optic axes will also be ascertained at the same time. In
practice each mineral presents a special problem in orientation, and da ta
for the common minerals are included with the mineral description s in
Part 2.
Barite furni sh es a useful illustration of the probl em involved in th e
optical orientation of an orthorhombic min eral. An idealized cleavage
of barite is shown in Fig m e 8-36, togeth cr with a diagram of a thin section and three orie nted cross s('('lions. In thin scction tho harito grai ll s
(~xhihil cimv;l ge in lllr('(' dir('ct iolls, II I(' ('lc-av~l ge p;lrnllelto (001) I>~'illg
lI1oro proIIOIIlIC'('d , TIl(' grll ill Ill ll l'k. 'd II ill III(' lhill s( 'dioll hllpp( 'ns In /)\ '
i ll II posilioll ill ""'Iic'l 111 0 1 1I' 1~ 1 j\.'1 cd c1. 'I IVllgO II I( IIi SII 1'0 7H o22' , Tltl~ {;-Llxis
140
MINERAL OPTICS
is perpendicular to this section. The planes {1l0} and {llO} are parallel
to the c-axis. In this grain the a-axis would bisect the obtus e angle or
cleavage, and the b-axis would bisect the acute angle of cleavage. Between crossed nicols the extinction will b e parallel to a and b, or symmetrical with respect to the cleavage. Grain S would have parallel extinction but might be normal to the b-axis and not in a position to give
an interference figure of the acute bisectrix type. An interference figure
is oriented with respect to the cleavage as shown in grain Q. A test with
the quartz wedge will confirm the fact that the mineral is positive; hence
Bx" Z. The optic normal is Y, and Bxo X. If one refers again to the
Ie
(0101
Ie
/0
~I
__
~p=y ___~r~i
~(0101
. ",,0\
{]
----
'("\
\1
I
FIG.
141
GENERAL FEATURES
a = Z
b = Y
c = X
The angle 2V as estimated with the microscope is approximately equal to
the recorded angle 37 0 30'. Therefore the optic axes make an angle of
18 0 45' with the a-axis.
The orientation in the case of orthorhombic crystals is not always
so simple as in the case of barite. The principles and procedure, however,
are essentially the same, and it is always fundamental to be able to fix
the position of X, Y, and Z with respect to a, b, and c.
Monoclinic System . In monoclinic crystals, X, Y, or Z corrcspond to
the b-axis. If Y corresponds to b, which is oftcn the case, X and Z w:ill
occupy any position at 90 0 to each othcr in thc plan e of (f and c.
143
MINERAL FRAGMENTS
CHAPTER
Mineral Fragments
done in a few minutes, and the slide may be marked for purposes of
Rling.
Temporary mounts are made by utilizing the various inert liqUids used
for determining the indices of refraction. Screened fragments are preferable for routine work. If screens are not available, fragments of suitable
size may be obtained by plaCing small lumps of a mineral between two
glass slides and rubbing the slides together until the glass surfaces slide
smoothly over each other on the mineral powder. On a clean glass slide,
place about as many fragments as can be pickcd up on the tip of a small
knife blade. By tapping the edge of the slide with the knife, distribute
the fragments evenly over an area approximately 14 inch in diameter.
Then place a cover glass over the grains. With a small glass rod, apply
a drop of oil at the edge of the
cover glass. The oil will flow in and
around the grains by capillary action
(Figure 9-1). If one drop of oil is
not sufficient, a second and a third
may be applied until the fragments
are completely immersed. Care
should be taken, however, not to
apply an excess of oil for this may
cause the grains to float, thus hin- FIG. 9-1. Immersion of mineral grains.
dering observations and measurements. With sufficient care, two or three mounts may be made on a
single slide. After use, the glass slides may be cleaned with alcohol,
followed by rinsing in water and drying.
Temporary mounts are by no means restricted to nne powders . Small,
well-formed crystals, deh'ital grains, coarse fragments, and oriented
cleavages or sections are representative of materials that may be examined in a variety of positions under the microscope. A slight movement of the cover glass on a temporary mount frequently suffices to tum
a fragment. This is somewhat easier if powdered glass slightly eoarscr
than the fragments being studied is mixed with the sample. The glass
fragments being free from cleavage lie in random positions and are easily
turned , moving the fragments of the sample at the same time. Th e glass
is easily distinguish ed by its isotropic character and index of refraction .
A binoculru: microscope of low power is extremely useful for th c purpose of isolating small crys tals or min cral grain s (Fi gure 9-2 ). Whil e
lookin g throu gh tlH' hinocular small crys tals may he pricd loosv from a
sp ecim en w ilh a needle anc1 these form ic1 e;)1 samp'les for ('xanlill :llioll
w illi til t: po'l:iri z in l,!; mi croscope, ill c illl(' r I C' lIlporary or P('rI1l :III (' 1I1 IIIOlllll s.
111ll1lCrsiol\ Melhod. In imm ersion , nlill c r:i1 fra glll('lIl s a)'(' plil ('('<I 1111<1 0 1'
III/l IlIi ('ro~ ( '()jl\ l ill It li(l' dd (If kllow " illdi ' ~ , alld Ilit l 1'\ ,1'1'111'11011
Ii g;1I I
or
MINERAL OPTICS
144
FIG.
MINERAL FRAGMENTS
145
146
MINERAL OPTICS
nt
n2
:
I
I
nt
I
~
I
I
1.670
1.675
1.680
___~ -
'0
I
I
np 7 t.680
1.665
FIG.
nIX =1.662
(\
Hornblende
II
n1----rn2
nt I
n2
I
I
g
~
Augite
I
I
I
Iny
I
I
I
I~
I
I
I n2
nlli
I
ntl
II
1.660
I
Iny
147
MINERAL FRAGMENTS
ny=!.699
1.685
1.690
1.695
1.700
be observed that all lines cross or meet 1.680, this being the value of n/3 ;
also, that no lines exceed 1.699, which is the value of 1Vy; and that no
lines are less than 1.662, which is the value of 11" . If fragments with weak
double refractions are tried in successive liquids, testing both n2 and n 1
in each case, the value of n/3 can soon be approximated within narrow
limits.
It is convenient as a confirmation of the determination of optic sign to
remember that when (n/3 - n,, ) is decidedly greater than ( 1Vy - n/3 ), the
mineral is optically negative. If on the other hand, (n/3 - n,,) is deCidedly less than (IVy - n/3 ), the mineral is positive.
Form of Mineral Fragments. Mineral fragments often exhibit distinctive forms under the microscope that are extremely useful in their identification. Such forms may be due to cleavage of the crystals of the mineral
or may be due to a characteristic growth that causes peculiar fragments,
or the crystals may be so small that they appear as individuals beneath
the microscope.
Natrolite
~~
[CIC. 9-4. Cleavage and fracture fragm ents. (a) One direction- irregular plates (Il l}
iiiu strated). (b) Two direction s- orthoclase, augite, and hombl end e. ( c) Thr<>
directions- kyanite, anhydrite (rectangular) , calci te (rhombohedral). (d) FO ll r d,'
reclions- flllorile (octahedral). ( e) Prismatic sillimanite. (f) Aciclllar- natrolite.
148
MINERAL OPTICS
149
ML'l"ERAL F RAGMENTS
Liquid
Approximate index
of ref raction
1 .333
Water ..... . . ........... . . .. .. .. ...... .. . .. ... .
1 .428
I soamyl isovalerate 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
1.466
. . . . . . . . . . .
K crasene 2 .
P etrol eum oil .
. . ... . . . . . . ... . ... . ...... ... . . 1 .475
1 .658
a -m onobromnaph thalene 3 . . . . . . . . .
Meth ylene iodide'. . .. . ... .. . .
. .......... . .. . . 1 .740
1.794
Solution of meth ylene iodide and sulfu r up to.
1 Eastman Kodak Co., Rochester , N. Y .
2 A clear, high ly refined product, call ed government oil, having t he v alue give n
above is sold by Leeds & Northrup Co.
3 Mo nochlorna ph thalene, or "halowax oil " (n = 1.63), has been fo und by a numbe r
of workers to be eq ually satisfactory and more eco nomical. It is sold by t he B ak eli te
Corp.
Edcan Laboratories, 12 Pine St ., South N orwalk, Co nn.
of refraction between 1.63 and 1.74. For indices b elow 1.43, some diffi culty has been encountered in findin g suitable liquids. With more th an
forty minerals and many inorganic substances having indices below 1.43,
liquids in this range are desirable. 'Vater and the alcohols are impractical
because of their solvent action. E xperiments with peb'oleum distillates
have shown that fractionation of two ligroins, gasolene, and kerosene
between narrow boiling-point limits results in stable liquids with indices
between 1.3548 and 1.4593 at 22C.
It has b een found also that ethyl propionate and mesitylene arc
miscible in all proportions to form satisfactory index media b etween
1.385 and 1.43.
Satisfactory liquids with indices of refraction above 1.74 constitute a
problem. Methylene iodide containin g diss olved sulfur has b een used
for the range from 1.74 to 1.78. Phenyldiodoarsine (n = 1.84) mixcd with
methylene iodide has been used for the range from 1.78 to 1.84. A set
of high-index liquids made up of phosphorus, sulfur, and methylene
iodide covering the range 1.78-2.06 has b een described by C. D . W cst.
These liquids are practically stable, inexpensive, and safe to use with th e
proper precautions.
A set of high-index liquids, composed of arsenic bromide-arsenic
sulfide-methylene iodide, has been described by L. H. Borgs bom. Th eso
liqu ids h ave a range from 1.78 to 1.95.
Mixed melts of sulfur and selenium (2.05 t o 2.72) or piperin e and
arseni c and antim ony b'iiodid es (1.68 to 2.10) are used for hi gll -in ckx
determina tions. Th e melts arc prepared in advance and arra nged in :1
series of mixtll rcs . T he valu es of t11 (" indi ces of th e mixtllres :11'(' d<,Innni ned h y th e p rism metlH)(l. A slll;dl prism or th e tr;l nSp ;lJ'('nt II II'll is
Ili ado a lld ll1() lIlll ('d Oil Ilu' Slllgl' or II go ni ome ler. n n th Ih e II n g ] (' 01' 111( 1
pris lll 1I1i d I h(} 11 l1 glo of Illillillllllli <i( lvinl iO Il unl 1l1.)IIS II J'('d . T lln i lld ox of
150
MINERAL OPTICS
+ V 2n2
= V xn x
where V represents volume, n the index, and V"n" the volume and index
desired. To illustrate, let the volume of n l = Vl and the volume of
n 2 = V 2 , n l = 1.4, n 2 = 1.65 and V "n" = 20 cm3 of index 1.5. Two equations may be written as follows:
1.4V I
+ 1.65V2 =
VI + V =
2
and, by solving,
30
20
V2 = 8
V l = 12
l~l
MINERAL FRAGMENTS
SYSTEMATIC IDENTIFICATION
CHAPTER
10
Systematic Identification
Table 10-1
Transparent
Colored
Shape or form
Cleavage
Index of refraction Tobie /0-5
Isotropic
Table 10-6
{ Chart A
Anisotropic
Birefringence Table /0-7
Uniaxial
Biaxial
10-1.
153
MINERAL OPTICS
SYSTEMATIC IDENTIFICATION
TABLE
154
155
10-1.
Color with
re flected light
O PAQUE MINERALS
Mineral
Comment
(Transparent Minerals
Mineral de scription
Color.
Shape . . .
Cleavage.
(> )
Black.
Graphite, C
Brass yellow.
Pyrite, FeS2
Hematite, Fe 20 3
Violet black .
Ilmenite, FeTi03
rroll hl ack to brown- I Chromite (Fe,Mg)(C r,AI,F e)2o .i Us ually brown on th in edgell.
is ll black.
Frequently fou nd with 110 1'pe ntine.
YC' lI olV brown ..
While
156
MINERAL OPTICS
TABLE
10-2,
157
SYSTEMATIC IDENTIFICATION
COL
ORED MINERALS
Red
--- - -
Pink rose
Orange
Brown
Sphalerite
'0
os. g :E
Sphalerite
Fluorite
S pinel
Collophane
Clia chite
P erovs kite
G a rn et
Fluorit e
a'"
Spinel
Cliachite
Perovs kite
,g~
Yellow
Green
Blue
Violet
Gray
Black
Sodalit e
'"o Q'"'
'"'
Perovs kite
P erovskit e
Garnet
---
Sodalit e
Spha lerite
Fluo rite
Spinel
Collophane
Sodalite
Soda li te
Fluorite
Spinel
Fluorite
Spinel
Fluorite
Spinel
P erolJskit e
Garnet
Garn et
Cliachite
Perovskit e
P erovskite
Garn et
La zuri te
Zircon
C ass iter ite
Rutile
OJ
'>l~
'a
Rutile
Zircon
Cassiterite
Rutile
Rutile
[Chlo ritoid]
[Chlorite]
[Chl oritoid]
[Biotit e]
Dra vite
Stilpnomela n e
I
T ourmaline
Corundum
Tourma line
[Biotite]
Dra vite
Stilpnom ela ne
Schorlite
Tourmaline
Stilpnomelane
Schorli te
Tourmaline
Apatite
J a rosite
Piedmontite
Titanite
Staurolite
Piedm ontite
Titanite
Piedrnonti te
Tita nite
Staurolite
Mona zite
Mona zite
StaUr1"olite
Clinochlor e
P erovs kite
P erovs kite
Aegirin e-augite
Chondrodite
P erovs kite
P erovs kite
Iddingsite
R util e
Schorlite
Schorlite
Schorli t e
Corundum
Apatite
Corundum
[Bi otit e]
Apatit e
Piedmontite
Rutile
[C hloritoid]
[Chlorite]
Zircon
Cassiterite
Rutile
Schorlito
Apa t it e
Piedmontite
Sph en e
Chloritoid
Clin ochlo re
Aegirine-a u gite
Chondrodite
Chloritoid
Chlorite
Aegirine-a ugite
Sph en e
Chloritoid
P erovskit e
Iddingsite
I
I
I
P ero vskit e _ _ I
Crocidolite
Crocidolite
Chlori te
Ri ebeckite
C hlorite
Ri ebeck ite
S1)h c1t6
P ero !)skite
Crocidolite
..'" ,-..
u -u
o 0
+I
,~
_.<l
o u
'a'"
.!:l
OJ
'>l
iXi"
Biotite
-< '"
Allanite
,
('
Hypersthene
Alla nite
Phlogopi te
Bas altic
Hornblende
A egirine
Hypersthen e
Biotite
Epidote
Glaucophan e
Allanite
Phlogopite
Actinolite
Glauconite
Biotite
E pidote
Epidote
Gla ucop ha n e
--
Glaucophane
G la uco p ha n e
L fl m pro holi to
Aeg irin e
H y pers t he ne
Ao tin oli te
A"(Jid n
G la li ou llitl'
Andalus ite
Dumortierite
1)1I111(n' t i critc
Hornblende
1 - ---1-
Il o t'lIhl (l lid o
Co /'( l if' /'1;(,iJ
Note: Ita lios indicate lesser examples ; bra ckets , occasional examples , C o lo red m inera ls,
a l t h o ll ~ h
qUai,'
158
MINERAL OPTICS
TABLE
cc
10-3.
FORM'
TABLE
Pyrite c
Fluorite r
Spinel r
Magnetite c
Perovski te c
Leuoite cc
Sodalite c
HaUyne c
Garnet cc
Analcime T
Tetragonal
Rutile c
C assi t eri te c
M elilite c
Idocrase c
Zircon c
Scapolite r
H exagonal
very rare
Quartz c
Corundum c
Calcite r
Dolomite r
Jarosite rr
Aluni te rr
Apatite cc
D a hllite c
C a ncrini te r
Tourmaline r
Cha b azite c
N epheline r
Monoclinic
Orthorhombic
C elestite r
Forsterite c
Olivine c
F ayalite c
Monticellite c
Topaz r
Anda lusite r
Zoisite r
Staurolite c
Lawsonite r
Dumortierite r
Gibbsite r
l\1onazite r
Laz uli te rr
Ort hoclase c
Sanidine cc
Adula ri a c
Aegirine-augite c
Spodumene c
J a d eite rr
La mp r obolite cc
Sph en e c
E pidote c
Pyroxene c
Amphibole c
Triclinic
l\1icrocline r
Plagioclase c
~o
:'.-0
C5
V-
Equant grains
Fluorite
Quartz
Periclase
Rutile
Cassiterite
Spinel
Magnetite
Chromite
Anhydrite
Apatite
Leucite
Sodalite
Haiiyne
Melilite
Forsterite
Olivine
Fayalite
Chondrodite
Garnet
Zircon
Topaz
Andalusite
Axinite
Allanite
Cordierite
Sphene
Lawsonite
Glauconite
Analcime
I
'~-i;l~
/ /('I~ ./Acicular
Lathlike
Rutile
Aragonite
Sillimanite
Dumortierite
Tourmaline
Stilbite
Natrolite
Ilmenite
Aragonite
Barite
Celestite
Gypsum
Aegirine
Mullite
Dumortierite
Tourmaline
Epidote
Piedmontite
Prehnite
Pyrophyllite
Kyanite
Columnar
Quartz
Corundum
Orthoclase
Sa nidine
Microcline
Anorthoclase
Plagioclase
Nepheline
Cancrinite
Pyroxene
Spodumene
Wollastonite
Amphibole
Glaucophane
Beryl
Sca polite
Idocrase
Topaz
Kyanite
Zoisite
Clinozoisite
Staurolite
Micas
Chlorites
Barite
_II
Granular
Quartz
Chalcedony
Gibbsite
Calcite
Dolomite
M agnesite
Siderite
Barite
Celestite
Anhydrite
Gypsum
Polyhalite
Alunite
Jarosite
Dahllite
Olivine
Epidote
Kaolinite
Halloysite
Montmorillonite
Analcime
_...L______ _ _ ....l-- _ _
~~
FORM
(Continued)
_ _ __ ' _
"
Fibrous
Acicular
Brucite
Gypsum
Polyhalite
J adeite
Wollastonite
Anthophyllite
Tremoliteactinolite
Cummingto nite
Grune-rite
Nephrite
Riebeckite
Sillimanite
Prehnite
Sepiolite
Antigorite
Chrysotile
M esolite
Pyrophyllite
Aragonite
Dumortierite
Tourmaline
Stilbite
Natrolite
Thomsonite
Scolecite
Radia t ed
Spherulitic
Dahllite
Cllmmingtonite
Schorlite
(Tourm aline)
Prochlorite
Pyrophyllite
Natrolite
Chltlcedo ny
Gibbsite
T llum son iLe
Chalcedony
Cristoba lite
Calcite
Siderite
D ahllite
Orthuclase
Preh ni te
fl t,ilbi Lo
Dllm ol"li (' rit,o
~
"/
:.~>:~:,-
II
<2D.:.
i\ra~o nit, c
10-3.
isometric
159
SYSTEMATIC IDENTIFICATION
Cemented
Gibbsite
Ant igorite
'
::~.
La thlike
Feldspar
Hedenbergite
J adeite
Wollastonite
Tremoliteactinolite
Grunerite
Glaucophane
Beryl
Scapolite
Topaz
Andalusite
Tourmaline
Zoisite
Clinozoisite
Epidote
Piedmontite
Staurolite
Biotite
Thomsonite
Scolecite
Idocrase
Scapolite
Dumortierite
Aragonite
/~
J~
Foliated
Graphite
Hematite
Brucite
Muscovite
Biotite
Stilpnomelane
Phlogopite
Lepidolite
Prochlorite
Clinochlore
Pennine
Chloritoid
Anthophyllite
Iddingsite
Talc
Pyrophyllite
Kaolinite
Montmorillon ite
Dickite
Hydromuscovite
"'~I
,,"
~
I
MINERAL OPTICS
160
TABLE
10-3.
(Concluded )
FORM
TABLE
Structures
r'E:;yl
I~~ I l ltJ))J~1
Shatter cracks I
Shards
(~~(:
F low (with
phenocrysts)
I Tridymite
Montmorillonite
;)\
Low
Lechatelicri te
Glass
V
~
-Low
'(ffD~$ ...
.' I~'
'>;h.' ::'".",'
m
~
Banded
I Glass
:.~
. '
Colloform
..
'
Oolitic
Pisolitic
0;;
Cliachite
Limonite
Bone (a) :
Colloph ane
Cellular (b):
Chalcedony
Opal
Quartz
"0
-0
Cordierite (OIO)D
Gibbsite (OOI)D
Alunite (OOOI)D
Brucite (0001)1'
Polyhalite (100)D
Prehnite (OO I)D
Pyrophyllite (OOI)P
Talc (OOI)P
Muscovite (001)1'
Lepidolite (OOI)P
Cancrinite (IOIO) D
Low
M esolite (110)p(1IO)p
Scolecite (llO)D
Orthoclase (OOI)l'(OIO) D
Sanidine (OO!)P(OIO)D
Anorthoclase (OOI)P(O IO)D
Microcli ne (OOI)l'(OIO) D
Albite (OOI)P(OIO)D
Low
P lagioclase (OOI)l'(OlO) D
0;;
.D
Opal
Calcite
Aragonite
Dolomite
Collopha ne
Glauconite
Chalcedony
Pblogopite (OOI)P
Biotite (OO I)P
Stilpnomclane (OO!)l'
Chondrodite (OOI)l'
Epidote (OOI)P
Piedmontite D
Jarosite (OOOI)D
Monazite (001) (purting)
Prehnite (OOI)D
Glauconite (OOI)P
Sillima nite (IOO)P
Mullite (100)D
Dumortierite (IOO)D
Microfossil
replace ment
Topaz (OOI)P
Zoisite (OIO)P
Clinozoisitc (001)1'
Sta urolite (OIO)D
Chloritoid (OOI)P
Corundum (0001) parting
;)\
-----~ -, ------
K ao linite (OOI)D
Dick ite (OOI)D
Chlorite (001)1'
Montmorillonite (OOI) D
:.a
Limonite
CalCIte
Siderite
Collophane
Chamosite
Palagonite
Double refraction
0.03 or greater
/\
bJ)
Opal
Siderite
Collophane
H alloysite
Double refraction
0.01- 0.03
.D
Organic structures
.D
Lechatelierite
Dahllite
Chalcedony
Opal
Calcite
Aragonite
Barite
Fluorite
Stilbite (OIO)P
Heulandite (OIO)P
Thomsonite (OIO)D
Gyps um (OIO)P
Low to
moderate
~",///, - .~"
. .. . . ...... ,
CLEAVAGE
-S.D
I Glass
10-4.
perfect
D = distinct
Minerals with Cleavage in One Direction
Double refraction
0.01 or less
Index Relief
0;;
Glass
Halloysite
Opal
161
SYSTEMATIC IDENTIFICATION
V
~
--
.D
.:'1
-"
.D
1\
'"
~
"~
E n. tatite (IIO)P
Andalu. it. (1 10) D
Ilic bce kitc (!lO)l'
"8
~
N atrolite (IIO)P
Scapolite (1I0)D
Tremoli te-a ctinolite (1I0)l'
Anthophyllite (110)
Glaucopha n e ( 1I0)l'
W ollas tonite (lOO)P(OOl)D DioP8id e (IIO) }>
H ornblende (110)1'
Grunerito (110) / '
CUlI1m ingto ni to (llO)P
Pigeonito ( 110) / '
I ndeite (IIO)P
Aeg irine (I IO)P
Il ed c nberg it c (110)1'
Llt lll probolito ( 110)/'
Au~it e (110) 1'
ltut il o (IIO)D
E lI 8t. lltito ( I 10) I '
f;p holl u (J)(\I'tI IlU)
" Ylwrkt hollo ( 110) /'
A n~ti liIl U UIIJliitt , ( 110) / '
Hplldlllllfllli l ( 11 0 ) / 1
-'--- - ' - -
- -
MINERAL OPTICS
162
T ABLE
10-4.
CLEAVAGE
T ABLE
(Concluded)
Index Relief
Double refraction
0.01 or less
Double refraction
0.03 or greater
I Low
relief
C a n crinite (101O)D
Scapolite (JOO)P(llO)D
Ext. parallel or sym.
'C elestite (OOl)P(llO)D
.!l
.d
:a'"
';;j
.d
Jl
""
""~'"
Axinite (001)(130)(01O)D
Inclined Ext.
Corund um (1011) (pa rtin g)
Barite (001)(110)P
Ext. parall el or sym .
Lawsonite (OlO)1'(llO)D
I<ya nite (110) (010)P(001)
pariing; Inclined ext.
Diaspore (010)(210)P
Ext. parallel or s ym.
Iddingsite (lOO)(OIO)(OOI)D
Ext. parallel
Extreme
relief
Rutile (100)(1l0) D
Ext. p a r a llel or sym .
Periclase (100)P(isotropic)
Perovskite (100)1'(isotropic)
Calcite
Dolomite
Magnesite
Siderite
Specia l cases
's,
< balsam
> balsam
!:
~
-0's,
0
!l
0
'a
-<
a
~
-i.d
""
Relief low
N epheline (IOIO) D
(hexagonal)
10-5.
----
163
SYSTEMATIC IDENTIFICATION
Index
INDICES O F REFRACTION
n~,
Mineral
Index
7,
f,
a nd w.
Mineral
-
1. 40-1. 46
1.434
1.458-1.462
1.469
1. 47-1. 63
1. 473-1.480
1.473
1. 478-1. 485
1. 48-1. 61
1.480-1.490
1. 483-1.487
1. 484
1 . 485-1 . 493
1.486
1 .487
1.487
1 . 490- 1.506
1 . 492
1 . 493--1 . 546
1 . 494-1 . 500
1. 496-1. 499
1. 496- 1. 500
1. 496-1. 510
1. 500- 1. 508
1. 500- 1. 526
1.50-1.57
1. 501- 1. 505
1.505
1. 505-1. 526
1.506
1.507-1.524
1.508
1.509
l. 509- 1 .527
l.510
1 . 512
1. 512- 1. 530
l. 513
l . 517- 1.520
1 . 517- 1 . 557
1. 5 18
1. 518 1.;;22
1. 5 18 1.!i4:.!
n
n
n
a
n
a
7
n
7
n
a
7
f
n
7
a
a
a
a
a
f
n
7
f
n
l'
a
l'
w
a
7
f
a
a
a
l'
a
7
Ci
C<
l'
I . fil\l
1. 6:.!0
1. 1i:.!:.! I liau
1. 1I:.!'1 1, II1!II
"
"
')'
Opal
Fluorite
Lechatelierite
Tridymite
P a lagonite
Natrolite
Tridymite
Chabazite
Volca nic glass
Chabaz ite
Sodalite
Cristobalitc
Natroli te
Calcite
Analcime
Cristobalite
Sepiolitc
Montmorillonite
Chrysotile
Stilbite
Heulandite
Cancrinite
Haiiyne
Stilbite
Dolomitc
Antigorite (Serpophitc)
Heulandite
Mesolite
Sepiolite
Mesolite
Cancrinite
Leucite
Leucite
M agnesite
Palygorskite
Scolecite
Thomsonite
Montmorillon itc
Sanid inc
Chrysot il c
Orthoc lase
Mil"rol'ii ll l'
'i'illlll' HOIl il l'
N.. "I. ,,il. ,
C:YPHIlIl.
IIllort lI odllH'"
1-\1l,llidi11 11
1. 525- 1. 530
1.525- 1.532
1.526
1.527- 1.543
1.527- 1.541
1.529
1.530
1.530- 1.547
1. 531
1.532- 1.545
1.532-1.552
1.533
1.535- 1.570
1.536- 1.541
1.538- 1.545
1.539
1 . 539- 1.570
1. 540- 1. 571
1.541- 1.552
1.541-1.579
1.544
1.5442
1 .545- 1 .555
1.548
1.549- 1.561
1.550- 1.607
1. 551- 1. 562
1.552
1. 552- 1. 562
1.5533
1.554- 1.567
1. 555- 1. 563
1.555- 1 . 564
l. 556- 1. 570
1 . 560
1.560
J .561
1. 562- 1 .571
1.562- 1.573
1.56 :~ - 1 . 571
I . 5r.'1- 1 . 5!)0
I . ;;G;; l . tiO;;
1. 5(;(;
1. ;;I;(i
I fi lili
I fi tl7
1
I)UR
1 (,H/{
a
7
f
7
7
a
w
a
a
a
7
a
7
a
7
l'
f
n
w
a
a
n
w
a
a
l'
f
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
l'
7
Ci
<
7
w
7
'Y
')
I"
Microcline
Albite
Orthoclase
Nepheline
Anorthoclase
Gypsum
Aragonite
Nepheline
Chalcedony
Oligoclase
Cordierite
Palygorskite
Hydromuscovite
Albite
Talc
Chalcedony
Cordierite
Sca polite
Oligoclase
Biotite
Halite
Quartz
Andesine
Polyhalite
H a lloysite
Scapolite
Phlogopite
Pyrophyllitc
Andesine
Quartz
Gibbsitc
Labradori tc
Antigorite
M uscovitc
Lepidolitc
Dicki te
K a olinit e
Labrador ite
Ant igor ite
Bytow lli te
Urryl
I I yd r"""I R<" .vito
Ill'lll'il,'
I)i('lcit (.
1(llolilliLo
1'1l1 'y il alil,' l
111l1,,)d
MINERAL OPTICS
164
TABLE
10-5.
INDICES OF REFRACTION
Index
ex
1.570
n
1.57- 1.61
n
1.57-1. 62
1.571-1.575 ex
1. 571-1. 582 I'
1. 571-1. 588 ex
w
1.572
1. 574-1. 638 I'
1.575-1.582 ex
1.575-1.590 I'
1.576-1.583 I'
1.576-1.589 I'
1. 576-1. 597 I'
1. 582-1. 588 I'
E
1.585
1. 588-1. 658 ex
1. 590-1. 612 ex
E
1.592
1. 592-1. 643 ex
1. 593-1. 611 I'
1. 596-1. 633 E
1. 598-1. 606 I'
1. 598-1. 652 a
1.599-1.667 I'
1.600
I'
1. 600-1. 628 ex
1. 600-1. 628 ex
1. 603-1. 604 ex
1.605
I'
1.607-1.629 ex
1. 610-1. 644 I'
1. 612- 1. 634 ex
1.613-1.628 E
1.614
I'
1.614-1.675 ex
1.615- 1.629 E
1.615-1.635 ex
1.617-1.638 I'
1. 619-1. 626 E
ex
1.620
1.621-1.655 ex
1.621-1.670 I'
ex
1.622
1.623- 1.635 w
1. 623- 1. 676 I'
1 625- 1 . 655 I'
1 . 625- 1 . 655 I'
1. 626- 1 . 629 E
Mineral
Anhydrite
Cliachite
Collophane
Anorthite
Bytownite
Clinochlore
Alunite
Biotite
P ennine
Talc
Pennine
Gibbsite
Clinochlore
Anorthite
Brucite
Prochlorite
Glauconite
Alunite
Chondrodite
Muscovite
Siderite
Phlogopite
Anthophyllite
Prochlorite
Pyrophyllite
Nephrite
Tremolite-a ctinolite
Lazulite
Lepidolite
Topaz
Glauconite
Stilpnomela ne
Dravite (Tou rm aline)
Anhydrite
Hornblende
Elbaite (Tourmaline)
Prehnite
Topaz
Dahllite
Woll astonite
Glaucophane
Chondrodite
Celestite
D ahllite
Anthoph yllite
Nephri te
Tremol iLe-aeLinol iLe
MeliliLe
(Continued)
Index
1. 628- 1. 658 E
1.629- 1.640 ex
1 630- 1. 651 E
1. 631
I'
1. 632- 1. 634 w
1. 632- 1. 655 w
1 . 633- 1.655 w
1.633- 1 .701 I'
1.634
I'
n
1 635
1. 635- 1. 640 ex
1. 635- 1. 655 w
ex
1 .636
1. 639- 1. 642 I'
1. 639-1. 647 I'
1. 639- 1. 657 ex
1. 639- 1. 668 I'
1 64- 1. 77
ex
1. 641-1. 651 ex
ex
1.642
1. 645- 1. 665 I'
1.648
I'
1 650- 1. 665 ex
1 650- 1.698 ex
1.651- 1.668 ex
1.651- 1681 ex
1.652-1.698 w
1.654
I'
1. 655- 1. 666 ex
1 655- 1. 669 I'
1.657- 1.661 ex
1 657- 1 663 ex
w
1.658
1. 658- 1. 674 I'
1.659- 1678 ex
1 66- 1. 80
I'
1. 664- 1. 686 I'
ex
1 665
1. 667-1. 688 I'
1. 670- 1. 680 I'
1 670- 1.692 ex
1.673- 1.715 ex
1. 674- 1. 730 ex
1 677- 1.681 I'
1. 677- 1 . 68L~ I'
1. 678- 1. 681 ex
1. 680 - 1. 7 1(; w
1. 08U 1. 7 18 lX
Mineral
Schorlite (Tourmaline)
Andalusite
Apa tite
Celestite
Melilite
Dravite (Tourmaline)
Apa t ite
Hornblende
Wollastonite
Chamosite
Forsterite
E lbaite (Tourmaline)
Barite
Lazulite
Andalusite
Cummingtonite
Glaucophane
Alla nite
Monticellite
Mullite
Prehnite
Barite
Enstatite
Diopside
Spodumene
Olivine
Schorlite (Tourmaline3
Mullite
J adeite
Monticellite
Sillim anit e
Grunerite
Calcite
Enstatite
Dumortierite
Allanite
Cummingtonite
Lawsonite
J adeite
Forsterite
La mprobolitf'
Hypersthene
Iddingsite
Spod um ene
Si llim a nite
Axinil c
Dolomit e
l'i~eo "iLo
165
SYSTEMATIC IDENTIFICATION
TABLE
-----
INDICES OF REFRACTION
i\Iinera l
Index
1. 680- 1. 745
1. 681- 1. 727
1.683- 1.731
1.684
: .686
1. 686- 1. 692
1 . 688- 1.696
1. 688- 1. 712
1. 689- 1. 718
1.693
1.693-1.760
1696- 1. 700
1.697
1. 699- 1. 717
1 .700- 1.726
1. 700- 1. 745
1.701- 1.726
1.702
1. 702- 1. 718
1.705-1.732
1 .709-1.782
1. 710-1. 723
1. 712
1. 713-1. 737
1.715
1.715-1.724
1.718- 1.768
1. 719-1. 734
1. 719- 1. 744
1. 72- 1. 78
1.720- 1.734
1.728
1 .731- 1.737
1.732- 1 .739
1 .734- 1.779
1. 736- 1. 747
10-5.
ex
I'
I'
I'
I'
I'
I'
ex
I'
ex
I'
Cl
I'
I'
w
I'
E
Cl
I'
w
I'
Cl
Cl
I'
E
Cl
I'
I'
I'
n
Cl
I'
I'
Cl
l'
Cl
Index
(Concluded)
Mineral
- ----
MINERAL OPTICS
166
TABLE
10-6.
TABLE
ISOTROPIC MINERALS
R elief
Moderate
relief
Mineral
Low
relief
Moderate
to strong
relief
Very
high
relief
1.40 - 1.46
1 .434
1 .458- 1.462
1. 483- 1. 487
1 .487
1.496- 1.510
Opal
Fluorite
Lechatelierite
Sodalite
Analcime
H a iiyne
B alsam
Index
1 .537
Halite
H alloysite
Antigorite (Serpophite)
Cliachite
Collophane
1.544
1 .549- 1.561
1.50 - 1.57
1.57 - 1.61
1 .57 - 1.62
P erielase
Grossularite
Pyrope
Almandite Garnet grou p
Spessart ite
Uvarovite
1
Andradite
1 .738- 1.760
1 736- 1. 763
1. 741- 1.760
1. 778- 1. 815
1 .792- 1.820
1.838- 1870
1.857- 1.887
Limonite
Spinel
Chromite
Perovskite
Sphalerite
2 .00
1.72
2.07
2.34
2 .37
1.48 - 1. 61
1.47 - 1.63
- 2 . 10
- 1.78
- 2 . 16
- 2.38
- 2.47
167
SYSTEMATIC IDENTIFICATION
Birefringence
10-7.
BIREFRINGENCE
Mineral
Birefringen ce
Analcim e (possibly)
P erovskit e
Antigori te (Serpophite)
Haiiyne (occas.)
Leucite
Mesolite
H alloysite
P ennine
Prochlorite
Chabaz ite
Cristob alite
Apatite
N epheline
Tridymite
Riebeckite
Idocrase
Beryl
D ahllite
Clinochlore
Collophane
K aolinite
Melilite
Anortho clase
Clinozoisite
Dickite
Stilbite
Thomsonite
Zoisite
Sanidine
H euland ite
And esine
Scolecite
Micro cline
Chamosite
Labradorite
Antigorite
Oligoclase
And alusite
Cordierite
Ca ncrillite
Chalcedony
Ort ho clase
Corundum
Enstati te
Bytownite
Celes tite
Gypsum
0 .009
0 .009- 0.010
0009- 0.011
0 .010- 0 .012
0010- 0.015
0 .010- 0 .016
0.01- 0.03
0 .010- 0.036
0 .011- 0 .013
0 .011- 0 .014
0.011- 0.020
0012
0 .012
0.012- 0013
0.012- 0 .023
0 .013- 0.016
0 .013- 0 .018
0 .013- 0.027
0.014
0 .014- 0.018
0014- 0 .045
0.015- 0.020
0.015- 0.023
0.016
0 .016- 0.025
0 .018- 0 .019
0.019
0.019
0.019
0.019- 0.025
0.019- 0 .026
0.020
0 .020- 0.023
0 .020- 0.032
0.020- 0.033
0.021
0 .021- 0 .025
0 .021- 0.033
0 .022
0 .022- 0 .027
0 .022- 0 .027
0 .022- 0 .040
0.023
0 .025- 0 .02U
0 .026- 0 .072
0 .027- 0 .035
0 .029- 0 .0:n
Mineral
.
0 .00 - 0.002
0 .00 - 0.002
0.00 - 0.003
0.00 - 0.004
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001- 0 .004
0.001- 0 .011
0.002- 0.010
0 .003
0 .003- 0.004
0.003- 0 .004
0.004
0.004
0 .004- 0.006
0 .004--:0 .008
0.004- 0.009
0.004- 0.011
0 .005
0.005
0.005- 0 .006
0.005- 0.007
0.005- 0 .011
0 .006
0.006- 0.008
0.006- 0 .012
0 .006- 0.018
0 . 007
0.007
0.007
0.007
0 .007
0 .007- 0.008
0.007- 0 .008
0.007- 0.009
0 .007- 0 .009
0 .007- 0 . 011
0 .007- 0.011
0 .007- 0 .028
0 .008
0 .008
0 .008- 0 .000
0 .008- 0 .009
0 .008- 0 .011
0 .009
0 .009
Quartz
Topa z
Albite
Axinite
Sta urolite
Hypersthene
Alla nite
Sca polite
Anorthite
Chrysotile
Dumortierite
B arite
Mullite
Natrolite
J adeite
Chloritoid
Glaucophane
Spodum ene
Wollastonite
Monticellite
Epidote
Sepiolite
E lbaite (Tourmaline)
Kyanite
Anthophyllite
H edenb ergite
Brucite
L awsonite
Polyhalite
Dravite (Tourm aline)
Hornblende
Alunite
Sillim a nite
Glauconite
Prehnite
Montmorillonite
Augite
Pigeonite
Gibbsite
N ephrite
Tremoli Le-act. inol it,e
Schorlitc (Tollrm aline)
P iL ly gor~ kit,c
OumIII in gt.ollit,(
Lft mprobolitn
Choudrodito
Diopaido
_.
168
MINERAL OP TICS
TABLE
10-7.
BIRE FHINGENCE
(Concluded)
Birefrin gence
0 .029- 0 .037
0 .030- 0.035
0 .030- 0 .050
0 .030-0 . 119
0.033- 0.059
0.035- 0 .040
0 .036- 0 .038
0 .037- 0.041
0 .037- 0 .041
0 .037- 0 .059
0.038- 0 .044
0.042- 0 .05 1
0.042- 0 .054
0 .044
0 .044- 0 .047
Mineral
Aegirine-augite
H ydrom usco vite
T alc
Stil pnomelane
Biotite
F orsterite
L azulite
Olivine
M uscovite
Aegirine
I ddingsite
F ayalite
Grunerite
Anhyd rite
Phlogopite
Birefringence
0 .045
0 .048
0 .048
0 .049- 0.051
0 .060- 0 .062
0 .061- 0.082
0 .092- 0 . 141
0.097
0 . 105
0 .156
0 .172
0 . 180-0 .190
0 . 191- 0. 199
0 .234- 0 .242
0 .286- 0 .287
M ineral
."!E
'"
"'0
:
FOR
.COMMON MINERALS
:='u
0_
"' c
::;:<1
Lepidolite
Diaspo re
Pyrophyllite
Monazite
Zircon
P iedmontite
Sphene
Cassiterite
J arosit e
Aragon ite
Calcite
D olomite
Mag nesite
Siderite
Rutile
(/)
-l
'"
<I
0:
Z
::;;:
Cl.
.~
2!
"U;(l,)
'"
>.;:
.~
~
Ou
:==>
0",
I-l
8>
~
::;:
MINERALS
Iddingsite
Anhydrite
{ PhloQopite
Lepidolite
Monozite
Pyrophyllite Diaspore
Aegirine
Talc
0.05
(/)
0:
W
f-
w
::;;:
-l
-l
Piedmontite
{ Zircon
::;;:
Z
Gibbsite
Basaltic hornblende
Z
0
i=
~ 0.0 3
(f)
z
:r:
f-
Cassiterite
Jarosite
Sphene (Titanite)
ll..
0
(/) .
~ 0.0 2
Aroganite
u
:r:
""
Calcite
f-
Dolomite
Magnesite
0.01
Siderite
Rutile
a
Hill
2. 100
?,?OO
~
iD
::0
;;:
a
~.
.0
...- ...."
-,
(f)
...a:
co
0
~
g;
CD
0
0
-,
~.
::s
~
o
1>
...
~
a
C'D
;:
:J_.c;;eD ,
~g;.
(J)c...(")
"000
THICKNESS OF THIN
0J
...a."
cr
"
ii)
~. =+'
0 ...
wc>
go:
e.g-
...
:!
03
"0
, 'co'
00.
NlJ
---.
.l'>
SECTION I N MILLIMETER S
...-,
"0
..
~~~~.~.~.
:J ~.o~ 5'
~:g 2~a.1O
(') '9.0
---.
<1
l>-u;;:rlJl>Ci:
_ct)'<o('t) ::t":::lQ.
U1
;;:
(I)
::t!
(TO
0
(J)
Boehmite
Mullite
Muscovite
Olivine
Biatite
Epidote
Chondrod ite
Stilpnomelane
Prehnite
Aeg irine-augite
Diapside
Tremolite
Hornblende
Palygorskite
{ Allanite
Augite
Montmorillonite
{ Lawsonite
Bruci te
Alunite
Hedenbergite
Wollastonite
Sepiolite
Kyanite
{ Antigorite
Chloritoid
c adeite
Barite
Stauro lite
Chrysotile
Collophane
C>
ITI
;;: 0
(I)
::t!
fTI
_::t!
:0
-I
l>
:::c
(")
0
:0
C>
:z
ITI
0
z....,
ITI
:0
"
:0
;;:
;;:
C')
ITI
Z
-I
Glouconite
Scapalite
Anthophyllite
Sillimanite
Po ly hol ite
Glaucophane
Zoisite
Anorthite
Natrolite
Thomsonite
Scolecite
Dahllite
Clinozoisite
Oligoclase
Laomdorite
Chlorite
Cordierite
Topaz
Enstat ite
Albite
Andalusite
Beryl
Melilite
Tridymite .
Idocrase (Vesuvianitel
Chabazite
Sonidine
{ Dick ite
Anorthoclase
Stilbi te
{ Andesine
Orthoclase
Heulandite
{ Microclin e
Chalcedony
Corundum
{ Quartz
Gypsu m
Celestite
{ Bytownite
Hypersthene Axinite
{Riebeckite
Nepheline
Apatite
Kaolinite
Cristobalite
MINERALS
{H OIl OYSite
Mesolite
Leucite
Perovskite
Ana lcime
169
SYSTEMATIC IDENTIFICATION
TABLE
10-8.
U N I AX I AL ~ [ INEHALS
I
Mineral
Calcite
Cancrinite
Dolomite
Magnesite
Nepheline
Scapolite
Beryl
Siderite
Stilpnomelane
Dravite (Tourmaline)
E lbaite (Tourm aline)
D ahllite
Melilite
Schorlite (Tourmaline)
Apatite
Idocrase
J arosite
Corundum
H ematite
Mineral
Quartz
Brucite
Alunite
Zircon
Cassiterite
Rutile
n,
nw
Sign
Birefringence
1.486
1 .496- 1 .500
1 .500- 1.526
1 .509- 1.527
1. 527- 1. 543
1.540- 1.571
1 . 564- 1 . 590
1 . 596- 1 .633
1 612- 1.634
1. 613- 1. 628
1.615- 1.629
1 .619- 1.626
1 . 626- 1.629
1. 628- 1. 658
1.630- 1.651
1. 701- 1. 726
1. 715
1.759- 1.763
2.94
1 658
1. 507- 1. 524
1. 680- 1. 716
1.700- 1 .726
1..530- 1547
1.550- 1.607
1.568- 1 .598
1. 830- 1. 875
1. 700- 1. 745
1. 632- 1. 655
1. 635- 1. 655
1. 623- 1. 635
1. 632- 1. 634
1. 652- 1. 698
1. 633- 1. 655
1. 705- 1 .732
1.820
1. 767- 1. 772
3.22
0.172
0 .007- 0.028
0 .180- 0.190
0 . 191- 0.199
0 .003- 0 .004
0 .010- 0 .036
0 .004- 0 .008
0 .234- 0 .242
0 .030- 0 . 119
0 .019- 0 .025
0.015- 0 .023
0 .004- 0 .009
0 .005- 0 .006
0.022- 0 .040
0 .003- 0.004
0 .004- 0.006
0 . 105
0 .008- 0 .009
nw
1.5442
1 .566
1.572
1.925- 1.931
1.996
2.603- 2.616
n,
1.5533
1.585
1.592
1. 985- 1. 993
2.093
2 . 889- 2.903
Sign
Birefringence
+
+
+
+
+
+
0 .009
0 .019
0.020
0.060- 0.062
0.097
0.286- 0.287
--
MINERAL OPTICS
170
TABLE
Mineral
10-9.
TABLE
na
Tridymite. . .. .. .. . . 1.469
1 . 473- 1 . 480
Natrolite ..
1. 478- 1. 485
Chabazite ..
1 .493- 1.546
Chrysotile .
1 .496- 1 . 499
Heula ndite .
1 . 505
Mesolite ..
1512- 1. 530
Thomsonite . .
1.520
Gypsum . .
Albite ...
. ..... . . . 1. 525- 1. 532
1 . 532- 1 .545
Oligoclase ...
Cordierite . . . . .. . .. . 1.532- 1.552
1. 545- 1. 555
Andesine . . . .
1.554- 1.567
Gibbsite .. . . .
1. 555- 1. 563
Labradorite.
1 . 560
Dickite ...
Anhydrite ....... . . . . 1 . 570
1. 571- 1. 588
Clinochlore .
1. 575- 1. 582
Pennine . . .. . .
1. 588- 1 . 658
Prochlorite .. ... .
1. 592- 1 . 643
Chondrodite ..
1.598- 1 . 652
Anthophyllite.
1 . 607- 1 . 629
Topaz ..
1. 615- 1. 635
Prehnite.
1.622
Celestite.
1.635- 1 . 640
Forst erite
1 . 636
Barite ... . . .
1. 639- 1. 657
Cummingtonite ..
1 . 642
Mullite ..
1. 650- 1. 665
Enstatite . . . .
1. 650- 1. 698
Diopside . . .
1. 651- 1. 668
Spodumene .
1. 651- 1. 681
Olivine . . .
1 . 655- 1 . 666
Jadeite . . . '
1.657- 1.661
Sillimanite ..
1 . 665
Lawsonite . ..
1.674- 1.730
Iddingsite .
1. 680- 1. 745
Aegirine-augite ..
1 . 680- 1 . 718
Pigeonite.
1. 688- 1. 712
Augite .. . .
1. 696- 1. 700
Zoisite . . . .
1 .702
Diaspore .
1.710- 1.723
Clinozoisite .
1 .715- 1 .724
Chloritoid . .
1.732- 1.739
Hedenbergite ..
1. 736- 1. 747
Staurolite .
Piedmontite . . . . . .. . . . 1. 745- 1. 758
1. 786- 1. 800
Monazite ..
Sphene . . .. ..... .. . . . 1.887- 1.913
n~
n{3
1 . 469
1. 476- 1. 482
1 . 504- 1 . 550
1. 497- 1. 501
1 . 505
1.513- 1.532
1 . 522
1. 529- 1. 536
1. 536- 1. 548
1. 536- 1. 562
1. 548- 1. 558
1 . 554-1 . 567
1. 558- 1. 567
1.562
1 . 576
1. 571- 1. 588
1. 576- 1. 582
1 . 589- 1 . 667
1. 602- 1. 655
1. 615- 1. 662
1. 610- 1. 631
1. 624-1. 642
1 . 624
1. 651- 1. 660
1 . 637
1. 645- 1. 669
1 . 644
1. 653- 1. 670
1.657- 1706
1. 665- 1. 675
1.670- 1.706
1 . 659- 1 . 674
1 . 658- 1 . 670
1674
1715- 1. 763
1.687- 1770
1.698- 1 .725
1. 701- 1. 717
1.696-1703
1.722
1.715- 1.729
1. 719- 1. 726
1737- 1. 745
1. 741- 1. 754
1764- 1. 789
1.788- 1.801
1.894- 1 . 921
Biref ringence
1 .473
0 . 004
1 . 485- 1 . 493 0 .012- 0.013
1. 480- 1. 490 0 .002- 0 .010
1 . 517- 1 . 557 0.011- 0 .014
1.501- 1.505 0 . 007
1 . 506
0 .001
1 . 518- 1 . 542 0 .006- 0 . 012
1 . 529
0.009
1. 536- 1. 541 0 .009- 0.011
1 . 541- 1 . 552 0 .007- 0.009
1.539- 1 . 570 0.007- 0.011
1. 552- 1. 562 0 . 007
1. 576- 1. 589 0 .022
1 . 562- 1 . 571 0.007- 0 . 008
1 . 566
0 .006
1.614
0 .044
1.576- 1.597 0 . 004- 0 .011
1 . 576- 1.583 0.001-0 . 004
1.599- 1. 667 0 .001-0 .011
1 . 621- 1 . 670 0 .027- 0 .035
1.623-1.676 0 .016-0 .025
1 . 617- 1 .6380 . 009- 0 .010
1 . 645- 1 665 0 . 020- 0 . 033
1 . 631
0.009
1.670- 1.680 0.035-0 .040
1.648
0 .012
1 . 664-1 . 686 0 .025- 0.029
1.654
0.012
1 . 658- 1 . 674 0.008- 0.009
1 . 681- 1 .727 0 .029- 0 .031
1.677- 1.681 0.013- 0 .027
1.689- 1.718 0.037- 0.041
1. 667- 1. 688 0 .012- 0.023
1.677- 1.684 0 .020- 0 . 023
1 .684
0.019
1.718- 1768 0 .038- 0.044
1 .709- 1 .782 0 .029- 0 .037
1 .719- 1.744 0 .021- 0 .033
1 . 713-1.737 0.021- 0.025
1 .702- 1.718 0 . 006- 0 .018
1 .750
0.048
1719- 1734 0 .005- 0 .011
1.731- 1 .737 0.013- 0 .016
1 .751- 1 .757 0 .018- 0 .019
1.746- 1 . 762 0 .010- 0 .015
1.806- 1.832 0 .061- 0082
1 .837- 1 .849 0 .049- 0 .051
1 .979- 2 .05 4 I 0 . 0~2 -0.1 4 1
______________~---------~--------~I-
171
SYSTEMATIC IDENTIFICATION
Mineral
Sepiolite.
Montmorillonite.
Stilbite .
Scolecite.
Sanidine .. .
Ort hoclase.
Microcline.
Anorthoclase .
Aragonite.
Oligoclase ..
Cordieri te.
Hydromuscovi te.
T alc . .
. . .. . . . .
Biot ite.
Andesine. . ...... . .
Poly halite.
Phlogopite .. .. .... . . .
Pyrophyllite.
Ant igorite.
Muscovite .. .. . . . . . . .
Lepidolite ..
K aolinite ...
Bytownite .
Anorthite .
Pennin e .
Glauconite.
Tremolite-actinolite.
Nephrite.
La zulite . ..
Hornblende.
Wollastonite.
Cha mosite ..... . .... .
Gla ucophane.
And alusite ...... .... .
Alla nite.
Monticellite.
Olivine.
. ..... . . .
Grunerite.
Dumort ierite.
La m probc!ite.
H y persthene.
Idclingsite ..
Axinite ..
Riebecki te .
K yanite.
Epido te .
A<'I-( irill c .
F aYlI.lit (' ..
10-10.
na
1 .490- 1 506
1 .492
1. 494- 1 500
1512
1.517- 1.520
1. 518
1 .518- 1 522
1. 522- 1536
1 .530
1 . 532- 1. 545
1 . 532- 1 .552
1.535- 1570
1. 538- 1. 545
1.541- 1.579
1 . 545- 1 . 555
1 . 548
1. 551- 1. 562
1.552
1.555- 1.564
1.556- 1.570
1.560
1. 561
1.563-1 . 571
1.571- 1.575
1. 575- 1. 582
1 .590- 1 . 612
1. 600- 1. 628
1 .600- 1 . 628
1603- 1. 604
1 . 61 4- 1 . 675
1 . 620
1 621- 1 655
1 629- 1 640
1 640- 1 770
1 641- 1 . 651
1 651- 1. 681
1 657- 1663
1 659- 1.678
1 670- 1.692
1.673- 1.715
1. 674-1730
1.678-1.684
1 . 6g3
1. 712
J . 720- 1 . 7:{/t
1.71\5- ] .77
I . XO.') I . X:\.')
n~
Birefringen ce
1 . 505- 1 526
1 .513
1. 500- 1. 508
1. 519
1. 524-1. 526
1 . 526
1 . 525- 1.530
1.527- 1.541
1.686
1.541- 1.552
1. 539- 1. 570
1565- 1. 605
1.575-1.590
1. 574-1. 638
1 . 552- 1.562
1.567
1. 598- 1. 606
1 . 600
1. 562- l. 573
1 . 593-1 . 611
1 . 605
1 . 566
1.571- 1 . 582
1. 582- l. 588
1.576- 1.583
1. 610- 1. 644
1 . 625- 1 . 655
1. 625- 1. 655
1. 639- 1. 642
1.633- 1.701
1 . 634
0 .015- 0.020
0 .021
0 . 006- 0.00&
0.007
0.007
0 .008
0 .007
0 .005- 0 .007
0.156
0 .007- 0 .001)
0 . 007- 0 .011
o . 030- 0 . O ~~.')
0.030- 0 . 050
0 .033- 0 .051)
0.007
0 . 019
0 . 044- 0 .047
0.048
0 . 007- 0 .00\)
0037- 00,11
0 .045
0 . 005
0008- 0011
0 .011- 0 .01 :\
0 .001 0 .001\
o.020- 0. O : \ ~
0 .022- 0 .027
0 . 022- 0 .02
o.O:'\G- O. 0:\8
n {3
1. 513
1 498- 1 . 504
1. 519
1 . 523- 1 525
1 . 524
1 . 522- 1 . 526
1526- 1.539
1 . 682
1. 536- 1. 548
1. 536- 1. 562
1 575- 1590
1 574- 1. 638
1.548- 1.558
1 . 562
1. 598- 1. 606
1 . 588
1 . 562-1 . 573
1.587- 1.607
1 .598
1.565
1 . 567- 1 577
1. 577- 1.')83
1. 576- 1. 582
1. 609- 1. 643
1 . 613- 1 . 644
1. 613- 1. 644
1. 632- 1. 633
1. 618- 1. 691
1 . 632
1 . 635
1. 638-1. 664
1. 633- 1. 644
1 . 650- 1 . 770
1 . 646- 1 . 662
1. 670- 1. 706
1 . 684- 1.6g7
1. 684- 1. 6g 1
1. 683- 1. 730
1 . 678- 1 . 728
1. 715- 1. 763
1. 685- 1. 6g2
1 695
.720
. 721 I . 7 li:\
1. 770 1.82:\
I . X:IX I . X
1. 639- 1. 668
1.639- 1.647
1.660- 1 800
1 . 655- 1 . 66g
1. 689- l. 718
1. 699- 1717
1. 686- 1. 692
1 . 6g3- 1 .760
1. 683- 1. 7:31
1 . 71 8- 1 . 768
1 . 688- 1 . 6gG
l . liD
1. 728
l . n 1 1.77 \)
I . 7i12 I . iI:1ti
I . R'17 I . RX(i
O.Ol\)- O.O:,W
0 . 01 4
0.007- 0 . 00il
0.013- 0 . 01 8
0 .007- 0 . 0 11
0 . 010- 0 .0:30
0 .014- 0 .01 8
0 .0:17- 0 . 011
O.02G- 0 . O
0 . 010 0 . 01( \
o.0:38
() . 0 /1/1
0 . 010
0 .00'1
0 .01(;
O . OI ~
n . UI /I O. Otll)
O. fl:I 7 0 Ofill
() . ()I ~
"---
OOfi l
'"
.....
to
~
~
~
MI NERAL
Opal
Fluori te
Lecha telierite
Pa laganite
Volcanic Glass
Sodoli te
Anolcime
Houy ne
Ser pophi te
Le uc ite
Ha lit e
Holloysite
Cliochite
Co llopha ne
Spi nel
Peri close
Grossulori te
Pyrope
lD
rt;
0
..::
""
~
co
...r:
'"
I,()
lD
'"
lD
"W
<0
~
t.D
r--:
'~
"
<:;;t
0)
co
'"
(j)
lD
(j)
""
o
N
co
0
'"
lD
N N
co
'"
"
'". '"N N'" '"N '"N N""
lD
<t
<t
co
'"
lD
'"
<t
~
Almand ite
Andradite
Limonite
Ch romit e
Perovsk ite
Sp hale rite
CHART
g,
MINERA L
en
a:>OruVIOCO
ON
~~U""?~~~~t!:!
co
~
1.0
0)
co
Concrinite
Colcite
Oolom ite
"'oqnesite
I';ephel ine
Sc-cpolite
Q_artl
3uy l
Bruci te
t. !u nite
:S
+
+
+
Sider it e
Stil pnom elone
Drav it e (Tou rma line)
Elbo ite (Tou rmal ine)
Dohll it e
Melili te
Schorl ite (Tourmaline)
Apat ite
idocros e
Ja rosite
Corundu m
Zircon
+
Cossiterite
+
Rutil e
+
Hematite
CHART
OJ
o
o
N
0
000
c.o co 0
N N N N N
r..-i
rri
MINERAL OPTICS
174
g.
MINERAL
Tridymite
, Natralite
Chabazite
Cristobalite
Sepiolite
Montmorillonite
Chrysotile
Stilbite
Heulandite
Mesolite
Scolecite
Thomsonite
Sanidine
Orthaclase
Micro cline
Gypsum
Anorthoclase
Albite
Aragonite
Cholcedony
Oligoclase
Cordierite
Hydromuscovite
Talc
Biotite
Andesine
Polyholite
Phlogopite
Pyrophyllite
Gibbsite
Labrodorite
Ant igorite
Vi
...'"
...
a
'" '" '" '" '"'"
N
...w
'"
'"w
a~
N
~
I
~
ft
Muscovite
Lepidolite
Dickite
1+
Bytownite
Anhydrite
Anorthite
Clinochlore
1+
Kaolinite
Pennine
Prochlorite
Glauconite
Chondrodite
Anthophyllite
Tremolite-actinolite
Nephrite
Lazulite
1+
Topoz
Chamosite
CHAnT C ,
MINERAL
Hornblende
Prehnite
Wollastonite
e
en
Vi
N
~
V
~
W
~
00
~
0
~
N
~
W
~
00
~
0
~
N
~
V
~
W
~
00
~
w
a
lt~~~~;;,, lilllBllllllllllllllllllllll1
Mulli te
Ensta t ite
Diopside
Spodumene
Oliv ine
Jadeite
Sillimanite
Dumartierite
Grunerlte
Lawson ite
Lamprobolite
Hypersthene
Iddingsite
Axinite
Aeoirini
1+
175
SYSTEMATIC IDENTIFICATION
Pigeonite
Augite
Riebecki te
Zoislte
Diaspore
Clinozoisite
Kyan ite
Chloritoid
Epidote
Allanite
Hedenberg ite
Staurolite
Piedmontite
Aegirine
Monazite
Fayalite
Sphene
C HART
'+
'+
'+
+
+
1+
+
'+
'+
+
1+
+
+
l
D. Range of Refractive Indices- Anisotropic Biaxial Minerals.
176
MINERAL OPTICS
MINERAL
Phlagapi te
Son idine
Biotite
Talc
Montmorilloni te
Glauconite
Aragonite
Ant igari te
SYSTEMATIC IDENTIFICATION
MINERAL
Proch lo rite
Ch obozite
Gibbsite
Pigeon ite
Heu landite
Chry sotile
Clin ochlore
Monozite
Mullite
Sillimanite
Sphene
Zoisite
Tridymite
Borite
Chlor i to id
Anhydrite
Thom sonite
Topaz
Celestite
Dick ite
Spodumene
Piedmontite
Gypsum
Dum ortierite
Muscovite
Stilbite
Sca leci te
Wollastonite
Lepidolite
Sepioli t e
Glaucophone
An orthoclase
Foyol ite
Hornblende
Py rophyll ite
Aegirine
Hyper sthene
Lomprob ol ite
Lazulite
Epidote
Orthoclo se
Polyhalite
Axini te
Monticellite
Anorthite
~:1.';g:,O;"
Bytown ite
C HART
jj~~;:~;: 1/
Microcli ne
Jodelte
Anth op yllite
Ch ondrodite
Lobrodorite
Albite
Mesolite
Stourolite
Lawson ite
Diospore
Fors t eri te
Prehnite
Tremoliteoctinoli t ,
Nephr ite
Grun erite
Kyanite
Ando lusite
Hydromu scovite
Chomosi le
Allanite
Riebeckite
Kaolinite
117
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
Sma ll
Sma ll
Lorge
Lor e
Variable
C HART
II/II W
I til
) ; 1
I I I I I I I I Vonab le
CUAlrr
f-'
f-'
~
p..
i%)
.~
.....
.,.,a
G
i'"
i%)
~
Q
......,
~
.,..
~
.....~
.....
Approximately 1700 mineral species are recognized. Rock-forming constituents ordinarily found in thin sections constitute a comparatively
small proportion of the total. In the following pages descriptions of individual minerals, min eraloids, and mineral groups are given. The species
listed include practically all the important transparent minerals found
in igneous, sedimentary, and metamorphic rocks, together with the common vein minerals. Minerals other than those listed occasionally are encountered; th en the larger reference books should b e consulted.
For convenience, the microscopic and optical characteristics of the
minerals are given under a uniform sequence of headings. Color refers
to the color of the mineral in thin section. T.he term neutral is used for
very p ale colors of indeterminate hue. Pleochroism and absorption are
included along with color, for ordinarily the polarizer is in place during
the entire examination of the slide. Relief refers to ordinary thin sections
mounted in Canada b alsam or to fragments in immersion media of corresponding index. The interference colors listed are usually the maximum
colors for thin sections of about O.03-mm. thickness. If sections are thicker
or thinner than this value, allowance must b e made. The thickness may
be determined fairly accurately if a known mineral such as quartz or
plagioclase is present in the slide. Extinction angles measured clockwise
are considered positive; and counterclockwise, negative. Orientation refers esp ecially to the position of the faster and slower rays in characteristic sections. The complete optical orientation is given in the tabulation
just b elow the name of the mineral. The size of the axial angle for biaxial
crystals is indicated in a general way in the text. Exact values of this angle
are given in the tabulation just mentioned. Approximate measurements
of the axial angle can b e made in favorable cases by the use of a micrometer ocular that h as b een calibrated by means of several biaxial crystals
of known axial angles. The universal stage is useful for accurate determin ations. Un der thc heading Distinguishing Features resemblances
to, a nel clirl"erences fro m, simil ar min erals are pOinted out as an aid in the
determination . Rel(ft ed iVfill era/s arc th e min erals simil ar in appearance
and prope rl it's 10 lh e one IInd e-r c1iscnss ion.
Or i('nl il lioll diagrums for 11 ('111'1 ), :t Il th e hia xial min erals are given, and
1111
182
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
for most of the monoclinic minerals plans combined with side views
are inserted in order to facilitate an understanding of their optical
properties. Photomicrographs of thin sections are included to aid in
identification.
MINERAL GROUPS
This text is devoted primarily to the examination of transparent minerals and p articularly common minerals encountered in thin sections.
Thus practical considerations cause a number of deviations from accepted
classified mineral lists. The mineral groups listed for the chapters of Part
2 conform essentially to normal usage. However, examination of chapter
headings in Part 2 r eveals a pronounced inequality in mineral distribution among the groups named.
The non-silicate minerals from elements to phosphates are covered
in two chapters, while five chapters are r equired for the silicates. This
reflects the importance of the silicates among rock-forming minerals.
The classification of the silicates is primarily shuctural. However, all
structures are not known with equal assurance. Also, a number of silicates apparently are amorphous when examined with the microscope,
although they may exhibit evidence of crystallinity in X-ray diffraction
patterns. These species are termed mineraloids. In the classification they
are placed close to chemically related minerals.
The silicates may be divided into six groups which depend upon the
structural arrangement of Si0 1 tetrahedra. A single Si0 4 group consists
of four larger oxygen atoms each at the corner of the tetrahedron with
one smaller silicon atom at the center. The structural groups arranged to
emphaSize natural OCcurrence provide the skeleton of a useful silicate
classification.
183
Silicate Groups
1. Framework complexes- tectosilicates
184
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
Johannsen , A.: "Essentials for the Microscopical Determination ot Rockforming Minerals and Rocks in Thin Sections ," 2d ed ., University of
Chicago Press, Chicago, 1928.
Kennedy, G. C.: Charts for Correlation of Optical Properties with Chemical
Composition of Some Common Rock-forming Minerals, Am. Mineralogist,
vol. 32, pp. 561-573, 1947.
Larsen, E. S. , and H . Berman: The Microscopic D etermination of the Nonopaque Minerals, U.S. C eol. Survey Bull. 848, Washington , D .C. , 1934.
Mason, Brian: "Principles of Geochemistry," John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New
York, 1951.
Milner, H. B.: "Sedimentary Petrography," 3d ed. , Thomas Murby & Co.,
London, 1940.
Rosenbusch , H .: "Mikroskopische Physiographie del' petrographisch wichtigen
Mineralien," rev. by O. Mligge, 5th ed., vol. 1, part 2, Schweizerbart
Verlag, Stuttgart, 1927.
TickeII, F. G .: "The Examination of Fragmental Rocks," 2d ed. , Stanford University Press, Stanford, Calif., 1940.
W ahlstrom, E. E.: "Petrographic Mineralogy," John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New
York, 1955.
W einschenk, E.: "Petrographic Methods ," trans . by R. W. Clark, McGraw-Hill
Book Company, Inc. , New York, 1912.
Williams, H. , F. J. Turner, and C. M. Gilbert: "Petrography," W. H . Freeman
& Co. , San Francisco, 1954.
Winchell , A. N.: "Elements of Optical Mineralogy," 4th ed. , part 2, John
Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, 1951.
CHAPTER
11
Elements to Hydroxides
MULTIPLE OXIDES
ELEMENTS
Spinel Group
Spinel
Magnetite'"
Chromite'"
P erovskite
Graphite'"
SULF IDES
Sphalerite '"
Pyrite'"
Pyrrhotite"
Chalcopyrite ()
HYDROXIDES
Brucite
Diaspore
Bauxite Minerals
Boehmitc
Gibbsite
Cliachite
Limonite'"
HALIDES
H alite
Fluorite
OXIDES
P ericlase
Corundum
H em a tite '"
Ilmenite'"
Rutile
Cassiterite
ELEMENTS
As id e 1'1'0111 g r;lpllil( ', (' 1('IIH 'lIl s <Ire 1101 ordill ;lrily ('II ('Olllil (' re d il l li lill s('(' li o ll ('~ <l lIl ill ; il ioll . A p os~ ild, ' ('\('(' plioll is sldl'lII', w lli!'11 i ~ rOlil HI ill sil il
\1 01111 ' (,li p l'<H' k 11 1111 is d l' pll ,'~ iI, ' d ,Irnlilid 1'1I111 :lrn ll's .
" MI 'h', " I'1 11 1I11 " ' " "JI" tj" (I '" 11(I "d 1' " " "1"" 1',,1 1" '" IIi" I" 1' li d" wl'l l"",I,
1111.
186
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
GRAPHITE
Opaque
Hexagonal
187
ELEMENTS TO HYDROXIDES
'"
",.
f,
FIG.
tt,
11-1. ( X20) Graphite (black) showing elonga te sections cut normal to fl akes.
SULFIDES
Aside from sphalerite the few sulfides ordinarily observed in thin sections are opaque.
Often these may be examined more effcctively on polished surfaces with
reHected light.
SPHALERITE
(Zn,Fe)S
FIG.
FeS 2
I sometric:
F c ,_xS
TsomcLrie
Opaque
Opaq ue
Il oxngoll l\1
188
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
CuFeS2
Opaque
Tetragonal
189
ELEMENTS TO HYDROXIDES
and other salts. The great basin of northern Germany and the basin
which covers adjacent portions of New Mexico , Texas, Kansas , and Oklahoma are outstanding examples . Among the basins recognized arc
isolated marine remnants, shallow basins with intermittent oceanic connections, and isolated d esert basins.
As sea water evaporates in isolated basins such as th e Caspian Sea, tlw
concenh'ation of salts increases and eventually NaCl, KCl, CaSO"
CaS0 4 .2H zO, and complex salts which contain Mg, Ca, K, and Na an :
precipitated as minerals. Fluctuations in salinity due to intermitlcllt
streams have often occurred with the result that salts have b ecn (kposited in layers whieh are rhythmically repeated. The accumulatioll 01'
evaporites in enclosed basins may exceed the saline content of Lll(
original marine body.
Minera l
FIG.
Syl vite
Ha litet
Carnalli te
Kainite
La ng beinite
Poly ha litet
Thena rdite
Anhydritet
Gypsumt
Kieserite
Calcite t
Aragoni tet
D olomi tet
Kerni te
Borax
U lex itc
Col e lll a ni te
System a nd co mposition
I
I
0
M
I
T
M
111
H
0
H
l\[
111
T
1M
KCI
N aC I
K1I1 gCI. 6H,O
K1I1 g(SO.)C1.3H,O
K , 1I1 g,(SO.J,
l(,Ca,1I1 g(SO. ) . 2H,O
N a,SO.
CaSO.
CuSO . 2H , O
M gSO d {,O
CaCO .
CaC O ,
Ca CM g. Fc ) (CO .)'
Na, B . 0 7.4H, O
Na , B. 0 7. 10]-[, 0
N"C" B ,O .8 1-['O
Ca, B ,O " .r. rr, o
Index of refraction
n",
n-y
nil
In ter fe rence
fi g ure
= 1.4903*
n = 1. 5443*
C lf'flVn.KO
. 4665
.494
n
. 54 7
1 . 464
1 .5698
. 5207
1 .520
1. 4753 1.4937*
1 . 505
1. 5 16
= 1 . 5347*
0 .5(;0
1 .567
1 .474
.485
1. 5754 1. 6 13H*
1 .5299
.5230 *
1 .533
. 584
n, = 1.4863 nw =
1 . 5300 1. 68 10
n, = 1 . 500 llw
] . 4:'4
1 .172
. 44(;(;
. W87
. 1;0,1
. 49 1
. [,020
1 .58(;:1
1.6583*
. H854*
I . G79
. 488
. 4717 *
. ,,20
GHO*
B%
B%
B% B%
13%
13x
Bx
+
+
+
+
U
Bx
U
Bx Bx -
BI +
B%+
1100 1
1100 1
indis till ct
1001 1
no ne'
11011
10 10 1,/ 101 1,/ 111111
1010 1,1 100 1, /00 11
10 10 1,1 100 1,1 1111 1
/1101 , /111}' 1 i II I,
110 11,1 0 11 1
1101 1 I
/0101 ,/ 1111 1, 111111
I I()II I
* (Na- li g ht) .
t Sec text des cr iptio ns .
Partly isolated basins may contain ahundant anhydrite and do l()lIJiII '
but are de fi cicnt in soluble salts. D escrL ba sin s y ie ld borales and less ('x
tensive acc nrnlllali ons of sol llhl c salls .
Th in secLions of evaporites ma)' h e m ~lcl (' hy g ri ll clill ~ in ~ I )'('o l , s /llil i, 'S
or th e lexllircs alld r(' i;lli oll sliips or tli ese 1ll<lt (' ri ;Jis 1i ;lv(' 1)( ' ( ' 11 111 : 111" I,
Stewart ( H).\9 ) , Sbll( 'r ; 111(1 11( 'II<i( ' I'SOIl ( 1!):12) , iJlld olli('l's, ( ;0 111111011
uVllporllll' IlIilll 'rnls il l'( ' Il ~ I, d . 1\11 01'(' ('() lIlpll'lI' d~'s l' l'ipli () lI S will \)\' I'o lllld
ill Ih " n ' I (' I( ' II (' ( '~ III 11]( ( 11](1 ,iI III I' (' 11 11I ) le ' l' ,
..
'
190
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
HALITE
NaCI
I sometric
n = 1.544
Color. Colorless but may contain inclusions.
Form. Halite is not found in thin sections prepared in the ordinary
way, but the sections may be ground in glycol. The halite usually appears
in anhedral crystals (Fig. 11-5).
Cleavage. Perfect cubic.
Relief. Very low, n b eing about the same as balsam or clove oil.
191
ELEMENTS TO HYDROXIDES
outline, but it is usually anhedral and often fills the spaces b etween other
minerals.
Cleavage. Perfect octahedral {Ill}. The cleavage usually appears as
two intersecting lines at oblique angles of 70 and 110, occasionally at
three intersecting lines of 60 and 120 (Figure 8-35).
Relief. Fairly high, n < b alsam. According to Merwin, the index of
refraction is remarkably constant (1.4338 for sodium light). Dispersion
of fluorite is very low; h ence the use of fluorite for apochromatic objectives.
FIG. ll-S. ( X 60) Halite with cubic outlines accen tuated by silty inclusions along
crystal boundaries.
F1G. 11-6. ( X 18) F luorite showing zonal structure.
Birefringence. Nil. Dark between crossed nicols. H alite from the highly
compressed salt of salt domes may b e anisotropic in thick sections.
Distinguishing Features. The very low relief, cubic cleavage, and
solubility are characteristic. About the only mineral that is likely to be
mistaken for halite is sylvite, but the latter h as appreciable relief and an
index less than balsam (for sylvite n = 1.490) .
Occurrence. Halite occurs in sedimentary b eds of rock salt that are
often accompanied by anhydrite and gypsum. Sylvite and polyhalite are
characteristic associates.
Fluorite
CaF 2
I sometric
= 1.434
OXIDES
At least six simpl e oxid es are frequ ently cneo nn tc rccl ill II,ill s('('1i()IIH.
1'1 mOil iI.c, 1I<'II1:1li\.(', :llId :II. times rutilo are \.ralls'llI c('1I1 or Op:lqll <l. 0111( '1"
192
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
193
ELEMENTS TO HYDROXIDES
PERICLASE
CORUNDUM
I sometric
MgO
n
Hexagonal
AbOa
= 1.738 t o 1.760
(Rhombohedral subsystem )
n, = 1.759 to 1.763
n",
= 1.767 to 1.772
Opt. ( -)
1"11 :, 11 . 10. ( )o' r,O) C'" II II.l 1I 1I 1 " ' >,~ 1 1I 1 wi ll. w, ,11 d'IV"llIp"d p , "I I II I ~'
194
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
Color. Usually colorless, sometimes with blue or pink areas that are
not uniformly colored. Zoned crystals are not uncommon. In thick sections corundum may be pleochroic.
Fonn. Euhedral crystals are common. The habit varies from tabular
to prismatic; cross sections are six-sided and may show zonal structure.
Skeleton crystals are often encountered.
Cleavage. Parting often parallel to the unit rhombohedron {lOil} or
the pinacoid {0001} or both.
Relief. Very high, n > b alsam.
Birefringence. W eak, nw - fi e = 0.008-0.009. Sections are usually
thicker than normal on account of the exh'eme hardness of the corundum.
For this reason the maximum interference color of most thin sections runs
up into the second order.
Extinction. P arallel to the crystal outlines or symmetrical to the
rhombohedral parting.
Orientation. Sections of tabular crystals are length-slow, and sections
of prismatic crystals are length-fast since the optic sign of the mineral
is negative.
Twinning. Twinning lamellae or twin seams with {lOll } as the twinplane are rather common.
Interference Figure. The figure obtain ed in basal sections is uniaxial
negative usually with one ring. Some figures are biaxial with 2V as high
as 30 .
Distinguishing Features. The combination of very high relief with
weak birefringence, partin g, and tw'inning lamellae is distinctive.
195
ELEMENTS TO HYDROXIDES
Occurrence. Corundum is especially characteristic of corundum syenites, contact-metamorphic limestones, and metamorphosed shales. It
may also be found in schists and as a sporadiC deh'ital mineral. It is one
of the principal constituents of emery, which is probably a metamorphosed bauxite or laterite. In igneous rocks it never occurs with original
quartz.
H EMATITE
Fe 20 3
Opaque to translucent
Hexagonal
(Rhombohedral subsystem)
n. = 2.94
= 3.22
n",
Opt. (-)
Steel-gray black with metallic luster in rcflected light, with a tendency
to a marginal red. Some occurrences are red and translucent.
11-12. ( X 20) Hematite (black) fillin g the interstices between quartz veins and
following fractures in a quartzite.
F IG.
(i'cTi0 3
FIG. 11-1l. ( X 60) Small corundum crystals disseminated throu gh fluartz and inte.!'spcrsed with biotite.
Oparp lC
Tf() X H ~ () ll ld
(1l I1oll lill ll ,, 'd,,"1 HltlIHYHII 'III )
1I11l('lIit c: is hhw-gl'il y !lllll'k wi tll IIl('t :dli (' IlI stl 'r ill rdl(TI('d li g ll!. It.
s ho w II w llil ( ' 01' v(,!l o wl ,11 !JII I'II( ' I' I dl( ' I'I II inl l t o 1( ' III 'O X( ' I1( \
Illay
196
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
ELEME:NTS
'to
191
HYDROXIDES
CASSITERITE
Sn02
TetragomLl
nw = 1.996
n, = 2.093
Opt. (+)
FIG.
the surface and around the borders of ilmenite and is also disseminated
through various rocks and is probably the result of hydrothermal alteration. Leucoxene has sometimes been identified with sphene. Leucoxene
in a detrital deposit in Oklahoma is amorphous hydrous titanium dioxide,
according to Coil.
RUTILE
Tetragon al
Ti0 2
nw = 2.603 t o 2.616
n , = 2.889 t o 2.903
Opt. (+ )
e ll I
r10111
II
198
MINERAL DESCRI1'TIONS
ELEMENTS TO HYDROXIDES
199
'. I sometric
(Mg,Fe) (Al,Cr) 20 4
n
1.72 to 1.78
b
11-15. ( X20) Two views of a spinel section. (a) Ordinary illuminalion s h ()w i" l~
spinel in dolomite. (h) T he same crystals between crossed ni eols. (Slreaks a,,<1
patches of birefrin ge nce in th e spinel arc caused by alteratio n. )
FIG.
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
200
Occurrence. Spinel occurs in metamorphic limestone with phlogopite
and chondrodite, in other metamorphic rocks, and also in various igneous
rocks. It is rare as a detrital mineral.
Picotite is common in peridotites, dunites, and derived serpentines.
MAGNETITE
FeIlFe~II04
Opaque
Isometric
201
E LEMENTS TO HYDROXIDES
P seudoi sometric
CaTi0 3
n = 2.34 to 2.38
FIG.
Opaque to translucent
n = 2.07 t o 2.16
I sometric
All members of this group lose wa ter on ignition . Thus the t erril
hydrous oxide has b een frequently applied.
DJASl'ORE
AIO (OH)
1.722
1.7:;0
XIO; ()pt.. ( I- )
'Il y
')\1
I/,
FIG.
11-17. ( x 20)
IV
01'
.Y
202
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
ELEMENTS TO HYDROXIDES
203
BRUCITE
Mg(OHh
Hexagonal
(Rhombohedral subsystem)
nw = 1.566
n, = 1.585
Opt. (+)
Color. Colorless in thin sections.
Form. Brucite usually occurs in plates or scaly aggregates that appear
fibrous in sections.
.....
.;.;32::::
FIG.
/)
1"'\:. II -!W. ( X 2() ) 111I J('ili \ 1,1 l 'I< ,I,'" '"'l' ld (' l i ll, \, IIIII('. (II) "Viti, o,dlll ll ' V 111,,111111 11110 11 . ( /1) iI"I IV, " " "11" ,,, ,01 1I 1(,1I1 ~,
......
204
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
Cleavage. Perfect in one direction {0001} but may not show in thin
sections.
Relief. Fair, n > balsam.
Birefringence. Moderate, ne - nw = 0.019. Some of the interference
colors are anomalous; a peculiar reddish brown hue takes the place of
the yellow and orange of the first order. If the section is too thin, the
anomalous colors do not show.
Extinction. Parallel.
Orientation. The scaly aggregates, which are apparently fibrous , are
length-fast.
Interference Figure. The interference figure is uniccdal positive with
the first ring anomalous (see Birefringence ). At times the figure may be
biaxial with a small axial angle.
Distinguishing Features. It resembles alunite but has b etter cleavage
and anomalous interference colors.
Alteration. Brucite is often altered to hydromagn esite, Mg,, (OH) 2-
(C0 3 )a,3H 2 0.
Occurrence. The most common occurrence of brucite is in metamorphic calcite-brucite rocks as an alteration of periclase, MgO. It is sometimes found in serpentine.
ELEMENTS TO HYDROXIDES
205
Birefringence. Moderate, 11ry - n" = 0.013.
Distinguishing Features. Closely resembles gibbsite in thin section,
but the refractive indices are higher and the birefringence is less.
Occurrence. Widely distributed in bauxite where at times it may be
the main mineral.
GIBBSITE
AI(OHh
(Hydrargillite)
Monoclinic
= 8529'
L(3
n a = 1.554 to 1.567
n fJ = 1.554 t o 1.567
n-y = 1.576 t o 1.589
2 V = 0 t o 40; Opt. (+ )
b = IX or X, a 1\ 'Y or Z = 26
Bauxite Minerals
The term bauxite is widely used for aluminum ore. It was originally
applied (Betthier, 1821) to aluminous material b elieved at that time to
b e a single mineral but since shown to contain at least two constituents.
Bau xite is properly a generic term for rocks rich in hydrous aluminum
oxides. Such rocks are frequently formed by weathering in warm, humid
regions where organic acids derived from heavy vegetation are abundant.
The process is frequ ently called lateritization. The product laterite, often
both ferruginous and aluminous, is a widespread intermediate stage in
the formation of bauxite. Aluminum minerals common in bauxite are
gibbsite, boehmite, and cliachite.
BOEHMITE
AIO(OH)
Ort horhombic
a =
n a = 1.638
n fJ = 1.645
n-y = ] .651
2V = moderate; Opt. (-)?
IX or X; b = 'Y or Z; c = (3 or Y
......
206
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
Distinguishing Features. On account of the aggregate sbucture gibbsite resembles chalcedony, but thc relief is higher and the birefringence
much sbonger. It also resembles dahllite, but the latter mineral has weak
birefringence.
ELEMENTS TO HYDROXIDES
207
shrinkage of the original spherOidal gel-form frequently appear in thin
sections.
FIG. 11-23. ( X 20) Bauxite showing a segment of a pisolite. The dark area is
cliachite. Contraction cracks are filled with gibbSite.
.. ....
FIG. 11-22. (X25) ( X nicols) Gibbsite surrounds and penetrates pisolites and
broken areas of cliachite (black).
Occurrence. Cliachite is the main constituent of many bauxites. Common associates are gibbsite and siderite. There may also be relict min erals such as ilmenite and sphene, for in some cases bauxites are derivcd
from nepheline syenites.
LIMONITE
.-\i 20 3 (H 20):t
(B auxite in pa rt)
n = 1.57 to 1.61
Mineraloid
H2Fe2()4(H 2()):t
()paque to translucent
n = 2. 0 to 2.1
Mincraloid
FIc. J :1 -24. ( X 9) Lilll()n il l' l'l' llIl'lllin g deLrilal i'ra g lll(': lIls of <i" :II ' l z .
Th e mincr,il is Il sl l:t1l y isolropi c IlIll I1lay sllow irrcg ltlar hircl'rill g(" ll'('
cluo Lo slrai l' . Co('ll lil(' is slillil " r 10 liIlHlIli[() hill is tlisliflclly cryslnl/ill
witll I'"rallo'l ('xl JIIl 'I iOIl ,
.......
MINERAL DESCRiPTIONS
208
Limonite is a secondary mineral product ordinarily the result of oxida
tion or weathering. It may form a cement for sand grains. It is often present on the weathered surface of rocks. It occasionally forms pseudomorphs after other minerals especially pyrite.
CHAPTER
12
REFERENCES
Evaporites
Schaller, W. T. , and E. P. Henderson: Mineralogy of drill cores from the
potash field of New Mexico and Texas, U.S. C eol. Survey Bull. 833 ,
p. 124, 1932.
Stewart, F. H.: The Petrology of the Evaporites of tl1e Eskdale No .2 Boring,
East Yorkshire, Mineral. Mag. , vol. 28, pp. 621-675, 1949.
Bauxite
"Problems of Clay and Laterite Genesis: A Symposium ," pp. 1-244, AIME,
New York, 1952.
CARBONATES
SULFATES
PHOSPHATES
Calcite Group
Calcite
Dolomite
Magnesite
Siderite
Aragonite Group
Aragonite
Barite
Celestite
Anhydrite
Gypsum
Polyhalite
Alunite
Jarosite
Monazite
Apatite
Dahllite
Collophane
Lazulite
M incral
Chemi cal
com posiLion
n,
nw
nw - n ,
CaCO ,
Ca(M f,!;,Fe) (CO ,h
Mf,!;CC)"
l"cCO,
1 . 48G
1 . 500- 1 . 52G
1 . 500- 1.527
1 . 5%- 1. n:{3
] . G58
1. G80- 1. 7 1(i
1 . 700- 1. 72(;
J . 8:{0- J. 875
0 . 172
O. 180- 0 . I DO
o . lnl O. I\)!)
0 .2: I 'H) .2 /1 ~
( Zn CO:, ). Til ey al'O lH'xli /.';( lIlId ( rllollll)()ll ('drlll slIhsyS II 'II1 ) "villi per/'cci
rholl il )()lwdrlll (II ': IVII/.';( li lld II <"11 ' 11VII/-(I , all gk of' 7:1" 10 7f) o, T,II('Y ti l'( '
'. ( 1)
210
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
211
uniaxial and optically negative. All show change of relief when rotated;
the higher relief is obtained when the long diagonal of the rhomb is
parallel to the vibration plane of the lower nicol. The birefringence is extreme, and the maximum interference colors are high-order white.
Dolomite and magnesite may contain ferrous carbonate in isomorphous
mixture, and this increases the value of the refractive indices.
Another member of the calcite group is rhodochrosite, MnCO a. It is
very similar to the other minerals in its optical properties. Rhodochrosite
occurs in veins but is very rare as a rock-forming mineral. Still another
member of the group is smithsonite. It usually occurs in the oxidized
zone and is sometimes pseudomorphou s after calcite and dolomite.
CALCITE
Hexagonal
CaC0 3
n, = 1.486
= 1.658
Opt. ( - )
n",
lamellac arc mostly parallel to the long diagonal, but they also inl('rs('('1
at oblique angles dep ending upon how the section is cut. The lwill
lamellae ill'e usually so thin that they show first-order interference colors.
Interference Figure. The interference figure is uniaxial negative witll
many rings. Cleavage 1lakes give a very cceenh"ic fi gm c. OccaS ionally
calcile gives a biaxial fi gure with a small axial angle.
Dislinguishing Fealures, Dolomite, magn csite, a nd siderite may all 1>0
IIlislakell for c; dcile. Do loillilc' is Il slially subheclral to euhecl ral and oflell
II :lS lwill 1<1 111( ' 11 ;1(' pan dlvl 10 II I(' sll()rl dia gonal as well as 10 the IOll g
dl agoll:d. Sid( 'I'ilo IISIIII II ), III IS "'Oil SllIills :lrolllHllll(l hOf"{]l'rs of Iho grllins.
212
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
213
DOLOMITE
(inc. Ankerite)
Hexagonal
(Rhombohedral subsystem)
n,
n ",
= 1.680 to 1.716
1.500 to 1.526
Opt. (-)
FIC . 12-3. ( X 60) Finely crystalline calcite containing coarser quartz. (X nicols. )
FIC. 12-5. ( X20) A portion of a single anhedral crystal of dolomite showing rholllbohedral cleavage.
Flc. 12-4. ( X 25) Calcite forming casts of foraminifera distributed through carbonaceous shale.
and the relief is not low in any position. Since there is no distinctive feature for magnesite, it may be necessary to make microchemical tests.
Aragonite is also similar to calcite but lacks the rhombohedral cleavage,
and in no section is the refractive index distinctly less than that of balsam.
Aragonite is also biaxial.
Alteration. Calcite is often replaced by quartz. This feature is often
observed in quartz veins.
Occurrence. Calcite is the principal constituent of both sedimentary
and metamorphic limestones, but it is found in many other rock types.
It is a very common secondary min eral in cavities of igneous rocks, where
it is often associated with zeolites. It is also it dellte-ri e mineral in som
i!!neolls rocks. Next to (l' t:lrlz, ('aicilt' is Ih e most C ClJIIII IO II ve in ntineral.
.-.
214
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
twin lamellae are usually so thin that they show first-order interference
colors.
Interference Figure. The interference figure is uniaxial negative with
many rings.
Distinguishing Features. Dolomite closely resembles calcite, but in
many cases it may be distinguished by its t endency to euhedral crystals,
by zonal structure, and by twinning lamellae parallel to the short diagonal. It is even more like magnesite, and thus it may be necessary to rely
on chemical or microchemical tests.
Occurrence. Dolomite is a very common mineral. It occurs in veins and
replacement deposits, in sedimentary dolomite rocks and limestones, and
in metamorphic dolomite rocks.
MAGNESITE
Hexagonal
MgC0 3
n , = 1.509 to 1.527
nw = 1. 700 t o 1. 726
215
Relief. Changes on rotation like calcite and dolomite. It has high relief
when the lon g diagonal of the rhomb is p arallel to the vibration plane of
the lower nicol and low relief when the short diagonal is in this position.
An occasion al scction parallel to {000l} has high relief in all positions.
Birefringence. Extreme, nw - n8 = 0.191 to 0.199; intederence colors
are pearl gray (white of the high order ).
Extinction. Symmeh'ical with rcsp ect to cleavage traces.
Twinning. Absent as far as known.
Intederence Figure. The interfercnce figure is uniaxial negative with
many rings.
Distinguishing Features. Magnesite is very similar to dolomite and
calcite and has no distinctive optical properties of its own aside from
indices of refraction. For this reason chemical or microchemical tests may
be necessary to distinguish it.
Occurrence. Metamorphic magnesite rocks are found in Stevens
County, W ashington. Magnesite is a common mineral in serpentine in
both coarsely crystalline and microcrystalline varieties.
SIDERITE
Opt. (-)
Hexagol1lt[
FeC0 3
n, = 1.596 t o 1.G33
nw = ] .830 to 1.875
Opt. (-)
FIG.
Color. Colorless.
Form. Magnesite usually occurs in anhedral to su bhedral crystal aggregates. The porcelain-like microcrystalline variety has a grain size on
the order of l iL. Euhedral crystals are exceedingly rare.
Cleavage. Perfect rhombohedral {lOll } as in calcite, dolomite, and
siderite except in the microcrystalline variety.
CO IOI', III Il li ll s('d i() lI s il is ('o lor l(ss 10 g r :ly lI lid III:ly
browlI ill sp()l s
Oil
llro
....
216
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
Form. Siderite occurs in fine to coarse aggregates of anhedral to euhedral crystals and sometimes shows oolitic, spherulitic, or colloform
structure.
Cleavage. Perfect rhombohedral {lOll} as in calcite, dolomite, and
magnesite.
Relief. Varies somewhat on rotation. The relief is high when the long
diagonal is parallel to the vibration plane of the lower nicol and moderate
when the short diagonal is in this position. In both positions the index of
refraction is greater than balsam.
Birefringence. Exh'eme, nUl - n = 0.234 to 0.242. Interference colors
are pearl gray (white of high order). Blighter colors may show on the
edge of the slide.
Extinction. Symmetrical to cleavage traces.
Twinning. Twin lamellae parallel to the long diagonal [twin-plane =
{0112}] are occaSionally observed.
Interference Figure. The interference figure is uniaxial negative with
numerous rings.
Distinguishing Features. Siderite very much resembles the other
rhombohedral carbonates but may often be distinguished by the brown
stain around the borders of the grains and along cleavage cracks. The
index of refraction in all positions is greater than that of balsam; in calcite, dolomite, and magnesite the index of refraction n e is less than that
of balsam.
Occurrence. The chief occurrence of siderite is in veins or replacement
deposits with quartz as a common associate. Siderite also is a prominent
mineral in some bauxites. It is the principal mineral of septarian clay
ironstone concretions. Siderite is a prominent mineral in the oolitic ironstones of England as an associate of chamosite. It is a secondary mineral
in the cavities of some basalts.
217
'y
1
1
/'
II
'1[1 ' 1
I II
~c-x(
-1
I I 010. - - ,
IIIXo
a
FIG. 12-8. Orientation diagram of aragon ite. Section parallel to (001).
Aragonite Group
Orthorhombic carbonates of Ca, Ba, Sr, and Pb form an isomorphous
group containing the minerals aragonite, witherite, strontianite, and
cerussite.
ARAGONITE
Orthorhombic
CaC0 3
(Pseudo hexagonal)
n",
FIG. 12-9. ( X 22 ) Euhedral ara gonile wilh j101ysy nlh cli (; lwinning. ( X ni co ls. )
= 1.530
nf3
= 1.682
n)'
= 1.686
2 V = 18; Opt. ( -)
a = f3 or Y , b = 'Y or Z, c = a or X
218
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
219
/ IftfB'o'lJ I I *t+t
. ) --b
O
FIG.
SULFATES
About 150 sulfate compounds are found in nature. Among these a few
common species have been selected for optical description. Descriptions
of sulfates of less common occurrence should be sought in reference
books,
BARITE
Ort horhombic
BaS04
na
n~
= 1.G:n
= 1.648
n 1'
2V
(t
1.636
= 36 to 373-2 ; Opt. (+ )
b = (:J or Y, r; = (~ or X
'Y or 7"
220
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
221
'"
8r80 4
Orthorhombic
n" = 1.622
n~ = 1.624
n oy = 1.631
2V = 51; Op t. (+)
a = l' or Z, b = (3 or Y, C = a or X
A NII YDIUTE
010
~-=.1~
CnS O~
-- b
'11 "
I.mo
II Ii
l .fi76
/l oy
J.(i
1"
:~ I '
(I,
01 '
U O; Opl. . ( I )
'h , II
rJ (II' l' , (;
II'
or .'I
222
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
223
I
010
':l:=
I) - b
x
I
FIG.
b
FIG. 12-17 a,". ( X 20) A crystalline aggregate of anhydrite with rcduli gul ar C I C llVIII ~("
(a) Ordinary illu mina tion. (b) X nicols.
GYPSUM
CaS0 4. 2II 2 0
MOll oe liu iu
(3 =- ~ O O /I ')/
na = 1. 520
1l ~ = 1.522
II .., 1.!i2!J
~ I'
Ii
(J
i ll '
GHo; Op l..(I- )
) ', ( ' /\
f1'
01' .\'
;i7 ~H'
_I
224
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
225
Orientation. Cleavage b'aces are parallel to both slower and faster rays
since b = (3 or Y.
Twinning. The polysynthetic twinning often found in thin sections of
gypsum is produced by heating the section.
Interference Figure. The interference figure is biaxial positive with a
moderate axial angle. The axial plane is {01O} . Dispersion, l' > v. Sections parallel to (010) give a "flash figure."
Distinguishing Features. Gypsum is easily distinguished from anhydrite by lower relief and weaker birefringence.
Occurrence. Gypsum is the chief constituent of gypsum rock, which
in most cases has been form ed by the hydration of anhydrite. Anhydrite
may occur in the gypsum as a relict mineral. Gypsum occurs in veinlets
and between grains of anhydrite. Other commonly associated minerals are
calcite, dolomite, and halite.
POLYHALlTE
Triclinic
K 2MgCa2(S04) 4.2H 20
FIG. 12-18. Orientation diagram of gypsum. Section parallel to (010).
La
= 9220'
Lf3
L'Y
1234'
8821'
= 1.548
= 1.562
n'Y = 1.567
na
n fj
F,c. 12-20. ( X 15) Poiyh:1 i ill' si l()willg jloi y'y "Ij,('li c Lwi lilling ~ nd v: lli :,Lioil ill pig1111'111. ( X IIitok)
Color. Co lori( 'sS to 1'('(ldisl, ill Il l i" s('('(io ll s. '('li e I'cdJisl1 ('0101' is dll o
11('111 : 11
10
III '
I l hl'O II ~
S IIII('IIII'( '.
..
226
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
227
FIG. 12-21. (X20) Twinn ed crystals of polyhalitc in a gran ular aggregate. ( X nicols.)
KFe~II(OH) 6 (S04 ) 2
TTcxftJz;o lllll
(llhomhohpdrnl HlrllHYHI""I )
ALUNITE
Hexagonal
(Rhombohedral subsystem)
nw = 1.572
n, = 1.592
Opt. (+)
Color. Colorless in thin sections.
Form. Alunite usually shows fine to coarse aggrcga tes. Crystals vary
from tabular to pseudocubic rhombohcdral (rr' = 9050').
n, = 1.715
nw = 1.820
Op t.. ( - )
Color. Colorl css to hrown in lhin sections.
Form . J:lros ile OCC III"S ill c rys l;rl agg rega les :l lltl occasioll a ll y ill ('Iril('d n ri
c rys l';r1s, wlliell ; 11'(' Silllil;lr I n ,llose or ;Iirlllil e, for ,llese !.\\' O IIli lH'r;r1s
isol11o rplloll s.
C ll' UVII~(" l)islllH'1 d( 'I1VIII'.I' II, lilli ' d lrl '('li (l 1l {OOOll .
11 1' ( '
228
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
229
"""'-,
.:
PHOSPHATES
Many phosphate minerals are found in small concentrations in pegmatites, in metallic mineral deposits, and as minor rock constituents. The
minerals described constihlte the more abundant species.
MONAZITE
Monoclinic
L{3 = 766'
1.786 to 1.800
1.788 t o 1.801
n~
n.." = 1.837 to 1.849
217 = 6 to 19 ; Opt . (+)
ex or X, c 1\ l' 0[' Z = - 2 to - tOO
ncr
z I,
l~b = X::=
0 ----
100
~.
00\
-,
----y
l'
---
I" " ,. I ~', !.\: I, ()"" lIl l tli n ll di ngll ltl' of' tll OII II>: il (', S('ct illil
<
v.
Distinguishing Features. Monazite is more like sphene than any CO tn mon mineral, but its birefringence is not so high , Since it usual ly COII tains thor ium it is radioactive and even in thin section will an-ect a scnsi live Gei ger countcr.
Occurrence. Mon:lzile 0('('1Irs in pcg1l1atitcs, granite, :lIlel Ili ay llc fOlllHI
ill veills. It is a de lril :d 111i11( 'l'lil :111(1 IlIlIy hn fOlllld ill all(:ic llt s('dilll('l1 IlIl'y sl)':iI ;l ())' ill YOIIII !.!('I' Sl lll(l s,
II,
MINERAL DE SCRIPTION S
230
231
APATITE
Hexagonal
(Hexagonal subsystem)
n, = 1.630 to I.G51
nw = ] .G:):) to ] .G55
Opt. (-)
F IG.
FIG.
Occurrence. Apatite is a common minor accessory mineral of practically all igneous rocks. In the opinion of Tolman and Rogers, it is a late
magmatic mineral and not an early one. It also occurs in pegmatites, in
some high-temperature veins, irr metamorphic limestones and is also
prominent in some iron ores.
DAHL LITE
Hexago na i
3Ca3(P0 4) 2. CaC0 3
(Hexagona l
n, = 1.619 to l.626
n., = l. 623 t o l. 635
Opt . (-)
Color. Colorless to pale brown or gray in thin sections.
Form. Dahllite occurs in minute hexagonal crystals, in crusts wilil
banded subradiating structure, in spherulites, and in fine-grain ed aggn 'gates forming concretions or sedimentary rocks.
Relief. Moderate, n > b alsam.
Birefringence. Weak, nO) - n , = 0.004 to 0.009. Intcrferencc colors ;I re
bluish gray to white of the first order.
Extinction. Parallel. Cross scctions arc dark between crossed ni cois,
but occasionally they may show biaxial sectors.
Orientation. Prismatic crys lals arc lenglh-fasl likc a patile. Th e COllllllliS
of crtl sls ancl flh ers of sp il (' l'I!iil ('s are also len glh -fa st. Scc liolls of Lalll!i :II:
crystals arc le ngth-siow.
Interference Figure. Bllsll i :i \; (: li(),, ~ nro usually loo :-;rnull to givo goou
interferenco flglll'os.
"
232
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
233
b
FIG. 12-27 a,b. ( X 60) A crust of dahllite showin g banding and fiber texture. (a i
Ordinary illumination. (b) The same view with X nicols.
FIG. 12-28 a,b. ( X 20 ) D ahll ite and collophane in phosphate rock. (0 ) Ol'd1 l1 1l1 Y
illumination. (b) D ahllitc (white ) and collophane (black ) in the sa llie Vil'W wil l,
X nicols.
COLLOl'HANE
Mi ll( 'rll,loid
1. .')7 Lo 1.(;2
AmorphOll S c: i1 c illll1 c: 11'1)( )110phosph :1l0 is I lsll :dly cOlIsic1( 'I'( 'd 10 1)(' II
1l1:1ss iVQ 1'(11'111 01' :lpa l il (', 1>111 il is dislill cl iv( ' "11(1 sll()(dd 1)(' li skd sq Hlrn l (' ly liS (l 111i1 1('l'lI loid .
234
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
235
Monoclinic
L{3 = 88
F Ic . 12-29. ( X 18) Collophane in oolitic phosp horite. (Both thc matrix and the ooliths
are collophane.)
Color. Usually light to dark brown, yellowish brown, gray, etc. , in thin
sections, but occasionally it is colorless.
Form. Collophane is usually massive but may be oolitic or colloform,
in grains and fragments. It often shows the organic structure of bones,
molluscs , brachiopods, crinoids, bryozoans, or corals.
Cleavage. Absent. Irregular fracture m ay show on ed ges of the slide.
Relief. Moderate, n > b alsam. The index of refraction is variable, but
it is usually 1.60 to 1.61.
Birefringence. Usually isotropic but may show weak form-birefringence
(up to 0.005). Pseudospherulitic stru cture (concentric instead of fibrous
elements) sometimcs shows.
Orientation. Birefrin gent areas may be length-slow or length-fast.
Distinguishing Features. Some specimens of collophane resemble opal,
but the refractive index of th e latter is always less than that of balsam.
Oolitic chamosite resembles oolitic collophane.
Alteration. Collophane is often more or less replaced by calcite. Replacement by quartz, chalcedony, or opal is very rare. In some specimens
dahllite seems to b e fannin g at the exp ense of collophane.
Occurrence. In sedimentary phosphatic limestones, in phosphorites or
so-called phosphate rocks as the chi ef constituent, and in phosphate
nodules. It is the dominant mineral of fossil bone, in which the microstructure of the original bone is usually preserved. In fossil bone it has
been fonned by phosphatic enrichment. In invertebrate fossils it has b een
formed by enrichment in the case of phosphatic brachiopods such as
Lingula, but in most cases by the replacement of original calcarcous
organisms.
237
CHAPTER
13
Mineral
SILICA GROUP
FELDSPARS
Quartz
a-Quartz
,B-Quartz
Chalcedony
Opal
Tridymite
Clistobalite
Lechatelierite
Coesite
Alkali Feldspars
Orthoclase
Adularia
Sanidine
Microcline
Anorthoclase
Plagioclase
Albite
Oligoclase
Andesine
Labradorite
Bytownite
Anorthite
FELDSPA THoms
L eucite
Nepheline
Cancrinite
Sodalite
Haiiyne
Melilite
SCAPOLITE GROUP
ZEOLITES
Analcime
H eulandite
Stilbite
Chabazite
Natrolite
Mesolite
Thompsonite
Scolecite
Crystal system
Quartz .. .
Chalcedony .
Opal .
Tridymite.
Cristobalite .... ..
Lechatelierite.
Hexagonal
Aggregates
Mineraloid
Pseudoh exagonal
Pseudoisometric
Amorphous
SILICA GROUl.'
Silica occms in nahll'C in six distinct min erals and min c:raloi ds as listed
bclow. Thc first thrcc arc co mmon ; lechatcli crile (silica glass) is rare,
2:)0
nw
na
n
na
n cr
n
= 1 . 5442, n,
= 1.531, n-y
= 1. 40- 1.46
.5533, n, - nw = 0 .009
.539, n-y - na = 0 . 008
1 .469, n-y
1 .484, n-y
= 1.458- 1 .462
and birefringence of about 0.009; the other four have lower indices of
refraction and weaker birefringence, which reaches nil in lechatelieritc
and usually in opal.
Chalcedony always occurs in aggregates of some sort, and consequently
the optical properties are not completely known.
On h eating quartz there is a sudden change in the properties and
crystallization at about 573 a C from the trigonal trapezohedral class to
the hexagonal trapezohedral class. The low-temp erature form is called
a-quartz or low quartz and the high-temperature form ,B-quartz or high
quartz . The quartz of some igneous rocks was ,B-quartz at the time of its
formation but on cooling inverted to a-quartz. Similar changes take place
on h eating tridymite and cristobalite. The stability range of the various
Q
The tectosilicates form the largest and probably the most important of
the six-structural divisions among the silicates. The Si0 4 groups of this
series form a continuous thTee-dimensional framework.
The silica group is frcquently included among the oxides as listed in
Chapter 11. However, quartz forms a large molecule in which each silicon has four single covalent bonds to oxygen. Each oxygen in turn is
attached to two silicons. While the empirical formula is Si0 2 the term
"silicon dioxide" is really a misnomer. Although quartz is classed structurally as a tectosilicate, several other members are included with quartz
to avoid separation of the silica group.
Indices of refraction
...,
r:;
ex-Quartz
.
R>
fJ-Quartz ~
-------~ ~
1 "-
Cl
It)
-273
i
Liquid
1000
2000
Degrees, Centigrade
FTC . 13-1. Dia gram to show the relations b etwccn the variu ll s form s uf silica. (Afll'l'
Sosman.)
silica min erals is shown in th e dia gram or Fi gm c '13-1. Th e inversioll 1( ' 111 peralure of qll~u"lz by careflll IIl('aS III"('III ('lIl \i;I S h('('11 s hO\v lI by '1' 11111(,
(194.9 ) lo vary as nllleJl liS I ,!)()" (: , 1,0\\1('1' ill ve rsiOIl lClll lwraltlr("s ('0 1'rolalo wil h higlwr I OIlIP( ' I'II III1' I '~ 01 \,,, 1IllIlioJl.
238
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
Chalcedony and opal are low-temperature minerals. Quartz has a considerable temperature range. Tridymite and cristobalite also have a rather
large temperature range. The two latter occur almost exclusively in volcanic igneous rocks and in all probability h ave b een formed by hot gases
at the close of the magmatic period.
Qualtz crystals measuring several inches across may be grown on small
seed crystals in an autoclave. A solution of sodium carbonate is employed in a sealed system at about 350 C to b'ansfer silica from fragmented quartz in one chamber to the chamber containing seed crystals.
The dissolving chamber is about lOoC high er in temperature.
Hale and Hurlbut (1949) greyv a quartz crystal on a quartz sphere at
temperatures of 376 C (top) and 397 C (bottom) in an autoclave. The
pressure was estimated at 700 atm.
a -QUARTZ
Si0 2
(Low Quartz)
Hexagonal
(Rhombohedral subsystem)
nw = 1.5442
n, = 1.5533
Opt. (+)
FIG.
FIG.
FIG. 13-3.
FIG. 13-2.
13-2. ( x 25) Quartz grain s in sandstone. ( X nieols.)
13-3. ( X 10) Graphic intergrowth of i3-quartz and feldspar. ( X nicols. )
239
240
241
{3-QUARTZ
Si0 2
(High Quartz)
Hexagonal
(Hexagonal subsystem )
CHALCEDONY
Si0 2
Aggregates
[Hexagonal (?)]
nw = 1. 53 1
n, = 1.539
F IG. 13-5.
F IG. 13-6.
13-5. ( X 10) Radial chalcedony showin g a portion of a polarization cross.
( X nicols. )
FIG . 13-6. ( X 8) Banded chalccdony showin g both salt and pcpper structure and
radial layers. ( X nicols.)
F IG.
Color. Colorless to pale brown in thin sections and often bluish white
by reflected light.
Form. Chalcedony usually occurs as a cavity filling or lining that is
often sph erulitic as a replacement of fossils, as cementin g materi al, and
in massive form.
Relief. Low, n about the same as that of b alsam, eith er slightly lower
or slightly greater.
Birefringence. Rather weak, ny - n" = 0.008, practically the same as
that of qu artz. Chalcedony always shows aggregate Sb'll cture b etween
13-7 a,b. ( X 20) A p ortion of a vcsicle fill ed with silica : ( a ) ordina ry ill II II "" 11
tion, and (b ) thc same area ( X nicols ) showin g granular rlu <lrtz Slll'I'o llll(l, ." by
chalcedony aggrcga tcs.
FIG.
crossed nicols. This often takes on a sph erulitic form with the splwl'ldili ('
cross prominent in many cases .
Extinction. Parall el to th e length o[ th e fibers.
Orientation. Th e flhers arc usually lengLlI -fast, Imt in ma ny cas('s 111 (,),
a rc len glh -slow. Th e fj bel'S of CO J1 CC II t ri c ZOIi CS a 1'(, of len a h en 1;1 t ely slow
and fa st.
Disl ill gllisllillg Feallll'l' .~ . '1'1 1( ' i1 ggrq~; I l< ' SII'lI (' l l lr(' with opt ieal prop( 'rti( 's v( 'ry (Iose to those' of qll !lll i'. i ~ dislitl('l iv( ' for (II:ti ccdoll),. ' 1'11 0
242
MINERAL DESCRIPTION S
243
OPAL
Si0 2 (H 2 0) x
Mineraloid
n = 1.40 to 1.46
(usually ca. 1.45)
F I G.
,.
-. 1
..
>fIo,
'"
: "...
FIG.
~.,
f!,,~
gel-stage.
III 1111 \
IlI lIy
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
244
245
Ort horhombic
Si0 2
na = 1.469
n~ = 1.469
n" = 1.473
2V
35 ; Opt. (+)
b
13-11 a,b. ( X 60) (a) Tridymite surrounding vesicular cavities, and (b) the
same area ( X nicols) showin g small twin crystals.
FIG.
10
( '01111'111 .
Iritl Ylidl O,
Ill'''
246
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
CRISTOBALITE
Si0 2
Pseudoisometric
(Isometric above 230C)
n" = 1.484
n'Y = 1.487
247
LECHATELIERITE
Si0 2
(Silica Gl ass)
Mineraloid
n = 1.458 to 1.462
b
FIG. 13-12 a,b. ( X GO) (a) Cristobalite formin g aggregates of small crystals, and
(b) the same area ( X nicols ) showin g minute anisotropic crystals.
Color. Colorless in thin sections . The tend ency toward opacity is clli C
to minute bubbles.
Form. Lechatelierite is amOlvhous silica glass. It is usually vcsi clll nl'
and may also be banded and show flow sbucture.
Relief. Low, n < balsam.
Birefringence. Nil. D ark b etween crossed nicols.
Distinguishing Features. From other glasses lechatelierite may he di stinguished by its very low refractive index. It very much resembles o p:d
except in its geologie occurrence. A closcd-hlbe t cs t may b e neccss:lry 10
make certain that the mineral is not opal.
Occurrence. Lcchatelierite is the main constitu ent of fu 1g11rites, w11i('h
are hollow tubes of glass produced by the action of ligh tning lIpOIl
quartzose sand.
An in teres tin g occurrencc of lechate1icri te is that of Me[eor Cra ll'r,
Arizona. H erc a hi ghly V('sicl.!:l r sili ca gla ss h as l)('('n prodll ('('d rrOIl1
sandstone hy [h (' 'w:lI' g('IH 'r:li< 'd :I S :1 r('s lI]1 of' Ih (' ('x p]nsiv( ' in lp:l C'1 or II
11l1gl' nwl ('()rilc Ill' Ilwl( 'oril(' SW:t 1'l1l ( ( :: Iii on I)i :lh]o Il H' l c' ori l (' ).
Art/lido l 1.1'f'iIlII I'IiI ri/I . SlI kll 1~ 1:' ~s is IIO W IlInd( , Il rli fi(' ili lly Oil II I: "'gn
1'1<'11 ]0 ror YIlI'i ()I1 ~ kiJl(] '1 01 ( ' ] 1(' 11" 1'1 11 " P]l !l I ' I IIII ~, ] ( ' Il ~ C '~. il ll(] w lllelo w ]l1l11( 'H
248
Mll'<ERAL DESCRIPTIONS
249
Or =fOO
Si0 2
Monoclinic
0
L(3 = 120
na = 1.599
n-y = 1.604
2V = 54 0 ; Opt.
C+)
l:J""<
G'
,"
A dense (Sp. Gr. = 3.01) and extremcly stable phase of silica is produced in the laboratory at 35,000 atm and 500-800 a C by the reaction of
equal parts of dry sodium metasilicate and diammonium phosph ate. It
forms both as extremely small aggregates and as crystals up to 0.6 mm
in length. The material is colorless and transparent, and pseudohexagonal
plates yield unsymmebical extinction.
Normal quartz rather than dense silica forms b elow 35,000 atm in the
range 500 to 800 a e. Occasionally, near 35,000 atm both phases are observed. Above 800 a C a t 35,000 atm only normal quartz is produced. The
conditions required for the formation of coesite, togeth er with its great
stability, may provide criteria for more closely estimating the conditions
under which deep-seated rocks are crystallized.
,q}
~(, ~
"
:'
""' I
&
<y-<:!
1
(. ;>Albite
y! .
..........
.......
-- Plagioclase ~
Anorthite
Labrqdorite Bytownite
Oliqpclase Andeyne
70
Molecul ar percent An (per cent Ab inferred)
90
An
=100
FELDSPARS
Alkali fe ldspar
Monoclinic:
Composit ion
Orthoclase
.
Triclimc:
Plagioclase
..
. CamposltIon
Ab
An
(KNa) AlSi 30 s
Sanidine
(KNa )AlSi 30 s
Adularia
(KNa)AISi 30 s
Triclinic :
Microcline
(KNa )AISi 30 8
Anorthoclase
(NaK)A1Si 30 8
100
Albite
{90
10
Oligoclase
{ 70
30
Andesine
{50
50
Labradorite
{ 30
70
Bytownite
{ 10
90
An orLhil C'
{()-roo
\1 23 4
Weight per ce nt
An
h
F Ir: . 13- '1 3. (II ) Th e appro\i lll :II(' <i i\ l ri llillio l l o r Ih, r,' lcb pars i" Ill(' 1""1 111 )' l,y .\ I,,,"
Or- Ah- AII . AIII' y d,...II , 1I,, ll s ill<ii, ': II ,' illl ," (': 1 o r ('( )J ll p l .. Ii 1I!i \(' i J, i lil y ill II II' 0, A"
s" li ," II I II,, lig lll ,,1'11,(, d (l ll ,'d II"" , ( Mu cli/i!''' [ru lll '/' I'UI:"I', 11).');'. ) (II ) ' J" '''ip " l ll.
l" l'I \~ Ill' rOll ll "li, ,,, i ll II" , ' 1,, "I" III II IY //)'\ 1( ' " 1 01 Ail "" 11 ,0 II I .'),()()() bill S, (Ali I'/'
Yo""'" SII'II '," I, IIIIfI ,.; II lit/, , I l)r(f , )
250
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
1 bar
251
1400 1
1 ---,--,---,----,--,---,---,---,---,---,
1300 f--
PHzO
5000 bars
1200
/'/
/'/'
1100
//
./
il000
././
.2
./
~ 900
E
~
800
,..."
,.../
//
700
600
500'
Ab
r}!('\
.... '"
An
=100
1100
1000
l?_ 800
~
'"
E
876 0
Feldspar-liquid-qas
/'
......... .!~
600
Feldspar
+qas
/'
500
qas
748 0
700
'"a.
~
Liquid
900
/'
"
//
rt: 1UO
!,-
....
-- -
............
"
2 - feldspars
+ qas
05
"-
/'/'
/'
--'
Feldspar
+qas
,
400
300
Ab
Or
= 100
(b)
13-14. Projections of th e feldspar ternary systems at 5,000 bars 'I [,0 preSSll r(,.
(a) The plagioclase system Ab-An-I-J,O, (b) The alkali feldspar syste m A],-Or- II,O.
~Aftel' Yud.e l', Ste wart, and S'm.ith, 1957.)
FIG.
252
with the fall in temperature b elow 660C. X-ray study shows that Or-Ab
feldsp ar which may appear b eneath the microscope as a single phase
is often made up of 1:\vo phases. Thjs may b e called Cl'yptopelthite.
The Ab-An series includes the plagioclase group from albite to anorthite. Kohler (1949) has shown that the optical properties of t\vinned
plagioclase may reflect the thermal history of the material. A difference
exists b etween the properties of plagioclase derived from high-tempera-.
ture volcanic rocks and plagioclase from other sources.
Igneous Association. The alkali feldspars are widely distrihuted in
igneous rocks, particularly among the granite and syenite clans. PlagiOclase occurs in a range of compositions through the igneous rock classification from granite wh ere Ab is predominant to peridotite where An
253
co
0
'<
"'
0>
'T1
------
(f)
Cl
Si::;:
ro
fTl
1000 0
D..
~
I
I
ro
D..
ro
7I
'"0>
ro
:
900 0
.0 '
Quartz
/
I
I
Q.
0
'"ro
ro
'"
0
<"> -0
g ~
00
ro
ro
a
'"
c --l
;:;:
0-
:;::
J>
.. '"
L/
I
800 0
700 0
n~
____ ____ _____ ____ ______ ___ MAGMA _____ ___________ __ ___
Gabbro
Diorite
--+
.- ro
I" ~ .)
--+
Gra nite
(1)..
0"
Albite
J>
'T1
II
F IG_ 13-15. Perthite. Soda feldspar (al-
Ipyroxene i
J>
1- __ .1..
I
Contac t - -
-0
::J
0'
rn
.'
'>
::;:
ro
ro
: Tourmaline
I
I
n
~
I
I
I
ro
:
I
I
I
-----r-+
Diopside -+ Augite
3.
J (:)
n~ ~
0 _'
I
:;::
N
,,~ _n
(j).
c.;
..
OJ ~ ft)
"
~tg- ~~~
., '"I!' ..
=.:
o
ro
;.J(\)
- I
cu
t'
nJ
Ch rom
ite
Fe S- I Ilmenite !
melt Ti -Mo gnetite
Magnetite
Ilme nite
Hema tite
FIr.. 13-17. The plagioclase sequ cnce in igneous rocks. The approxim ate O.-cll'" 01
1/'1)/1/
254
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
/'
-.
[J
G:J
FELDSPAR TWINS
--h
b
0
255
Type
Alb ite
Manebach
Baveno
Carlsbad
Actin e
Pericline
Ala
Twin axis
Composition plane
.L (010)
.L (001)
.L (021) or (021)
(010)
(001)
(021) or (021) (Right or L oft,)
largely (010); partly ( 100)
(001)
In zone (010); ranges
(001) or (010)
11[001]
11 [010]
11 [010]
11 [100]
(001) range from 900 37~ ' (albite) to 8354' (anorthite). The angles
between the crystal axes for plagioclase range as follows:
a(c 1\ b)
f3(a 1\ c)
93- 9430'
115- 11630
Twin crystals formed by simple repetition are represented by tll C Carlsbad, Baveno, and Manebach twin laws (Figure 13-21) . Carlsbad twillS
are common in orthoclase, while Baveno and Manebach twins arc OCCaSionally observed. Carlsbad twins may also be present in plagioclaso. .111
'Y(a 1\ b)
87-91 30
Both alkali feldspars and plagioclase have good cleavage in two directions parallel to (001) and (010). Cleavage fragments observed with
the microscope often form small flat plates with two sides parallel. The
best cleavage is parallel to (001), but (010) is also good (Figure
13-20) . Fragments 0.1 to 0.4 mm thick and large enough to fill the field
of the microscope yield interference figures which are readily measured.
These are described by Tuttle as excellent mounts for determining the
optic angle with the universal stage.
Feldspar frequcmtly exhibits phase changes in what may appear externally as a single crystal but actually represents two or more individ-
(0 )
(el
(b )
FI r.. l :l. 2 1. Ty p, ,~ or I wi ll (, l y~ l lI l , \ ' 111111 111111 rill' ,,,11.0"' "1'> " . hili 1.1 '>1 '
r, .ld 'p"I ". (/I) IIII VI'"0 , ( II) Mllllnlll,, II , ( I' ) Ci llllll llll i.
1'1)1111.1
(III
0111".(
256
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
thin section, Carlsbad twins often exhibit two elongate individuals separated by a single composition plane (Figure 13-22a). The individuals
differ in extinction b etween crossed nicols . Baveno twins may be separated by a diagonal plane (Figure 13-22b ).
Multiple or polysynthetic twinning is abundant in plagioclase (Figure
13-23a). Albite twinning is widespread. It is recognized by the
001
parallelism between the composi1_ I --L :=
tion planes and the (010) cleavage
010
-I --~ 010
(Figure 13-23b). Fragments show010 II'" '
-1 1_ 1I-I
ing albite twinning are useful in
001
- I plagioclase identification.
I ~I-I
According to Emmons and Gates
010
( 1943) polysynthetic twinning is
(0)
(b )
formed late in the growth of the
FIG. 13-22 a,b. Section s of twin crystals
.
plagIOclase crystal. A common force
as illu strated by orthocl ase : (a) Carlsbad
and (b) Baveno.
leading to polysynthetic twinning is
the mutual interference of growing
crystals. A phenocryst ordinarily suffers little twinning in a fin e-grained
groundmass. Donnay (1943) places greater weight on the role of internal
factors in twinning.
Schuster's M ethod. In this identification, known as Schuster's Method,
cleavage flakes are mounted on a glass slide. Fragments with slightly
1
III
11 -'1
257
+10
o
-10
-20
-30
-40
-50
30
10
Ol igoclase
010
(0)
(b)
FIG.
FIG.
50
Andesine
70
Labradorite
90
lin 10
Bytownite
13-24. Schuster's curves showing the extinction on (001) and (010) clca vlI g" "
The method is dep endent upon the presence of a satisfactory nil 11'1])"1'
of crystals in a section to provide a sufficiently representative id entif it',, tion, Sections of crystals cut normal to (010) are sought. These arc ]'('('og
nized by three factors : ( 1) the sharpness of the composition planes wi lh
a slight change in focus, (2) uniformity of illumination of all la n1('11 n.
when parallel to the vibration planes of the nicols, and (3) th e cq ll :il il)'
of the extin ction angles for twin sets rotated to the left or ri ght.
A single meas urement .is shown in Fi gure 13-25. At least ('ighl OJ' 1( ' "
different crystals should h e In cas lII'('(l to incli ca lc til e "!:I xillll ll " ,'x lilll' liOIi
an gle ror a parliel" "r pi:r gio('l:i sc. ;\ d if rl' rl'lI ('e or as IIl1ld l as (j " ill I.. 111111
H :lll g ics is :rllo lV:l hl (', h i d til(' ;IV('J':I )!;" is Ils(d . C l'ys l :rI s('('(iIJIl S ill wlli, '11
t l lo :.11 1'1'11 [( 1(1 / , 111111 II l w ill g l'OllPS silo w .lIlii'.ll'lll ill l llili ll ll li'lli "i " I<I Sli t Is-
258
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
Left twins
extinct
Uniform
illumination
259
Right twins
extinct
FIG.
701
iii I i i
iii i
i i
i i i
iii
iii
601 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I ! I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I l ie I
FIG.
501 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1:,1"1 I I I I I
401 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1.-r=1 I ! I I ! ! I I I I I I I
301 1 : 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 L,f4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I I I I I I I I I 1 I I 1 I 1
20kl
I 1 I 1 I i I I 1 I I I I 1 I I 1J.4 I I I I 1 I I I 1 1 I I 1 I I 1 I I 1 I I 1 I I 1 I I I 1 1
101 1111 1'1. 11 1 1 111,(111 11 11 111 1 1111 1 111 1 1 111 1 1 1111 1 1111 I
10
30
Oligoclase
50
Andesine
70
Lab radorite
90
An 100
Bytownite
13-26. Curve showing the maximum extinction angle of albite twins cut normal
to (OlD) for the plagioclase feldspars (Michel-Levis method).
FIG.
factory angles. In recorrung the extinction angle (Figure 13-26) the direction of the faster ray is used; otherwise no angle greater than 45
would be obtained. It will be noted that angles of 1912 or less appear
twice on the curve. From Ano to An21 the angle is negative, and for those
above An2l it is positive. In the absence of the (001: 100) edge- and this
is rarely present- positive and negative angles cannot b e distinguished.
260
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
26i
+40
tilti !1
+20
30
"
U"
0;10
-.::::::
,9..-
+10
:J*:p
++ 3D ,
+30
+t
-1 i
t=::::,?o....: __
-+-
10
'l:
~;i
,
-
p-J.~
/0
- 10
u>
!~
00."
-20
-
-30
30
10
Oligoclose
70
50
Ande si ne
Lobrodorite
Bytownite
90
An 100
IAnorthite
13-29. Diagram showing the m ethod of determining the two sets of extinction
angles (X and Y) in sections of combined Carlsb ad-albite twins cut normal to (010).
FIG.
albite twinning disappears, and the crystal appears to be a simple Carlsbad twin. In the 0 position both the albite and Carlsbad twinning
practically disappear.
The extinction angles Xl, X2 and YI , Y2 of the albite twins in each half
of the section (Figure 13-29) are measured. The average of the two
smaller (Y values) is given on the horizontal lines of Figure 13-30, and
the average of the two larger (X values) on the curves. The intersection
of the proper horizontal line with the appropliate curve gives a vertical
line that indicates the relative amount of the anorthite molecule.
At a composition of about An 2 0 Carlsbad twinning cannot be detected
in thin sections, and the method is not readily applicable. In this case the
maximum extinction angle for albite twins in sections normal to (010) is
00
Angle of the Rhombic Section. Pericline twinning when observed may
provide useful information (Figure 13-31). It is polysynthetic and results in lathlike individuals which may resemble albite twins as observed with the microscope. Howevcr, pcriclin e twin planes may h e almost normal to the direction of th e albite composition plane. Pcriclin ('
+3(r "'"
0
00
- 17
()'
'"
(001)
~~~"-------~
8
(b)
(01
13-31. The inclination of p ericlin e twin planes. (a) One inclination of th u (;1)111 position plane projec ted to show the rhombic section. (b) Pcri clin c tw ill pl rlll l's Oil
(010). The angle {j with (001) ranges fronl +37 0 to _17 0 (angle of Lhc rhulllbl C'
section) .
FIG.
262
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
(AnO) to a negative angle of 17 for anorthite ( Anl oo ), At about the intermediate composition of andesine (An.Jo ) the angle of inclination is
0 (Figure 13-31b). The range in the angles for the various types of
plagioclase as shown by Schmidt (1919) is given in Figure 13-32.
Combinations of albite and peri Cline twinning frequently appear in
alkali feldspar- p articularly in microcline. The combination produces
a distinctive grid pattern b etween crossed nicols. In addition, tongues of
80
o 60
""
' i\\0Y
S00\
40
Q)
c::
Ci.
u
>
i. 20
NO
Cl.
+30
",,/
~/'
Q)
Hi,h
c::
,gCl. 80
A ntipert!!.!!:... - I- -
100
.......
--
hOC
~
art
-.:.
\~.
S!,
~icra per
-10
,~
LOW TEMPERATURE
GROUP
Albife
Ci.
sonidine' te
cr;ptop
~
60 -"-
+10
sonidil!! - ----;;;
I:~
A~
_-
/'
/' ; thOc lo ~ e
/' An foperthlfe
o 40
-f
""
""
""
IY
V ""
20
+20
",,/
HIGH TEMPERATURE
GROUP
Q)
0>
c::
a
+40
263
-~---
- - e-'-":':"
Law
~
rlhOclOS
9.
h'f
Microc/ine - Perf~!.
L,........
------
Infermediate
_
\~~Maxi-
__ _
\',. m~m
-f
Albite
120
-20
o
1
30
10
Albite
Oligoc lase
50
Andesine
70
Lab radorite
90
Bytownite
Ab+An
An 100
1 Anorthite 1
FIG. 13-32. A curve showing the range in angles of inclination of pericline twins from
An. to An,oo. ( Afte r E. Schmidt.)
albite often penetrate the grid struchll'e at more or less regular intervals.
The intergrowth forms the pattern known as perthite (Figure 13-15).
Alkali Feldspar Group
The alkali feldspar of volcanic rocks is frequently sanidine, while
plutonic rocks yield orthoclase. Microcline is a common constituent of
pegmatites whilc adularia may be a vein mineral.
High- and low-temperatme groups of alkali feldspars have b een distinguished by MacKenzie and Smith (1956). When correlated with
X-ray data and composition, the optic angles for the alkali feldspars
indicate a high-temperature division (Figure 13-33) containing anorthclase, two forms of sanidine and a high-temperature albite. Orthoclase,
microcline, and low-temperature albite conslihlte a low-te mperalure
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
90
80
Or
13-33. The ran ge in optic angles for the alkali feldspars. (Afte r Tut/'/e, ID 5~;
Ma cKenzie and Smith, 1956. )
FIG.
(K,Na) AISi 3 0 s
MOllocli llio
L(3
= (\;1 ;)""
ncr = 1.518
n~ = 1.524
n'Y = 1. 5:26
21' = GO 1,072; Opt. ( - )
b = 'Y or Z , a /\ ex or X = +5 1,0 + 12,
c /\ (3 01' Y = - 14.0 (,0 - 2 1
Color. C olorless in lhin secli ons, hilt 111 :1)' 1)(' ('\o"d),
in cipi cllt :ll tc l':llioli ill ('()lll rn~ 1 w ill i (1l nrl'/', wlli c'll is dC 'lI r ,
O il :I ('('() 11 lit
Ill'
~64
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
~- -b
(0)
(b)
FIG. 13-34 a,b. Orientation diagrams of orthoclase. Sections (a) normal to the a-a.-'ds
and (b) parallel to (010).
265
KAISi 3 0 s
Monoclini c
DID
-++++-~' - b
o
a
(0)
(b l
FIG. 13-36 a,b. Orientation diagrams of adularia. Sections La) norm al to tho c - !lxl ~
FIG. 13-35. ( X 160) Orthoelase-cristobalite spherulite in volcanic glass.
'I
CS PC(' ill ll y (; IH1I'nl'l (lrisli( ' oj' T( lrliliry ~old 1111d sil vor on 's oj'
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
266
FIc .
267
type. The crystals are commonly minute and can b e identified only with
a r ather high-power obj ective. X-ray study indicates a triclinic phase.
SAN IDINE
Monoclinic
6357'
(K,N a)AISi 30 s
L(3 =
na = 1.517 to 1.520
n f3 = 1.523 to 1.525
n 'Y = 1.524 to 1.526
2V = 0 to 12; Opt . (-)
a 1\
c
FIC.
~x
(0 )
FIC.
(b )
13-38 o.h. Oricnt ati on (li :1gra ms of sa nicl ine. Secl ions p;\ r:1l1 ('l 10 (010) .
13-39. ( X 12) A single crystal of sanid ine which has suffered COJ'l'osion
Oil (,IH I,
end.
268
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
MICRO CLINE
Triclinic
La = 8953'
L{3 = 6410'
L-y = 9051'
KA1Si 30 s
269
n~
= 1.522 t o 1.526
= 1.525 to 1.530
2V = 77 t o 84; Op t . (-) .
Ax. pI. or -y or Z a re nea rly .1. (010 ). Angle
between trace of ax. pI. and edge (001 ): (010) = +5
c
z.
b
a
FIG. 13-41. ( x 15) A microeline section cut p arallel to (001). ( X nicols. J
(0)
(bl
13-40 a,b. Orien tation diagrams of microeline. Sections (a) norm al to the c-axis
and (b) parallel to (010).
FIG .
Color. Colorless in thin sections but may b e cloudy on account of incipient alteration.
Form. Microcline is usually found in subhedral to anhedral crystals.
Euhedral crystals are rarely seen in rock sections.
Cleavage. Perfect parallel to {~Ol} , less perfect parallel to {OlO}, imperfect parallel to {llO} and {lID}.
Relief. Low, n < balsam.
Birefringence. W eak, ny - no = 0.007, so interference colors are gray
and white of the first order.
Extinction. Extinction angle on (001) = + 15 0 , on (010) = + 5 .
Orientation. Cleavage traces on (010) are about parallel to ' the faster
ray.
Twinning. Poly synthetic twinning is almost universal in microcline.
The twinning is in two directions, on e according to the albite law
( {OlD} = twin-plane), and th e other according to the p ericlin c law
(b-axis or [010] = hvin -axis) . This usually gives the so-called gridiron
or quadrille structurc (Figure 13-41) , th e two sets of lam ellae bein g at
right angles. The t'vvin lamellae are usually spindle shaped and th e ('xtinction usually wavy.
FIG.
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
270
271
ANORTHOCLASE
Triclinic
La = 906'
L{3 = 6342'
L-y = 9017'
(Soda Microcline)
(N a,K)AISi 30 s
ncr
= 1.522 t o 1.536
1.526 to 1.539
l.527 to 1.541
n 'Y
2V = 43 to 54; Opt. (-).
Ax. pI. nearly -L to {01O I
n~
FIG.
Occurrence. The characteristic occurrence of anorthoclase is in sodarich igneous rocks such as rhomb porphyries. It is sometimes found in
pegmatites. It is a comparatively rare mineral.
I --+--=b
Plagioclase Group
(bl
FIG. 13-43 a,b. Orientation diagram of anorthoclase. Sections (a) normal to the
c-axis and (b) parallel to (010).
(0)
l3 - ~fiR
1 3-~fi b
J3 - ~O
1:\-/1
13-18
I :I- :.W
1:1-:\0
1 : 1-~1
1:1 :12
1:1-/111
1:1 /iO
I
272
1.590,
1.5801
7 /
:17 /
1.580
-1-------t----+---:;;77/Libr/~=-7'7""',c=di:::::::J 1.570
1.570rl
1.5601---1
/ / 1
7/ //
273
1.560
fi
fi
1.550
1.590
1.540
1.580
~
1.530
1.570
1.520
0
...i"
fil
1.520
30
10
70
50
90
nl
An 100
1.560
(0)
(001l
(010),
fi2
1.590
1.550
....
1.5BO
fi2
(OOi)
(010)
,;'
1. 540
k:
1.570
.:;:.-
1. 530
1.560
1.520
30
10
I Albi te I
Oligoclase
50
Andesine
70
La bradorite
90
Bytown ite
An 100
IAnor1I111i' I
13-46. Curves showin g th e indices of refraction n, and n, of cleavage n:t k(' ~ ill
the plagioclase feldspars. (After T suhoi.)
FIG .
1.5401
7~
7 /
I ",/ I
1.520 1
Ab
I
10
11.530
,.
I
30
I
50
(b)
.!
70
90
'1.520
100
An
13-45 a,b . (a) Indices of refraction of norm al plagioclase. (Chayes, 1952.) (b)
Indices of refraction of plagioclase inverted to high-temperature modifications by
heating. (Smith, 1957.)
FIG.
forms and precise indi ces determin ed (Smith, 1957). These arc givc" ill
Figure 13-45b.
The determination of th e index of refraction of glass for med 1>y l lli \
fusion of plagiocl ase has b een utilized as a method of icl enlifl <.; :r I in"
(Foster, 1955 ). Selected pl agioclase fragments as free as possible i'roll'
impurities are placed in platinum foil. Th e material is th en 110:1I Cd I()
about 1500C wilh th e oxygen-gas hlowpipe and qu oneh ed in wnln.
The incl cx of' rcfr<r cli on of' lil c gl:lss i'orrtwcl is dele rmin ed hy 11'0 illllll( 'rsion IIwll'o(i willt illd('x li(I"id ~ . H, i'r:,di v<l illlli c('s for pl:r gioci "s() glass
a m s:g,Ii(i('I IIII ()i' 11' 0 ()dgill irl pl ll gi()( 'llIs(' ( I"igll n : 1:1-1(7).
274
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
10
30
70
50
90
Anl00
1.570
1.560
1.550
1.540
n
1.530
1.520
/V
1.510
1.500
1.490
1.480
80
/, .570
90
+/
.560
80
.550
V-
FIG.
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
An 100
.530
.520
1.510
.500
/90
100 crop
I
I
I
I
.....
1.490
"0
I
I
I
.480
Labradorite
Bytownite
10,
20
30?
I
Anor-
I
I
t hite
0.014
0.014
0.013
0.013
0.012
0.012
a 0.011
13-49. The axial angle 2V for norm al plagioclase. (After ReinhanZ, 1931.)
An
Andesine
. J-./'
+V
\ "'- -...-/
1
90
'"~
I--"
70
.540
Albite Oligoclase
FIG.
70
.580
1.580
275
50 I.
0.011 ~
~
0.010
0.010
0;009
0.009
0.008
O.OOB
0.007
0.007
10
90 AntOO
70
30
50
13-48. The bi re frin gence of normal pla g ioclase. (M odified frolll C/l(lyes, 1952. )
FIG.
or
276
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
ALBITE
Tl'iclinic
An o- lo
= 1.527 to 1.533
n fJ = 1.531 to 1.537
n.., = 1.538 to 1.542
2V = 77 to 82; Op t. (+)
'n a
277
Frc. 13-51. ( X 12) Albite showin g curved twin lamellae caused by deformation.
Frc. 13-52. ( X30 ) Albite intergrown with microcline in a perthitie tex ture.
Tri(:lill i('
An lO- 30
1.533 to 1..'543
nil = 1.537 t o 1. 548
n.., = 1. 542 Lo 1.551
2 If = 82 to 00 ; Opt. (+) or ( -)
na
278
MINERAL DESCRIPTION S
279
in metamorphic rocks. The composition An50 marks the boundary between silicic (or acidic) and calcic (or b asic) igneous rock types.
L ABRADORITE
Anso- 7o
Triclini c
na
= 1.554 t o 1.564
n f3 = 1.558 t o 1.569
ny = 1.562 to 1.573
2V = 7()0 to 90; Opt . (+ )
ANDESINE
Triclinic
An 30-50
2V =
na = 1.543 to 1.554
nf3 = 1.548 to 1.558
ny = 1.551 t o 1.562
76 to 90; Opt. (+ ) or (-)
FIG. 13-53. ( x 15) Labradorite crystals showing albite twi nnin g. ( X ni lI) ls. )
Form. Labradorite occurs in euhedral to anh edral crys tals. TIll' 1111 _
hedral crystals are often large as compared with thosc of other pl llg]o.
clases.
Cleavage. {00l} p erfect, {OlO} lcss p crfect, {llO} and {lJ O} ill'lWri'( '(' I,
Relief. Fairly low, n> balsam. (For indiccs of clcavage flakvs S ( ' (I
Figurc 13-46.)
Birefringence. Wcak, 11-)' - n" = 0.008 to 0.009; intcrrere nee co lol's
arc gray or white of the first ord er.
Exl illclion. Th e maximum ex tin ctioll an gle ill alhite twillS ( lw ilillillg
accordillg to th e a lbite la w) va ri es I'rolll 27~ 0 to 39. Til e (,,\ Iill('(ioll
IG" ; Oil ( ()I() ~
all glo Oil (001) (kavagv fl akts var ivs 1'1'0111 _7 to
!lakes, fl'(Hl1
lri 10
2Do.
I \" lllllill ~. A~ ill 11 11111 ('.
281
280
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
BYTOWNITE
Triclinic
An7 o- 9o
FIG. 13-55. ( x 15) Bytownite showing albite and Carlsb ad twinnin g. ( X ni cols. )
Distinguishing Features. Bytovmite is distinguished from oth er plag ioclases by extinction angles and refractive indices (Figures 13-26, 13-4511 ).
Occurrence. Bytownite usually occurs in gabbros, anorthosites, or
b asalts, but it is a comparatively rare mineral.
ANORTHITE
An~O- 100
T r i(:iil lio
Color. Colorless.
Form. Anorl hile occurs in anh e clra l to s lI hh c c1ral plates or h ilts.
C leavage. {OOI} p c rrcc t, {OlO} les s p e rfe ct, { IIO } and { IIO } ill'l)( ' rf( ('1.
H e lie/'. 'Fair, 1/
hal satrl . (For illdi ees of ('k:,va g <' f1 :lk( s s(( Fi g lll'tI
>
J :'3-'1 G. )
Bil'('fl'i ll ~(, II <'T .
() . ()I :~ ;
282
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
283
THE F ELDSPATHOIDS
Mineral
Chpm ical
("om position
Crystal
syste m
Leucite.
N e pheline.
Cancrinite ..
Socialite . ...
Haiiyne .. . .
Meli li te .. . .
KAI
NaAI
N a AI + C0 3
N a AI + Cl
NaAI + S
Ca,Mg,AI
Indices of refraction
n cr
n,
n,
n
n
n,
=
=
=
=
=
=
LEUCITE
Pseudoisometric
KAl(Si0 3)2
na = 1.508
n"'( = 1.509
Color. Colorless in thin sections.
Form. Leucite practically always occurs in euhedral crystals. Th e
crystal form is the trapezohedron {211}, which shows octagonal sections.
It often contains inclusions, and these may be arranged in a regular
manner, either radially or concentrically (Figure 8-12).
b
FIC. 13-56 0,1). ( X I 5) (II) Lell cilc showin g an 1II1 cqllall y dcvcloped lr:Ij.""'I.olll"ci,ul
outlinc. (b) Thc salllc crystal showiJl g lwinning. ( X ni cols.)
ny -
11 "
d e l !'e l!'d
hy
u sin g Lh e sensilive-violeL l es t plale. M inille crys Lals Iliay IIoL sll()w lilly
IJircfl"i Il gC' II CC.
Exljll cl jOll. I s ()fl (' II W :IV )'.
Twinnin g. /\ (" 11 : 1J"i1( ' I( 'I" i ~ li ( ' 1'1 ': 11111"(' (lr k\l (' i!J ' is III(' ("()fllpli(,I1I( ,(l polysy "lll('li l' l \Vi lill ili g ill Sl 'Vt ' n d dill ('(in ll s. \V lddl 01 1( '11 I'I 'S ( ' III"II 'S 111111 of'
284
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
285
eN a,K) (Al,Si )
20 4
(Eleoli te in pa rt)
FH: . 13-59.
Hexagonal
(Hexagonal subsystem)
n , = 1.527 to 1.543
nw = 1.530 to ] .547
Opt. ( -)
Color. Colorless to turbid in thin sections. It may show rows of inclusions.
F orm. Nepheline occurs in short prismatic hexagonal crystals (phenocrysts) in dense rocks and in anhedra in grained rocks. The crystals have
( X 12:
Anh edral and e uh cdral lIcphelille crystals ill thi" Mlrl" " .
( X nicols.)
rectangular and hexagonal sections and sometimcs show zona l stl'l 1('(1 11'1 '
(Figme 8-27).
Cleavage. Impcrfect parall e l to {lOlO} , not always appal'en l.
Relicf. Very low, n ahout the same as balsam hilt II sll ;rlly s l i ~hll y
high cr.
Birefringe nce. VVc; lk, II",
II ,
0.008 to (UlO/I; illtl'l'r( 'l'l'II ('(' ('olms :II'!
gray o r t h(' fil'st ol'd (' I'.
Extin("lioll, ]>ul';rll ('1 rol' 1,(,( 'I" " gl" :11' s('('li()I\S, 11:lsnl S{'(' liOliS ,, 1'( ' (lnrk
hl 'l wel 'II (; t'oss ('d II /vols.
286
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
Hexagonal
287
SODALITE
3N aAISi0 4 .N aCI
I sometri c
n = 1.483 to 1.487
Color. In thin sections colorless to gray, often with dark borders.
Form. Sodalite occurs in six-sided euhedral crystals (cross sections of
dodecahedra) and in anhedra.
Cleavage. Imperfect parallel to {1l0}, more likely to show on edges
of the slide.
Relief. Fair, n < balsam.
Birefringence. Nil.
Extinction. D ark behveen crossed nicols.
Distinguishing Features. Sodalite resembles analcime, but thc lattcr is
usually secondary. It may be necessary to make microchemical tests to
confirm the determination of sodalite.
Alteration. Sodalite is readily altered to zeolites.
Related Minerals. N osean ( sometimes called noselite) is a rcla led
mineral containing the sulfate radical in the place of chlorine.
Occurrence. Sodalite is practically confined to soda-rich igneous rocks
such as syenites and trachytes. It is especially prominent in rocks called
sodalite syenites. It is a common associate of nepheline.
HAUYNE
(Lazuritc in part)
I sorn cl.ri o
n = 1.496 to 1.510
With hauyne, often given in the less euphonious variant haliynile, is ill cluded lazurite, here considered to b e simply a sulfide-bearing h:LiiYII( ,.
(The name lazurite is discarded because of its Similarity to lazuliLe. )
Color. Colorless, gray, pale blue, bluish green to deep blu e in L11l11
sections. The color may vary within a single crystal. Transparent to
h'anslucent.
Form. Hauyne usually occurs in cuh edral to anhedral crystals and ill
crystal aggregates. Both octahedrons and dodecahedrons arc comlllOIl
crystal forms.
Cleavage. It may show imperfect cleavage (dodecahedral , as ill
sodalitc ) .
Relief. Bather low, n < hals:1m.
Birefringence, Tlaii )' ll o is Il sll :i1ly isolropi c, hilt o('c:ls'ion :dly it 11111
show very weak l)ircf'rill gc lI C'(' lip to ~lh()l lt 0.00 /1.
Dislillgllisllillg FCHlI'rcs. Il ilii )' II C l'l'sc'lllhl('s sod :i1ilc', hill il s r( ,rrll( 'llyo
illcl(lx is Ili gllC'l' Il ilcl lIs l'iI 'IIVlI g(\ I( ,ss IlI'olllill( '111 tl llil l tl ll il or sndil lii n. Till
288
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
Tetragonal
n , = 1.626 to 1.629
nw = 1.632 to 1.634
Opt. ( -)
289
(Wernerite)
m[3NaAISi 30 s.NaCI] = M a
n[3CaAI 2 Si 2 0 s.Ca(O,C0 3 ,S0 4)] = Me
T e tI' U~ ()ll l d
n , = 1.540 to 1. 571
nw = 1. 550 to 1. 607
Opt. ( - )
FIG.
or
290
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
Z E OLITES
Mineral
Analcime .. . .
Heulandite ...
Stilbite . . . .
Chaba zite . .
Natrolite .
Mesolite .
Thomsonite.
Scolecite .
Chemi cal
composition
Na
Ca
Ca,Na
Ca,Na
Na
N a ,Ca
Na,Ca
Ca
Crystal
syst em
Isometric
Mono clinic
Mono clinic
Mono clini c
Orthorhomhi r
Mono clinic
Orthorhombic
Mono clinic
n"
n~
ny
n = l.487
1 .496-1 .499 1. 497- 1.501 1.501- 1.505
1 .494-1.500 1 .498- 1.504 1 .500- 1 .508
n" = 1. 478- 1 .485, n y = 1 .480- 1 .4 90
1 .473- 1.480 1 476- 1. 482 1. 485- 1. 19:1
1 .50.5
1 505
1 .50G
l. 512- l. 530 1 . 513- 1 . 5 ~l 2 J .51 8- 1 .542
1 .519
1 .512
1 .519
-
---
(Analcite)
n
Isometric
l. 487
t
t
\
FIG.
The zeolites are hydrous sodium calcium aluminum silicates that commonly occur as secondary minerals in cavities of subsilicic volcanic rocks,
291
13-61. ( X I5) Euhedral analcime with rongh trap ezohcclral oulli ne.
292
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
SILICATES ; FRAMEWORK STRUCTURES (TECTOSILICA TES )
293
HEULANDITE
Monoclinic
= 8834'
L.{3
Monoclinic
L.{3 = 51
201
a ~ . ------,=-
FIG. 13-63. ( X 12) Tap ercd crystal s of stilbite in radial arrangc mc nt. ( X lIi (;() I ~. )
I' I(). I:) (H . ( X 12 ) SllIllil tlw ill" 'III" .d"d 11 111 lill i ''; I"
/I
294
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
295
N a2A12SiaOlo.2H20
Orthorhombic
c
I
001
I~"o
y
-b
CHABAZITE
Monoclinic
(Pseudorhombohedral )
n"
noy
1.478 to 1.485
1.480 to 1.490
2V = 0 to 32; Op t. (+)
.Z
FIG.
1
13-66. Orientation diagram of natrolite. Section parallel to ( 100 ).
296
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
297
(l
M ono<:lil lit:
na
n fJ
1.505
l.505
l.506
n'Y
2V = ca. 80; OpL. (+)
c 1\ (3 or Y = 2 Lo 5
b
FIG. 13-67 a,b. ( X 15) (a) Natrolite showing a radial acicular group. (b) Thc same
298
299
Orthorhombic
= 1.512 to 1.530
= 1.513 to 1.532
CaA12Si30 1o.3H20
Monoclilli e
= 89 18'
L.{3
na - 1.512
nfJ = 1.519
n.., = 1.519
2V = 36 0 ; Op t. ( - )
'Y or Z, c /\ a or X
- 15 0 t o - 18
F Ir..
(' In
])isliJl g lli shin~ Fealures. S('o lcc il( ' is IIIII dl lik( , 1I :!lrolil n :llId 0 111 ('1' rnr( '
fihroll s 'l.(loli l c's. Tli t ) ohliqll( ' (', lill (' li o ll 01' :i1I() "l 17" il lid Iwi lillili g 11 1'(
111 0 11I()s l d f~ lill ( ' l lv( ' l'i 'il lllI " ' ~ (II 'wlll( '('II(1,
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
300
Occurrence. Scolecite is a secondary mineral found in cavities of
igneous rocks, especially basalts.
REFERENCES
Silica
Brown, C. S., et al.: The Growth and Properties of Large Crystals of Synthetic
Quartz, Mineral. Mag. , vol. 29 , pp. 858-874, 1952.
Coes, L. J., Jr.: A New Dense Crystalline Silica, Science, vol. 118, pp. 131132, 1953.
Eitel, W .: "The Physical Chemistry of the Silicates," pp. 620-629 , University
of Chicago Press, Chicago, 1954.
Hale, D. R: The Properties of Synthetic Quartz Crystals and Their Growin g
Technique, Brush Strokes, Brush Development Company, Cleveland,
1952.
_ __ : The Laboratory Growing of Quartz, Science, no. 2781 , pp. 393-394,
1948.
Kerr, P. F. , and E. Armstrong: Recorded Experiments in the Production of
Quartz, Bull. Geol. Soc. Am., vol. 54, suppl. 1, pp. 1-34, 1943.
Ramsdell , L. S.: The Crystallography of "Coesite," Am. Mi.n eralogist, vol. 40 ,
pp. 975-982 , 1955.
Tuttle, O. F.: The Variable Inversion Temperature of Quartz as a possible
GeologiC Thermometer, Am. Mineralogist, vol. 34, pp. 723-730, 1949.
Feldspars
Baskin, Y.: A Study of Authigenic Feldspars, ]. Ceol. , vol. 64 , pp. 132-155,
1956.
Bowen, N. L. , and O. F. Tuttle : The System NaAISi,0 ,-KAISi30 s-H,O, ].
C eol., vol. 58, pp. 489-511 , 1950.
Bradley, 0 .: An Investigation of High-Temperature Optics in Some Naturally
Occurring Plagioclases, Mineral. Mag. , vol. 30, pp. 227-245 , 1953.
Calkins, F. C.: A Decimal Grouping of the Plagioclases, ]. C eol., vol. 25, pp.
157-159,1917.
Chayes, F.: Relations between Composition and Indices of Refraction in
Natural Plagioclase, Am. ]. Sci., Bowen Volume, pp . 85-105, 1952.
Chudoba, K.: "The Determination of the F eldspars in Thin Section" (trans.
by W. Q. Kennedy) , pp. 1-61, Thomas Murby & Co. , London, 1933.
D ay, A. L. , E. T. Allen , and J. P. Iddings: The Isomorphism and Thermal
Properties of the Feldspars, Carnegie Inst. Wash. Publ. 31, pp. 1-95,
1902.
Donnay, J. D. H .: Plagioclase Twinning, Bull. C eol. Soc. Am., vol. 54, pp.
1645-1652, 1943.
Emmons, R C. , and R. M. Gates: Plagioclase TwinJaing, Bull. Ceoi. Soc. Am.,
vol. 54, pp. 287-304, 1943.
Foster, W . R: Simple Method for the D etermination of the Plagioclase F eldspars , Am. Min eralogist, vol. 40, pp. 179-185, 1955.
C ay, P ., and J. V. Smith: Phase Relations in the Plagioclase Feldspars: Composition Range Ano-An2o, Acta. Cryst. , vol. 8, pp. 64-65 , 1955.
301
303
Clinopyroxenes
CHAPTER
Enstatite
MgSi0 3
14
AUGITE
Co (Mg, Fe)(Si03)2
[(Al Fe)203] x
I
I
Clinohyper sthene
(Mg,Fe) Si0 3
I
!
Ferrohypersthene
(Fe, Mg) Si03
PYROXENE GROUP
AMPHIBOLE GROUP
EPIDOTE GROUP
Orthopyroxenes
Enstatite
Hypersthene
Clinopyroxenes
Diopside
Augite
Pigeonite
Hedenbergite
Aegirine-augite
Aegirine
Jadeite
Spodumene
Orthoamphiboles
Anthophyllite
Clinoamphibol es
Cummingtonite
Grunerite
TremolitcActinolite
Hornblende
Lamprobolite
Riebeckite
Glaucophane
Orthorhombic
Zoisite
Monoclinic
Clinozoisite
Epidote
Picdmontite
Allanite
II
I
I
I
:
PIGEONITE:
14-2).
.'10.C)
Na Fe (Si0 3 )2
Aegirine
FIG. 14-1. A diagram showing the approximate chemical relations of the metasilicatcs
that comprise the pyroxene group. A: Enstatite-Ferrosilite series; B: ClinoenstatitcClinoferrosilite series; C: Diopside-Hedenbergite series; D: Jadeite-Aegirine series.
Augite and pigeonite are intermediate in composition. Spodumene represents a species
on the border of the pyroxene group . Aegirine-augite is intem1ediate.
Aegirine
C/I X
Spodumene
;;;g;;;;;;;-ougite
127"
<j,o
PYROXENE GROUP
S~0dumene
' I
Jodeite
Pioeon/te
0
Jadeite
Na Al (Si03)2
m(Ca,Mg)(Si0 3)21'
n (Mg, Fe) Si0 3
I
FeSi0 3
Ferrosi lite
Clino enstatite
DIOPS ID E
I
MgSi0 3- - - - - - - (Co, Mg)(Si03)2 :
Hypersthene
(Mg,Fe) Si03
Aegirine - augite
I _-----
.______---rFIG .
0-----
304
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
Augite and pigeonite are by far the most common minerals of the
group. Jadeite and aegirine are known as soda pyroxenes.
@~o,,~~
FIG.
100
305
The Orthopyroxenes
HYPE RSTHENE
ENSTATITE
(inc. Bronzite)
MgSi0 3
C{
Orthorhombic
(Mg,Fe) Si0 3
OrthOl'hom biro
1.67:3 to 1.715
n"
nil = 1.678 to 1.728
n -y = 1.683 to 1.731
2 V = 63 to 90; Opt. (-)
C{ or X, b =
{3 or Y, c = 'Y or Z
1~lmo
y---t--t o= X~'-b
I
z
14-5. Orientation diagra m of hypersth cnc. Sce tion
para llel lo (LOO) .
F IG.
l 'y
11 " -
0.0'10 I n O.Olfi; Ih e
In ax ll1ll1l1l
306
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
307
Hedenbergife
i
iii
Pigeonite
Aegirine
Augite
Augite
Jadeile
1.85
1.80
1.80
1.7 5 n
,\ ,,,
,
" \\
nT"
,\
n,.
" \\
\
-- '-
1.70
nfX-- ::~:: -
1.65 1 ! "
, I ! , "I
I !
,
,
I
25
50
30 40 50 60
(Ca.Mg)( Si O,), ... (Co, Fe) {SiO~,
Fe SiO ,
r" "
I , , ! , I ' ! , ,I
50
100
No Fe (SiO,), Co (Mg , Fe) {SiO,1,
[{AI, Fe ),O ,].
I ! ;- ;-=J3lL 65
50
100
NO,AI (SiO, ),
-+-
FIG.
FIG.
010
Distinguishing Features. The pleochroism is the most distinctive feature of hypersthene. It resembles some varieties of andalusite, but the
latter mineral is length-fast, whereas hypersthene is length-slow.
Occurrence. Hypersthene is found in a number of igneous rocks but
is especially characteristic of norite, hypersthene gabbro, some andesite,
and a p eculiar hypersthene granite known as charnockite.
)(,7
. - b
a
(0 )
The Clinopyroxenes
(b)
14-9 a,b. Orientation diagram s of diopside. Sections (a) norm al to Ih, (', ,,I,
and (b) parallcl to ( 010).
FIG.
DIOPSIDF.
Ca(Mg,Fe) (Si0 3) 2
M onoclinic
L(3 = 7410'
na = 1.650 t o 1.698
n~ = 1.657 to 1.706
n-y = 1.681 to 1.727
2V = 58 t o 60; Opt (+)
b = (3 or Y , c A 'Y or Z = -37 to -44
308
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
309
extinction, but sections cut parallel to {01O} give the large extinction
angles characteristic of diopside. The parting flakes give an uncentered
optic-axis interference figure that serves to distinguish it from the orthopyroxenes. Diallage is especially characteristic of coarse-grained gabbros.
AUGITE
Monoclini c
= 7410'
L{3
= 1.688 to 1.712
= 1.701 to 1.717
nor = 1.713 to 1.737
2V = 58 to 62; Opt. (+ )
or y, c /\ 'Y or Z = - 45 t o - 54
na
n~
b = {3
010
,.-:
J~
..
-b
100
I
o
(oj
(b)
1"1G. 14-12 a,b. Orientation diagrams of augite. Sections (a) normal to 1h(' C-lI xl,
and (b) parallel to (010 ) .
FIG. 14-11. (X20) Diopside showing cleavage parallel to (110). The two directions
are almost at right angles.
310
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
311
mCaMg(Si0 3h
n(Mg,Fe)Si0 3
(Enstatite-au gite)
Monocl ini c
LfJ
(?)
1.698 t o 1.725
.c x 'xl
) -- b
010
(0)
FIG.
FIG.
-.u.:..Aa>
.- (
[0
th e c- :I\I ,
312
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
Monoclinic
= 7430'
Ca(Fe,Mg) (SiO a) 2
313
Intermediate between
aegirine and augite
in chemical composition
L(3
Monoclini n
na = 1.680 t o 1.745
n{3 = 1.687 to 1.770
n "( = 1. 709 to 1. 782
2V = ca. 60; Opt. (+) or ( - )
b = (3 or Y, c 1\ a or X = -15 to - 38
na = 1. 732 to 1.739
n {3 = 1.737 to 1.745
n "( = 1.751 to 1. 757
2V = 60 ; Opt. (+)
b = (3 or Y, c 1\ 'Y or Z = - 48
c
yO;
ps",)( "K ; X, d
010
-A ",,) /. /v,7 , ) 1
(0)
(0)
b
010
> - b
(b)
FIG. 14-15 a,b. Orientation diagrams of hedenbergite. Sections (a) nonnal to the
e-axis and (b) parallel to (010).
(b)
1101'111 :11 10
Ii".
314
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
Monoclinic
L{3 = 739'
NaFe(Si0 3)2
= 1.745 to 1.777
= 1.770 to 1.823
n-y = 1.782 to 1.836
2V = 60 to 66; Opt. (- )
b = (3 or Y , c 1\ IX or X = - 2 to _10
nil
315
AEGIRINE
na
N aAl(Si0 3) 2
(Jade in part)
na
M'ollo(:lilli n
L{3 = 7 ~o' I 1 1 :l '
= 1. 655 to 1. 6GG
= 1.659 to 1.674
n-y = 1.667 to 1.688
2V = 70 to 75; Opt. (+ )
b = {3 or Y, c 1\ 'Y or Z = -30 to _ %0
n il
/' 1'>/ /L
x..
/'1
) --b
o
(0 )
(b)
14-17 a,b. Orientation diagrams of aegirine. Sections (a) normal to the c-axis
and (b) parallel to (010).
FIG .
IX
or
316
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
Orientation. The extinction direction near est the c-axis is the slower
ray.
Twinning. Twins with {100} as twin-plane are occasion ally found.
Interference Figure. The figure is biaxial positive with a large axial
angle. The axial plane is {OlO}. Dispersion, l' < v .
Distinguishing Features. J adaite is distinguished from nephrite (variety of tremolite-actinolite) by larger extinction angle and higher refractive indices. From diopside it is distinguished by smaller maximum extinction angles and columnar habit.
317
LiAl(Si0
Monocl ini(\
Lf3 = 6910'
3) 2
na = 1.651 t o 1.668
n~ = 1.665 to 1.675
n-y = 1.677 to 1.681
2TT = 54 to 69; Opt. (+)
b = f3 or Y, c /\ l' or Z = - 23 to - 27
.--
. '-'
-r, ~o"
110
100
la
(a)
(a )
(b)
FIG.
Color. Colorless in thin sections. Some varieties show color (: 1111 0 111 ),
stine for kunzite, greenish for hiddenite) in thick sections a lld ill'( '
pleochroic.
Form. Spodumene usually occurs in euhedral crystals tahular plIrnll( '1
to {100} and elongated in the direction of [001] . Crystals as a 1'111 0 111'(1
inclined to be large but are sometimes on the order of scvcral lI1illilll('l (' I'S,
Cleavage. Perfect parallel to {110} (110 /\ 110) = 93 . Pa.rtill g pllr: d
leI to {laO}, which is often more prominent than the clcavago.
Relief. F airly high , n > balsam.
Birefringence. Moderate, 'I~ - n" = 0.013 to 0.027; ti le IIlll xi ll II II II
interference color varies from upper Rrst order Lo mjcldle second ordnl'.
Extinction. Th e maximum ex tin ction angle in l.oll gitrrclillllI S('e[iOll8
varies rro m 23 to 27 . Tn cross secLions lh(, ex tinction is p:1J'ldl oJ or Sy ill o
nwtrieal . Or ienled scclions elll parall(1 10 tho (100) pu rlill g I",vo 1'11 1'11 1101
ex ti llclion .
OriuIItnliull. Tho oxU lleLlolI dlroe\.lon that makes lito Sll1ulI (lj' i lll ~ 11
wit'h. I'ho dllil V\lgO Il'ut"us Is till' slowol' my.
14-18 a,b. Orientation diagrams of jadeite. Sections (a) normal to the c-axis
and (b) parallel to (010) .
FIG.
10
II,, (. ,," ,
318
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
3] 0
With the exception of crossite, in all the amphiboles the plane of tll(l
optic axes is {OlO}.
AMPHIBOLE GROUP
The amphiboles may b e considered in terms of Rve series (1) anthophyllite, (2) cummingtonite-grunerite, (3) tremolite-actinolite, (4)
aluminous amphibole, and (5) soda amphibole.
. . .",e'
FIG.
The anthophyllite series is orthorhombic while the others are monoclinic. The composition RSi0 3 is fundamental to the group with
R=Ca,Mg,Fe. The anthophyllite, cummingtonite-grunerite and tremoliteactinolite series consist essentially of a range in RSi0 3 compositions,
while the aluminous and soda amphiboles contain Al and Na in addition
to the fundamental composition. The general chemical relationships are
outlined below.
The amphiboles have rhombic to pseudohexagonal cross sections and
perfect cleavage parallel to {110} at angles of about 56 and 124, as
shown in Figure 14-20. Twinning parallel to {100} is fairly common.
A J"'IPHIBOLE
.
Mmeral
Chemical
't'
compOSI IOn
Gnoup
na
n/3
n..,
2V
".
,
c: 'Y or y,
----------
S 1l {A nthOp1y
IlI'
lte .
M F
r g e
{1.598
1.652
1.615
1.6G2
1.623} 170900
1.676
-
I. G39
{ 1.G57
I. G57
Grunerite .
. .. I F e
{ 1.663
1.600
CaMgFc
~Tre.molite_act.inolite
{ 1 . 628
~
(me. nephnte)
I. 614
g Hornblende .. .
CaMgFeAl {
1.675
1 .670
::g Lamprobolite .
CaMgFeAl {
1.692
Riebeckite . . ..
NaFe
1 . 693
1.621
Glaucophane.
NaAIFe
{ 1.655
1. G45
1. 669
1. 686
1.684
1. 697
1.613
1 . 6L1 4
1.618
1.691
1. 683
1 730
1 : 695
1. 693} G4 800
1. 760
1 . 697
Lf\l'~(,
() Ill"
I.G39}
II
0.-s
. 1F cMg
Cummingtonite.
'8
1.638
1. 664
11. G68
450
() O
I Ii :LO"
RIi '
0"
ANTHOPHYLLITE
(I,
Color.
VIII'I( ' UI'S
OI'I.IIC)I'II()IIII)i C1
n"
n~
,
(,(dlll'ld
320
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
321
Clinoamphiboles
MONOCLINIC AMPHIBOLES
TREMOLITE
Ca2( Mg ,Fe15 (OH12(5 i 4 0 ll lz
(Kupffer itel
M9 7 (OH)2 (5i4 0 11 12
ox
ACTI NOLITE
Caz(Fe, Mg15 (O H}z.{Si 4 0 Il 1l
I
;; Xv ')
) _lJ
0-'
Glaucophane
I,
I,
LAMPROBOLITE
Ca2 Fe';; Fe';; Oz(Si 4 01l 12
NEPHRITE
Ca2{Mg,Fe)5 {OHl z {S i4 0Il)2
Cummingtonite
{Fe,Mg1 7 (OHlz {Si 4 0 u12
zt
(a)
(b)
i .
{Ferrot remolitel \
CalFe5 {OH)z (Si 4 Ollll
Grunerlte
Fe7 (OH 12 {Si 4 0 nll
Ri ebeck it e
NaFe"' ISi0 3 12 ' Fe" SI0 3
FIG. 14-21 a,b. Orientation diagrams of anthophyllite. Sections (a) normal to the
FIG.
MOllo<:/illio
1.639 to 1.657
1.645 to 1.669
n-y = 1.664 to 1.686
2T1 = 68 t o 87; Opt. ( +)
b = {3 or Y, c 1\ 'Y or Z = -15 to - 20
na
nf3 =
Y(~~Ol~ '_ b
(01
Fit :, 1t1 - 2:_~ fl.lJ , ()dj llll :tl llI li d lllg l lltH "l 0 1
li-lI xll!
II II.!
III
( 0 10 ) ,
(b)
( ' IIIIIIldll g I Oli l l tl ,
( II )
IIClIIII III I n
I III'
322
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
FC7(OH)2(Si 4011) 2
Monoclinic
na = 1.657 to 1.663
n il
n."
= 1.684 to 1.697
= 1.699 to 1.717
323
o
(0)
(b)
14-24 a,b. Orientation diagrams of gruneritc. Sections (a) normal to thc c-axis
and (b) parallel to (010).
FIG.
MINERAL DESCRIPTION:\'
324
Monoclinic
= 7448'
L(3
na
n~
n "'(
b=
it
= 1. 600 t o 1. 628
= 1.613 to 1.644
= 1. 625 to 1. 655
325
>"
--b
(0 )
FlG .
(b )
lite.
Form. Tremolite-actinolite occurs in long prismatic crystals and columnar to fibrous aggregates. Asbestiform varieties are common. The typical cross section is rhombic with (UO 1\ 110) = 56 .
Cleavage. {UO} in two directions at angles of about 56 and 124.
Longitudinal sections show cleavage traces p arallel to the length. There
may be parting parallel to ( 100 ).
Relief. Fairly high, n > balsam.
326
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
NEPHRITE
(.Jade in part)
Ca2(Mg,Fe) 5(OH) 2(Si 40 11 ) 2
/
Monoclinic
n"
= 1. 600 to 1. 628
n f3
= 1.613 to 1.644
327
Monoclinic
L(3 = 752'
:)(;:>.J 010
:>- -
-0
o
io
(0 )
(b )
10
110 11
'" orX
Y cllow g r cc n
P a le green
P a le brown
Y cll ow g l'CCIl
GI'('r lli ~ I, b rowli
'YOI'
Olivc g rcc n
Gl'ccn
Gl'cr ni s h
Y(' ll olV
n .('dd iHio brown
'Y I II ' /,
> (j
01' ) '
Dark J; rcr ll
Dark ~ r(' c n
Da r k ~ 1' l)(' 11
Ihowli
H,('d hrowll
>"
or X .
fonll. C l ys l u ls ar(, p ris illilli (' ill Il il hil wi lli PSI'II<i o il (')'lIg<)II :d ( ' ro~s
sO<: li () ll ~ ( 110 1\ ITo r);;". I!)' ). (;1 )'S I Il I ~ 111'1' 1'I 1I1 ' l v ",,,II I tllli i/ ll n ll 'lI
( Fig"rl' Ii ~~ I ) .
328
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
,
FIG.
329
(Basaltic Hornblende)
Ca,Mg,Fe,AI silicate
Monoclinio
L(J = 7358'
= 1.670 t o 1.692
= 1. 683 t o 1. 730
ny = 1.693 to 1.760
2 V = 64 to 80; Opt. ( -)
b = (J or Y, c 1\ 'Y or Z = 0 t o - 12 0
n"
nf3
I' X
.--......
010
>
C",,1
)0
-- b
. ~X
FIG.
10
(0 )
Ib)
FJ(';. 14-30 11,/1. O "i c lIlll l iOIl d ia gr; llIls of' IlIl1Ip l'oiln lil ,. S, ... I iOll s ( 1/ )
c-I Lxi s alld (/1 ) pal'rtlkl lo ( 1I () ).
1I0rl 1111 I
lo tlu)
' Th,) 1I \1I1\( ) II/'II/ I/'() IIIIIII, ' W I" 1''''1" )''' '.1 I,y 1\ . I'. 1t,,1:'. "' " I Alii . M III, II'I'/0I:IIII, ~ ,
H2(1 H2H ( 11l11O ) I '" II,,, ,"1,,","1 1I',(l loIl y " " II" d 1' llI ldl /i ' !l/llllht"IIt/I ',
MINERAL DE SCRIPTIONS
330
(inc. Crocidolite)
Monoclinic
= 7610'
L(3
na = 1.693
n{3 = 1.695
n-y = 1.697
2V large; Opt. (-)
b = (3 or Y, c 1\ a or X = +5
331
xx:..:q 010
) -- b
-' ,
z~
0-
o
(0)
(b)
14-31 a.,17. Orientation diagram of ri ebeckite. Sections (a.) normal to thc c-axis
\
and (b) parallel to (010).
F!G.
332
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
333
N a 2MgaAb(OH) 2(Si.O ll ) 2
Monoclinic
L{3 = 77
na
= 1.621 to 1.655
= 1. 638 to 1. 664
noy = 1.639 to 1.668
2V = 0 to 68; Opt. (-)
b = (3 or Y; c 1\ 'Y or Z = - 4 to - 6
nil
'x
.-:.-- II
I I-X
(01
(b)
FIG. 14-32 a,b. Orientation diagrams of glaucophane. Sections (a) normal to the
c-axis and (b) parallel to (010).
and clinozoisite. Glaucophane schists are abundant in the Coast Rall g(!s
of California and are also found in Syra (Greece), Italy, and Japan, bill
are rare, taken the world over.
EPIDOTE GROUP
f3 or Y, violet; y or Z, blue.
Form. Glaucophane occurs in prismatic crystals or columnar aggregates. The cross sections are pseudohexagonal or rhombic.
Cleavage. {1l0} in two directions at angles of 56 and 124.
Relief. Fairly high, n > balsam.
Birefringence. Moderate, ny - n",
0.013 to 0.018; the maximum interference color is about sensitive violet, but the color of the mineral may
modify or even mask the interference colors.
Extinction. The maximum extinction angle in longitudinal sections is
very small (4 to 6 ). Cross sections have symmetrical extinction.
Orientation. The crystals are length-slow.
Interference Figure. The figure is biaxial negative with a small to
moderate axial angle. The axial plane is {01O}. Dispersion, r < v strong.
Distinguishing Features. The axial colors, together with the small extinction angle and amphibole cross section and cleavage, distinguish
glaucophan e from all other min erals except cross ile and gI as tald ito.
Orthorhombic
ZOISITE
OrLhorhOlill,il'
n",
n~
'/l oy
2 If
1.G06 to 1.700
1. GOG Lo I. 70:)
= 1.7021,0 1.7 18
( I)
/I
(~~)
/I
:0, "
01 '
01' /',
Ii
/1
(V
tI l'
IV
(no .\' ,
/1
III'
I'
334
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
C
" '~"O"
010
I I I -" - I I I
335
-- b
--~ a=Z
X
,r
,x
I
FIG. 14-34. Orientation diagrams of zoisite . Sections parallel to (100) . Orientation (1) .
I II() --b
I
FIG .
There are two varieties of zoisite: a non-ferrian variety with orientation (1) and anomalous interference colors, and a fenian variety with
orientation (2) and normal interference colors.
Color. Usually colorless in thin sections, but manganian zoisite (thulite) is pink and pleochroic.
Form. Zoisite usually occurs in columnar aggregates, but euhedral
crystals are not uncommon.
Cleavage. Perfect in one direction {OlO}.
Relief. High, n > balsam.
Birefringence. W eak to moderate, 11ry - n" = 0.006 to 0.018; th e interference colors in one variety (2) are normal; in the other variety (1 )
they are anomalous (deep blue) .
Extinction. Parallel in most sections.
Orientation. In some specimens (1) the crystals are length-fast; in
others (2) either length-fast or length-slow.
Twinning. Polysynthetic n vinning may be present.
Interference Figure. The interference figure is biaxial positive with a
moderate axial angle. The axial plane is either (1) {01O} or (2) {001 }.
Dispersion, (1) T < v distinct or (2) l' > v distinct.
Distinguishing Features. F enian zoisite (orientation 2) is distinguished from clinozoisite by normal interference colors. Non-fenian
zoisite (orientation 1) is distinguished from clinozoisite by a smaller
axial angle and by deep blue anomalous interference color.
Occurrence. Zoisite is a rather rare mineral found in some metamorphic rocks . Clinozoisite is much more common than zoisite.
FIG. 14-36 (/,b. ( X 20) Bladed zoisite crystals in a q uartz matrix. (a) O ,dlli '"
illumination an d (b) X nicols.
Monoclinic
CLINOZOISITE
Ca 2Ah(OH) (Si0 4) 3
(Iron-free Epidote)
rI "
= I. 7 10 Lo I. 7n
'/I ~
I. 7 l !i 1.0 I .78n
I .7 I!) 1.0 I .7:{11
II ~
(iV'
V
fJ "
(J 01'
1',
I:
1\
1.0
!JO
IV 01 '
Q
;
Op t.. ( I )
0" 1.(1 I I '2 u
(j'lo:\(),
336
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
OIO __
z_
337
1<"':::
(0)
b
FIG. 14-38 a,b. ( X 20 ) E lon ga ted crystals of clinozoisite sc t in q uartz. (1/ ) 0 1'<11 11 111
(PisLacitc)
Ca2 (Al,Fe)a(OTJ) (S i0 4) 3
Mnll()(:iilli o
(:J -
n" -
1,0 \. 7~H-
II ,\,
"
\. 720
(;tl:r"
338
y1 I 9:
z~
339
fC,....:
0/
100
(0)
(b)
F IG. 14-39 a,b. Orientati on diagrams of epidote. Sections ( a ) nomlal to the c-axis
and (b) parallel to (010 ).
.....
(Manganese E pidote)
Ca2(Al,Fe,Mn) ~ (OH ) (Si0 4) 3
Monociilli(;
= (;llo:lD'
.t.(3
na = 1.745 t o 1. 758
n f3 = 1.764 t o 1.789
n'Y = 1. 806 t o 1. 832
217 = 56 t o 86; Opt. (+ )
b = (3 or Y , c 1\ a or X = _ 5 t o _ 7
'l~e::O-h
z~
0 ./
100
(0 )
F IG. 14-41a,h. O rient ati on d iagra m of p ied illo ntit e . Sect io ns (II) 11 01'11," 1 In II" , (. ,,, '"
~ n d (7)) p 3ra liel to ( 010 ) .
Color. Vivid characteristic ax ial co lors: ye ll ow, o r;lll gc, n'd , v lt .1, '1.
Pleoch roi c : (I' or X, ),e1 low to o r a ll ge; (:l 01' Y, a lll c lli),s L lo vio lel; y 0 1' Z ,
~a rnlill C In d('('p n'd .
F orm. I I I forlll pi t 'd lll !) 111 il (' i ~ V(' I')' 1I11 1dl l ikl' t 'p id Oi(' .
C lc uvu ~t' . III
O LI O
d in T I !o ll ()O l l .
340
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
341
(O: t hite)
(Ca,Fe
II
2(AI,Ce,Fe
III
3(OH) (Si0 4 ) 3
na = 1.64
(a)
Monoclilli (;
L {3
to1.77
= 6!i
n f3 = 1.65 to 1.77
n.., = 1.66 t o 1.80
2V = large ; Opt. (-)
b = (3 or Y , c 1\ a or X = +360
'\~ l ):~--.
()
100
(0)
14-43 a,b . Orientation diagra ms of allan ite. Sections ((/) normal to tl,, (' I I\I ~
and (b) parallel to (010).
FIG.
(b)
FIG. 14-42 a,b. ( X 20) Piedmontite associated with quartz. (a) Ordinary illumination
and (b) X nicols.
Color. Brown and pleochroic from pale brown to dark browil in thill
sections.
Form. In form al lanite is similar to epidote, of which il is a cori'lln bearing varie ty. It often occurs in pa rall cl position as an overgrowtll 011
epidote.
Relief. Hi gh , 11 > b a lsa lll.
Cleavage. Impe rfect parallcllO {OOI} .
Birefringence. Hallwr slron g , lI y
1/ "
0.01 10 0.0:1; lht' illl( 'rf(lJ'(' II ('o
co lors a rc Il sll :dly IIla skcd hy II I(' ilrowli co lor of 111 0 IIlill( lrli l.
ExliliClioll. US \l Hll y p" rl ll( .I, li ke, o LlI t'1' IIH 'lltlH 'rs of 111 0 (\l?idul o gJ'OII l,"
OrionlIII iUII . Dlflkldll.o ()hlll!H,
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
342
Q
343
Alteration. Allanite is often altered or inverted to an amorphous substance with about the same chemical composition as allanite. This m etamict min eraloid is produced by the breakdown of the space lattice by
radioactive emanations.
Occurrence. Allanite is found in granites, syenites, granite pegmatitcs,
and gneisses.
REFERENCES
Pyroxenes
~
#
FIG.
FIG.
345
considered to be a member of the group. Its crystal system is orthorhombic. Larnite, with the composition Ca 2 SiO., is not a member of the
olivine group since it is monoclinic.
THE OLIVINE GROU P
CHAPTER
15
Chemical
composit ion
Mineral
Forsterite (Fo) . . .. . .. . .
Olivine (FomF a n) . .. ... .
sio.
Olivine Group
Forsterite
Olivine
Fayalite
Monticellite
Humite Group
Chondrodite
STRUCTURES (NESOSILICATES)
Garnet Group
Stamolite
Sphene
Idocrase
Zircon
Axinite
Iddingsite
MULTIPLE
sio.
Sillimanite Family
Andalusite
Sillimanite
K yanite
Mullite
Dumortierite
Topaz
STRUCTURES (SOROSILICATES)
nil
ny
1. 651
1 .660
1.670
1.706
1.838
1 877
1 646
1 .662
1. 670
1.680
1 .689
1. 718
1. 847
1.886
1. 655
1.669
2V
--
SINGLE
na
F ayalite (Fa).
..... . .
Monticellite ...... . . .
{ 1. 635
Mg 2SiO .
1.640
{
1.
651
(Mg,Fe),SiO ,
1. 681
{ 1.805
Fe,SiO,
1.835
{
1. 641
CaMgSiO,
1. 651
85- 00 0
70- 90 0
'J.7- li'l
75- 80
Minerals of the olivine group are characterized by rather high refra ctive indices and strong birefringence. The axial plane is (001) , and tht
axial angle is usually very large.
Olivine is exceedingly abundant as a rock-forming mineral in subsilicie
igneous rocks. Forsterite is practically limited to metamorphic limcsto ll ('S
or contact metamorphic zones . Fayalite is found in granite p egmatitcs, ill
lithophysae of rhyolitic obsidians , and in some ores, but it is rathcr )':11'(' .
Lawsonite
FORSTERITE
6- UNIT
Beryl
Tourmaline
Cordierite
Wollastonite
The minerals of Chapter 15 represent three divisions of silicate structure, nesosilicates, sorosilicates, and cyclosilicates. Minerals with single
tetrahedral groups are more numerous and include a number of important species. Only one multiple group silicate is included (lawsonite)
and four ring-group silicates (beryl, tourmaline, cordierite, and wollastonite) .
SINGLE SiO. STRUCTURES
The Olivine Group
The olivine group consists of the two end members, forsterite and
fayalite, and the intermediate isomorphous mixtme, olivine. The rare
mineral tephroite, Mn 2 SiO" also belongs to the olivine group. The double
salt, monticellite, (CaMgSi0 1 ) , is closely related to olivine and is often
344
OrLhol'hOilli ,io
Mg 2Si0 4
na = 1.635 to 1.640
nf3 = 1.651 t o 1.660
ny = 1.670 to 1.680
2V = 85 t o 90; Opt. (+)
a = 'Y or Z, b = a or X, c = {3 01' Y
c
FlO. Iii 1. ()",,"I I,II ,", ci l" !,,' " I1' ,,1' I'W ',IIIIII; I, SII" Ii O'1
p ili
346
MI NERAL DESCRIPTION S
347
OLIVINE
(Chrysolite)
(Mg, F c) 2Si0 4
Ort horhombic
I
/
,Y
I
FIr:. 15-2. Orientation d iagram of oli vine. Secti on pnrnl1cl to ( '100 ).
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
348
349
(Fe,Mg) 2Si0 4
(Iron Olivine)
na
Orthorhombic
1.805 t o 1.835
= 1.838 t o 1.877
n-y = 1.847 t o 1.886
nfJ
a =
Ca )
(b)
FIG. 15-4 a,b. ( X20) Interlocking anhedral crystals of olivine in dunite. (a) Ordinary illumination and (b) X nicols.
Related Minerals. Olivine fairly rich in iron with about 50 per cent of
Fe2 SiO. is known as hyalosiderite. The indices of refraction and the birefringence are higher than those of olivine proper.
Alteration. Olivine commonly shows alteration to antigorite and secondary magnetite along irregular fractures (see Figure 16-38, page 417) .
In basaltic rocks the alteration of the outer iron-rich rims of olivine to
brownish-red iddingsite is fairly common.
Occurrence. Olivine is an exceedingly common mine ral in subsilicic
i&n eous rocks such as b asalts, olivine gabbros, and p erid otites. In the
l,"U I J~ H ghllll
01'1)
d o p()S l i ~ . I',
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
350
Orthorhombic
CaMgSi0 4
n"
1.641 t o 1.651
n~
= 1. 646 to l. 662
n-y = 1.655 to l.G69
a
351
CHONDRODITE
Monocli lli(:
2V = 75 t o 80; Op t. (-)
'Y or Z, b = a or X, c = (3 or Y
L(3
n"
= ao o
n~
b=
'Y
= 1. 602 to 1. G55
n -y = l.G21 t o 1.670
211 = 70 to 90; Opt . (+)
or Z, a ;\ a or X = - 26 to - 31
Y.
0--
.r
FTG.
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
352
c/
(a )
353
Orientation. The extinction direction nearest the trace of the twinplane is the faster ray.
Twinning. Twinning, which may appear as simple twins, twin seams,
or polysynthetic twins, is rather common. The twin-plane is tOOl}. Without twinning it is very difficult to orient chondrodite. There may also be
twinning parallel to {105} and {305}.
Interference Figure. The figure is biaxial positive with a large axial
angle. The axial plane is normal to {OlO}. Dispersion, r > v weak.
Distinguishing Features. The pleochroism usually distinguishes chondrodite from olivine.
Related Minerals. Three other minerals of the chondrodite group, viz .,
norbergite, humite, and clinohumite, are similar to chondrodite. The di stinction is based upon extinction angles and refractive indices.
Alleghanyite, the manganese analogue of chondrodite, is much lik"
chondrodite, but it is optically negative.
Occurrence. Chondrodite is one of the characteristic minerals of metumorphic limestone. It is often associated with phlogopite and spinel.
Garnet Group
to 1.7(10
to J,8Hi
1.792 to 1.820
Mg 3Ab(Si0 4) 3
P Yrope
Almandite Fe3AI 2(Si04) 3
{
Spessartite M n 3Ah(Si0 4)3
n
n
n
= 1.741
n
n
n
= 1.838
= 1.778
=
= 1.736
to 1.870
to 1.7U:1
= 1.857 Lo 1.88
(b)
15-8 a,b . ( X60) A portion of a fractured crystal of chondrodite. (a) Ordinary
illumination and (b) X nicols showing twinning.
FIGS.
or
"r
gi ll
111'1.
111(, g: II'II( '1 )!;i'O IlJl 11('1'( ' li sl(d 11111)' he ' dll ss ilinl ill
S llh ~ r() lIp s : III( ' PYI'CIJlI " 11I1 1111d ill ' S I W S~ 1I 11 1 11 ' s('1'ii 's ( /'11 111 -" 1)!lI'/,[sp/! /'
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
354
355
frequent.
Irregular
but some
are oftcn
(a)
FIG. IS-H. ( X20) Anomalous garnet crystals from a contact JIl clamorp ili c
D arwin, California. (Cotll'tesy of Prof. Vince nt Kelle y.)
(b)
FIG. 15-10. ( X20) Anhedral garnct crystals in a quartz-plagioclase matrix. (a)
Ordinary illumination and (b) X nicols showin g isotropic character.
/ .11"1 ',
356
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
357
STAUROLITE
Orthorhombic
2AbSi0 5 .Fe(OHh
n" = 1.736 to 1.747
n fJ = 1.741 to 1.754
n-y = 1.746 to 1.762
2V = 80 to 88 ; Opt. (+ )
a = (3 or Y, b = a or X, c = l' or Z
I' y
x
(a)
FIG.
FIGS. 15-14 a,b. ( X 20) Coarse staurolite crystals in schist. (a) Ordinary illllmillul itH,
and (~) X nicols shOWing lineation in quartz grains of the m atrix.
FIG.
358
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
359
SPHENE
(Titanite)
CaTiSiO s
Monoclinic
= 6017'
L.{3
1.887 to 1.913
= 1.894 to 1.921
n')' = 1.979 to 2.054
2V = 23 to 50; Opt. ( +)
b = (3 or Y, c /\ a or X = +33 to 43
n"
n{3
I'z
=:::. . . _Q.
( .:0
15-16. ( >( 20) Euhedral sphene crystals showin g high relief, ang ula .... I,o"d,;"
sections, and prominent parting.
FIG.
111
(0)
FIG.
(b)
Ca ~A1 2 (O IT,F)Si 20
7
'I I ,
/I",
T nLI'Hg()lI a\
360
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
361
zmCON
Tetragonal
ZrSiO.
nw = 1.925 to 1.931
n , = 1. 985 to 1. 993
Opt. (+)
Color. Colorless to pale colors in thin sections.
Form. Zircon usually occurs in minute crystals of short prismatic habit.
They are often found as inclusions and may be sun-ounded by pleochroic
haloes.
Cleavage. Absent.
Relief. Very high, n > balsam.
Birefringence. Very strong, ne - nw = 0.060 to 0.062; the maximum
interference colors are usually pale tints of the fourth order, but minute
crystals show lower interference colors.
Extinction. Parallel.
Orientation. Crystals are length-slow.
Interference Figure. The interference figure is uniaxial but may b e
difficult to obtain on account of the small size of the crystals.
Distinguishing Features. Zircon is distinguished from apatite by
~
o
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
Scale in mm
FIc. 15-17. Sketches of zircon crystals separated from south ern Afr icall gl'll ll it('~
( Cou1tesy of Prof. A1'ie Poldervamt).
362
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
AXINITE
Triclinic
na
n~
= 1.678 to l.684
= l. 685 t o 1. 692
363
Orthorhombic
na = l.674 to l.730
n~ = l. 715 to l. 763
n., = 1.718 to l.768
2V = 25 t o 60; Opt. ( + ) or (-)
a = IX or X, b = (3 or Y, c = 'Y or Z
""".'~'?iff.
FIC.
Color. Colorless to pale violet in thin sections. It may show pleochroism in thick sections.
Form. Axinite usually occurs in anhedral crystals with acute-angled
sections. Inclusions are frcqucnt.
Cleavage. Imperfect in several directions.
Relief. Fairly high, n > balsam.
Birefringence. Rather weak, ny - n" = 0.010 to 0.012, a little higher
than that of quartz.
Extinction. Oblique to outlines and to cleavage traces.
Interference Figure. The figure is biaxial negative with a large axial
angle. Dispersion, r < v or r > v.
Distinguishing Features. Axinite has no very distinctive features and is
rather difficult to recognize in thin sections. Its birefringence is like that
of quartz, but its refractive indices are considerably higher. It is biaxial,
whereas quartz is uniaxial.
Occurrence. Axinite occurs in the calcareous rocks of contact-metamorphic zones. The more common associates are in addition to quartz
and calcite, garnet and hedenbergite. Axinite is also found in granites
and granite pcgmatites. It is a comparatively rare mineral, but in a con-
FIC.
364
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
Sillimanite Family
It is useful to consider certain anhydrous aluminum silicates and
similar compounds containing fluorine or boron in a group. These are
essentially anhydrous minerals which invert to mullite, 3A1 2 0 3 .2Si0 2 at
high temperatures. Sillimanite, andalusite, and kyanite are polymorphous
forms of A1 2 0 3 .si0 2 with an alumina:silica ratio of 1: 1. Sillimanite is one
of the most widely distributed minerals of the group although kyanite,
andalusite, and topaz are common.
ANDALUSITE
(inc. Chiastolite)
AbSi0 5
(Al z0 3.8iO z)
Orthorhombic
365
A1 2Si0 5
(Alz0 3 .Si0 2)
Orthorhombio
n" = 1.657 t o 1.661
n~ = 1.658 t o 1.670
n-y = 1.677 to 1.684
2V = 20 to 30; Opt. ( + )
a = IX or X, b = f3 or Y, c = 'Y or Z
I
'X
I')
II " " If) ~ I , O ,f""1 1I 1111 11 d llll'. " "" " I' " IIII !l IIII II I,', S"" I I""
( 001 ) ,
367
MINERAL DESClUPTIONS
366
"---..
Trit:lilli'i
La = ao.') 1-/
L(3 = 101 2 '
L'Y = 10.'),1.11 ~ '
AlzSiO s
(Alz0 3 .Si0 2 )
na = 1.712
n~ = 1.720
n-y = 1.728
2V = ca. 82; Opt. ( - )
Ax. pI. almost ..L {100} ; c 1\ 'Y or Z - 30
(b)
FIG. 15-22 a,b. ( X 60) Sillimanite in elongated crystals in schist . (a) Ordinary illumination showing dark patches of biotite and (b) X nicols.
Cleavage. Parallel to {010} but not always noticed in sections. Transverse fractures are common.
Relief. Fairly high, n > balsam.
1"( :.
t ~l llg,l
l l1ll
S. '(' lli ll'
( 1(0 ) ,
"I
plll ltll nl
til
~68
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
369
3A1 0 .2Si0
2
OrthOl'hombi l:
na = 1.642
, __ 1.
n {3
= 1.644
ny
1.G54
'X
. I' I ')
) -b
o
Flc. 15-26. Orientation diagram of mullite. Section par;:dl cI to (00 I ).
FIG.
The optical constants here givcn are for th e artifi cial m in cral ; tIlt' ill
dices, birefringence, and optic angle are all a littlc high cr for tIl t' lIallll':1I
mineral.
Color. Colorless in thin sections.
Form. Mullite Occurs in crystals of long prismatic hahit witll 11('111'1
square cross section. 110 1\ 110 = 8913'.
Cleavage. {OlO}, distinct.
Relief. Rather high, n > b alsam.
Birefringence. Bathcr wcak, '1'Iry - 11" = 0.012; th e l11:1 xillllllll illlt 'r
ference color is about first-ord cr ycllow. Cross scct ions have dark grll )'
interferen ce colors sin ce nO - '/'I " = 0.002.
Extinction. Parallel in long itlldinal section s and sY "II1<'1ric'nl ill t 'I'()S~
sections.
OrientatiOIl. TIl( ) crys ta ls an ' It 'n~ lll - s l ()w.
Il'Itcd'cl'('lI ct..' Figw'(" Th,. fi gl'l'(' is hiax ial posili vl' wi lh II Iliod/II'HI<'
axilil HIl Klo. 'I'll" I L~ll1 l pl ll lll' is 1010 1. I H~ p " I'.~ i()II , ,. . Il.
370
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
sm.,
STRUCTURES
371
HBAl sSi 30 20
Orthorhombic
na
1.659 to 1.678
n fJ = 1.684 to 1.691
n'Y = 1. 686 to 1. 692
2V = 20 t o 40 ; Opt. (-)
a = 'Y or Z , b = (3 or Y, C = a or X
,_ _
FIG.
A _ _ _ ~ "~~' _ _
_.
_ __
_ _.
FIG .
"
Distinguishing Features. Mullite is so much like sillimanite in its properties that it was not recognized as a distinct mineral until about two decades ago . The refractive indices of sillimanite are a little higher than
those of mullite.
Occurrence. Mullite occurs in fused argillaceous sediments found as
inclusions (xenoliths) in igneous intrusions. Mullite is a very rare mineral
found on the island of Mull off the west coast of Scotland.
Artificial Mullile. Artificial mullite is the substance formed by heating
sillimanite, andalusite, or kyanite to a high temperature. It is used in the
manufacture of high-grade porcelains such as those used in spark plugs
OCCIII'I'Clice.
g n cisses,
il lld
O( '(' II I'S
ill
g l':llIil ('
Scili sl s,
MINERAL DESClUPTIONS
37:i.
373
'X
'\..
c=Z
~"o
/i?c .. --
120
I
FIe:. 1.5-32. Orientation diagra m of topaz. Section parallel to (001) .
1
,
,t .
.
l _
...,
f\
..
J
-
?-
..:-.- ~
..
, .
' n
quartz,
rutile.
muscovite,
tourmaline,
andalusite,
sillimanite,
topaz,
and
TOPAZ
Orthorhombic
= 1.607 to ] .52\)
= 1.610 t o ] .531
n~ = 1.517 to 1.5:i8
2fT = 4'3 Lo 5S o ; Opt. ( + )
or X, /) = (3 or Y, c = ' y or Z
na
n~
374
375
H 4 CaAhSi 20 1o
Orthorhombic
na = 1.665
n{3 = 1.674
n'Y = 1.684
211 = 84; Opt. (+)
a = a or X, b = (3 or Y, c =
'Y
or Z
!x
~.,
FIG.
I'vi<l 'bO
'- b
a
FIG. 15-34. Orientation diagram of lawsonite. Section parallel to (001).
n cx :\,g() II nl
(lIcxagonnl SUl li;.\'Ii I,.,," )
Be3Ah(Si0 3) 6
n, = 1. 564 to 1.590
nw = 1. 568 to 1. 5D8
Opt. ( - )
Color. Colorl ess in lliin section s. In thi ck ()r i(' lIl('(l s('cti olls ('olor('(l
varic li ('s SII (' II as ( ' 111( ' 1'111<1 III'( ' SOIlI ('wll :il pl ('o(' l,roi( "
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
376
377
15-36.
elusions.
FIG.
FIG.
D ravite
n , = 1. 61 3 to 1.628
nw = 1.632 to 1.655
Opt . ( -)
Hexagonal
(Rhombohedral subsys tem)
Elbaite
n, = 1.615 to 1.62!J
nw = 1.635 to 1.65 <":
Opt. ( - )
15-38. ( x 50) Secti ons ac ross and lengthwise cut th rou gh elonga tc
crystals in a qu artz m atri x.
FIG.
l Olll'lllofill (l
Color. Schorlitc is m'lllral gray, slalc hltIC, hillr, oli ve, elc. Pko('ll roi slll
is lI sll ally ma rked '" > {. Zon a l Stl'll ctlll'( ' is ( 'O Jll I I IOIl ill ('ross scc tion s.
Drav i[c is c'o lorl l'ss 10 P:"( ' v(II o", i ll Illill s('(' tiom 111111 S() llIt '1V 1111[ plt '()
378
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
379
blende. Both of these have p erfect cleavage, which is lacking in tourmaline. Elongate habit, p arallel extinction, strong absorption, and triangular or hexagonal cross sections are significant.
Occurrence. Schorlite reachcs its maximum developmcnt in granite
pegmatites. It is also found in tourmalinized granites, in greisen, and in
high-temperature veins, wh ere it is often associated with cassiterite. It is
also characteristic of celtain schists and gneisses and is frequently found
in hornfelses. It is a widely distributed detrital mineral, both in fragmentary prisms and well-rounded grains.
D ravite usually occurs in metamorphic limestones. It is also found in
some schists.
Elbaite occurs in granite p egmatites. The usual associates are lepidolite, albite, and quartz.
CORDIERITE
(Iolite)
Orthorhombic
(Pse udohexagonaI)
= 1.532 to 1.552
= 1.536 to 1.562
n'Y = 1.539 to 1.570
na
n~
FIG. 15-39. (X20) A section of a single tourmaline crystal in a matrix of quartz and
feldspar. ( X nicols.)
MINERAL DESCRIPTION !5
380
381
FIG .
Triclinic
CaSi0 3
La
= 900'
L{3
= 9516'
= 10322'
L 'Y
n" = 1.620
n f3
1.632
n . ,. = 1.634
2V = ca. 39; Opt. ( - )
b a lmost II to (3 or Y, c 1\ a or X
+:320
382
ML'<ERAL DESCRIPTIONS
CHAPTER
16
MICA GROUP
FIG .
(X
aggregate.
Bowen, N. L., and J. F. Schairer: The Svstem, MgO-FeO-SiO" Am. ]. Sci. , vol.
29, p. 197, 1935.
D eer, W. A. , and L. R. W age r: Olivines from the Skaergaard Intrusion. Kangerdlugssuak, E ast Grcenlan d, Am. Mine'/'alogist, vol. 24, pp . 18-25, 1939.
Zircon
Frondel, C.: Hydroxyl Substitution in Thorite and Zircon, Am. Min eralogist,
vol. 38, pp. 1007-1018, 1953.
Poldervaa rt, A.: Zircons in rocks, Am. ]. Sci., vol. 253, pp. 433-461 , 1955.
Muscovite
Lepidolite
Phlogopite
Biotite
Kaolinite
Dickite
Halloysite
:M ontmorillonite
Hydromuscovite
Palygorskite
Sepiolite
CHLOlUTE GROUP
Proehlorite
Clinochlore
Penninite
Chamosite
SEHPENTINE CHOUP
Antigorite
Chrysotile
Stilpnomelane
Chloritoid
PREI-INITE
GLAUCONITE
TALC
PYHOPIIYLLITE
MINEHALOIDS
Volcanic Glass
Palagonitc
SHEET STRUCTURES (PHYLLOSILICATES)
Minerals with sheet structures range from thc largc clcavahl( ' s ll('( \ I.~
of muscovite to the nne flaky crystals of clay mincrals fr('CjII( 'lIll y " ,
vealed only with the electron microscope. Scveral min('r:ds II lid sllow
tubular structure with th e elecLron mi croscop e and a rc no! fOlllid I"
single crystals suitable for X-ray mcasurcl11cnt may no t hcloll g ill :1 g,'olll'
of phyllosilicates. On the other hanel , sli ch mineral s :IS p:dygorsk il\- II lId
sepiolite show an association w iLh clay nlilwrals alld for lilis I"( lil SOIl III '"
inclmled in lhis g roup .
Two exam ples or mincr:doid s ~ II'\' g iv( '11 :11 III(' ('lId of C I':lpll 'l' 1(1, vo l
Clin ic gln ss IIl1d pnl ngo ll il(', Ilo!11 111'\' S(l lll\ \wllli l illdl'fillil( ' ill ('olllp()~1 1 lOll
a od show II I'II11g< ' ill Pl'op"II I, 's,
:111:1
384
MINERAL DESCRIPTIO NS
,,
')"" "l.,""(
~
I
I
...........
,,
,,;
.............
",,/ ~
........
"
.........
I
I
I
FIG. 16-1.
FIG. 16-2.
FIG. 16-1. Mica of the first class. The dotted lines rep resent the "perCUSSion figure."
FIG. 16-2. Mica of the second class.
1M
20
3T
n",
2V
ny
nil
Structural
nom enclature *
Chemical
composition
Mineral
,
...... "" ....... .... . . . ,
-","I ..........
I
,
... "'"
......
'
*
The 20 and 6H polymorphs have not been found in nature, but others
have b een identified as constituents of clay aggregates or zones of
argillic alteration.
Through mineral synthesis and X-ray study it has b een shown (Yoder
and Eugster, 1955) that muscovite is restricted in conditions of formation
below a range of 625 to 715C and 5,000 to 30,000 pounds per sq~arc
inch pressure. Thus the mineral is absent in rocks formed at higher temperatures.
Lepidomelane is the name given to iron-rich biotite. Fuchsite and
mariposite are green chromium-bearing varieties of muscovite. Sericile
is a secondary muscovite found in minute shreds and aggregates and
formed by hydrothermal alteration.
385
O'
180'
120 0 or 240 0
(Mirror images)
2M t
120 0 or 240 0
(Alternating)
6H
60 0 or 300 0
(Mirror images)
2M .
60 0 or 300 0
* M, 0, T, and H represent , respectively , monoclinic,
hexago na l.
{ 1. 556
1.570
Hydromuscovit.e ..... . .. .
KAI
{ I 535
1 570
K LiAI
KMgAI
Ccm2 t
P3 t 12 or P 3.12
C'/ e
orthorhom'bw, tr igonal, and
30' - 10"
.. .. .
1 565 }
1 605
smnli
1 . 560
1 . 598
1 . 605
110 0
{ 1. 551
1.562
1 . 598
1.606
1 .598
1 . 606
0 0 Ion
{1. 541
1 .579
1.574
1 . 638
1 . 574 }
1 .638
... ..
0 :.!lio
Mono<;lilli<;
(3 = H!) Olitl
(inc. Sericite)
1o)
= 1.556 to 1.570
= 1.587 to 1.607
ny = 1.593 to 1.61 1
2V = 30 0 to 40 0 ; Opt. ( - )
= 'Y or Z, a A (3 or Y, = +] to
nil
C' /m
P6 t 22 or P6 5 22
1.593 }
1.611
n ",
Space group
C' / e
1 . 587
1.607
MUSCOVITE
POLYMORPHS
Rotation on
basal plane
. . . . . . . . . KAI
Muscovite ...
+~o
Color. Co lorle ss lo palc g ree n in Lilin secli olls. SOIlH ' vur i(t lts Hl'c
p leoch roi C"
Form. !\1l lsl'ovi ll ' " slI :dl y O('('III'S ill tli ill tll hlli ar I'r)'S I II IS or III S(,1l I
a gg rq~lIt\s or sllI(,(\s. T llc ' IlIi llll".ly (' I'ys tnltill o VIlI'i('( is l 'l dl l ,t! .Wl'Id( I ' ,
CI(mvHt-:0' III Oli n d ln 'I 'IIIHI (001 1 VC'I ), P( II r(( l.
"
386
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
387
'y
c
,-3
-;/ I
c =X
-+--
00'
E""= . _ ===:d
I .. - - b
x
10
(0)
(b)
FIG. 16-3 a,17. Orientation diagrams of muscovite. Sections (a) parallel to (001 )
and (b) parallel to (010) .
,..
FIG .
388
:!-.1:INERAL
._- --- - - - - -
-- _..
DESCRIPTION~
389
'r
I
Z
C=X
) --b
-E'
--Ej
t,o_,o '"
I
y
b =Z
ItX
io
(0)
( b)
FIG.
FIG.
LiKAb(OH,F)2(Si 20 6) 2
Monoclinic
n" = 1.560
n~ = 1.598
n-y = 1.605
2V = 40 ; Opt . (-)
IIl lI llh .
(X
Extinction. The e;,,'tinction angle measured against the d c.wa g( 11'11 ( ' ( ':;
varies from zero up to a maximum of 6 or 7 .
Orientation. The direction of the cleavage trace is alwa ys Ill(' slow('r
ray.
Twinning. Twinnin g is common accordin g to til e lI1i (';I law Il will
plane = {llO} ], th e composition fa ce h ein g {OOI) . SOlll('lillJ('S [1i"I '( ' 111'0
p enetration twin s.
Interference Figure. T he figlll'c is bi ax i.ul nega livo w ill i U ul()(.lornlo
axial angle, usually a bout 4()0. Disr ol'sion , l' > v woak.
390
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
391
KMg 3AI(OH)Si 4 0 1o
Monoclinic
L.(3
= 90 0
FIG.
'2
!
y
I ) --b
--c=X
0-- (
~--:= b~. ~
~)Z
.X
I
10
FIG.
(0)
(b)
392
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
393
Occurrence. The characteristic OCCUTI"ence of phlogopite is in metamorphic limestones. The common associates are chondrodite, spinel, and
forsterite. It is also found in a few igneous rocks such as peridotites, derived from serpentines, and leucite-bearing rocks.
BIOTITE
Monoclinic
L{3 = 90
= 1.541 to 1.579
n~ =
n"(
1.574 to 1.638
= 1.574 to 1.038
2V = 0 to 25; Op t. (-)
b = {3 or Y, c 1\ a or X = 3
'Z
DID
I . -b
c =X
1
0 -- (
b-
b/
001
:::::::::::=l Z
x.
to
(0)
(b)
16-13 a,b. Orientation diagrams of biotite. Sections (a) parallel to (001) and
(b) parallel to (OlD).
FIG.
FIG.
CO,, " .
394
MINERAL DESCRIPTION S
395
chromian chlorite by D. L. Lapham (1957) suggest a generalized fundamental division of the chlorite group as follows:
CHLORITE G ROUP"
Corundophilite
Mg 5.3 AI1(Si2.3A II.7 )O!O(OH)8
Prochlorite
Mg 5.1 All(Si 2.6AI1.4)O!O(OH).
Clinochlore
Mg 5.0 All(Si3.oAll. o) Ol o(OHls
Penninite
Mg 4.9 AI 1(Si3.2Al o.s)O!O(OH)s
* F e-chlorite (substitution > 4 per cent FeO or Fe 203 for Mg)
Cr-chlorite (substitution < 2 per cent Cr ,0 3 for Mg or AI)
Kotschubeite (Tetrahedral Cr > 2 per cent Cr,0 3)
Kammercrite (Octahedral Cr > 2 per cent Cr,0 3)
FIG. 16-16. ( X30 ) Halos in biotite caused by alpha-particle bombardment from small
zircon crystals containing radioactive impurities.
Related Minerals. Lepidomelane resembles biotite but has higher indices and larger axial angle. Manganophyll is a manganian biotite found
in metamorphic dolomite at L 'mgban, Sweden.
Alteration. Biotite is often more or less altered to chlorite. It may also
alter to vermiculite. In the opinion of E. W. Galliher, detrital biotite is
the source of practically all glauconite.
Occurrence. Biotite is a Widely disb'ibuted and common mineral. It
occurs in igneous rocks of nearly all types. It is also a prominent constituent of schists and gneisses and may be found in contact-metamorphic
zones. Biotite is common in detrital sediments. It is often bleached or
otherwise altered.
FIG. 16-17. ( X30) Chlorite form ecl along the border of a quarlz mass.
Chlorite Group
The micaceous mineral group, chloTite, covers a range of chemical
modifications with corresponding optical variation. This form of mica
occurs most frequently in Rake-like crystals with anomalous birefringence
and greenish pleochroism. H ey (1954) in a survey of the literature indicates 24 chlorite species with varying degrees of validity. Studics of
(0" ( :.
10 IH. (
:10 ) All "1',1',11 '1',11 1(1 IIf (,111 111111 , " ' ),'.111 1,. 11 ,\", ... 111 1,,01 lVI II, "'1'1""", 1,("
396
MINERAL DESCRIPTIOl\S
397
angle, often practically uniaxial. The axial plane is parallel to {010}. Dispersion, l' < v.
Distinguishing Features. Pro chlorite is distinguished from clinoehlore
and p ennine by high er indices of refraction.
Occurrence. Prochlorite is th e principal constituent of some chlorite
schists often accompanied by magnetite. It also is found as an alteration
product of other silicates. A characteristic occurrence of pro chlorite is in
quartz veins with adulmia, albite, sphene, etc.
CLINOCHLOHE
Mgs(AI,Fe) (OH)g(AI,Si) 40 10
Monoclinic;
= 8940'
L(3
001
yE
PROCHLORITE
(Ripidoli tc)
Monocli nic
;0
'-
--
0 -'
110
010
io
(0)
( b)
F1G.
II l1d
398
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
1.575 t o 1.582
1.576 t o 1.582
n '"( = 1.576 t o 1.583
2 V = 0 to 20; Op t. ( + ) or ( - )
ncr
n f3 =
'x
c
I,
II
C=Z ----1.1~-
110
la
FIG.
(a)
399
Monoclinic
010
(b)
16-21 a,b, Qrientation diagrams of pcnninite. Sections (a) normal to the c-axis
n ca. = 1.635
2V small ; Opt. ( - )
Color. Green, greenish gray, gray, pale brown to almosi' co l ()rl, '~~ III
thin sections. Some sections show slight pleochroism.
Form. Usually oolitic ,,\lith p seudosph eruliti c stru ctmc ( C OII( ' ( ' I II ri l' III
stead of fibrous clements ). Subhcdral crystals of thi ck la lllJl:ir 1':Jilil li n '
occasionally found. The ooliths often have a portion of :1. cllJlJlloslln
crystal as a nucleus. Chamosite is some timcs m ass ivo w ilh i1 ggn '~Jl t (\
structure.
Cleavage. In on e dircction , hut nol as p erfcct as in (III' II I iC"i1 s. '1'111
ooliths often show con centric partillg.
Helicf. Mod er:!( 0 , rI > h a I S; I Ill . '1'1 I, ' i"dl'\' or J'( ,rr;ld iOIl is ill (Il(" liP/ Kit
horl,o()(l of 1,0:1:'.
TIirdrillg(III(l. N il III \\l('lI k , lip III 1I 11I) 'Il O.O(l7 III (l,(H)/-! , I "f<orf" I" 'IH Ii '
(:Illors Il l'll Jlllt Jl ppl'('( 'ill lli y 1I II1 I I\\ l d ll l\ 'j ,
400
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
401
H 2(Fe,Mg,Mn)AbSi07
(Ottrelite)
n a = 1. 715 t o 1. 724
n fJ = 1.719 to 1.726
n -y = 1.731 t o 1.737
2V = 36 t o 63; Opt. (+)
b = (3 or Y, c /\ 'Y or Z = +3 to +21
Monoclillio
3-21
DID
,/
) .-.l!
'0
-=-=-- - b =
y-==-
2V= 36~ 6 0 0
STILPNOMELANE
Monoclinic?
H 2 (Mg,Fe)AhSi0 7
nO! = 1.612 to 1.634
nfJ = n-y = 1.700 t o 1.745
2V = ca . 0
Color. Brown and yellow to green. Pleochroic with Y and Z > X.
Form. Often found in micaceous masses, but it may occur in isolated
crystals.
Cleavage. Perfect parallel to (001).
Relief. Moderate to high, n > balsam.
Birefringence. Moderate to strong, try - n" = 0.030 to 0. 119, Basal
plates are almost isotropic.
Extinction. Almost parallel.
Orientation. The angle between X and c is small
01
(0 )
(b )
16-22 a,h. Orientation di agra ms of chloritoid. Sec liol1s (1/) norm nl 10 II" . ,. ,,<i ~
and (b) p nrallcl to (010 ) .
FIG.
"
402
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
< v.
403
'y
010
C=x
. \
oi
_.J!.
tOOl
an~~.~
110
(0)
(b)
FIG. 16-24 a,b. Orientation diagrams of talc. Sections parallel to (a) (001) alld (II)
(010 ).
Mg 3 (OHMSi 20 5 h
Monoclinic
L{3 = (?)
n" = 1.538 to 1.545
n(3 = 1.575 to 1.590
n')' = 1.575 t o 1.590
2V = 6 to 30; Opt. (-)
a = (3 or Y, b = 'Y or Z, c = ex or X
FIG. 16-25. ( X 10) A scc tion cut throu gh a fo liatcd mass o[ talc crysta ls. ( X Id ('ok)
404
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
SILICATES~
405
Distinguishing Features. Talc greatly resembles muscovite and pyrophyllite, but may often be distinguished by the smaller axial angle
provided an interference Rgme can be obtained.
It may be necessary to make a chemical or microchemical test in order
to prove the identity of talc. The association with other magnesium minerals indicates the presence of talc rather than muscovite or sericite.
Occurrence. Talc is the principal constituent of talc schists and soapstones. It is often a hydrothermal mineral formed at the expense of antigorite and tremolite in shear zones of serpentines. Dolomite and
magnesite are frequent associates.
PYROPHYLLITE
Monoclinic( ?)
AI 2(OH) 2Si 40 1o
na
1.552
= 1.588
n'Y = 1.000
n~
FIG.
406
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
residual and as a transported mineral in the white clays of the southeastern United States. It is frequently formed by th e decomposition in
situ of rocks containing fcldspars. Dickite, although less common, is
better crystallized and may occur in pseudohexagonal plates. It is commonly formed by hydrothermal solutions in veins or dikes and occasionally occurs associated with sulfides in are deposits. Halloysite is found
as a porcelain-like mass or fIne white powder in shales and sandstones
and as a replaccment of limestone. It may occur independently but is
frequently associated with kaolinite, alunite, and various forms of hydrous
aluminum oxides.
Montmorillonite is a widely cUsh'ibuted clay mineral. It occurs as an
alteration product of volcanic ash and tuff. The rock bentonite, common
in the western United States, is composed largely of montmorillonite.
Montmorillonite is also found in minor amounts as an alteration product
in pegmatite dikes . The montmorillonite group consists of montmorillonite
[( Mg,Ca) O.AtO".5Si0 2 .nH"O] , nontronite [( Al,Fe) 20 , .3Si0 2 .nH 2 0],
and saponite (2MgO.3Si0 2 .nH 2 0) .
Palygorskite, a clay mineral from a mining district in the Ural Mountains, Russia, "vas named by Ssaftschenkow in 1862. Fersman later defIn ed the palygorskite minerals. The minerals in this group now recognized include pilolite, lassallite, and attaplllgite. Attapulgite, common in
Florida and southern Georgia and found at Mormiron, France, is the
essential constituent of most fullers earth. Sepiolite yields a tubular structure in electron micrographs and in dehydration resembles attapulgite
(Martin-Vivaldi and Cano-Ruiz, 1955).
Hydromica (or illite) represents a poorly defIned group intermediate
between muscovite and montmorillonite. It is likely to occur in shale or
other argillaceous b eds where it may be associated with kaolinite or
montmorillonite and mixed with fIne detrital fragments of other minerals.
The general formula (OH) ,Ky(A1.J Fe ,Mg.,Mgn ) (Sis yAly)02o(Y = 1 to
1.5) suggested by Grim1 indicates the complex chemical character of
hydromica.
The signillcant optical properties of the clay minerals may be conveniently outlined for the four groups from the standpOint of microscopic
observation : (1) The kaolin group is characterized by w eak birefringence
and indices of refraction approximating those of quartz. (2) The montmorillonite group has a comparatively high birefringence but indices of
refraction for the most part lower than Canada balsam. (3) Palygorskitc
resembles montmorillonite in thin section but has a higher index of rcfraction and shows more abundant mass extinction. (4) The hydromica
'The name illite has been applied to thi s group, but it is possible that l'ydl'Omuscovite, as described by A. Johnston e [Q ua/'. J. Ceoi. Soc. LOlldon, 15: .363
( 1889) 1 m erits priority.
407
(d )
(e )
(f)
FIC. 16-28. ( X Ifi,OOO) 1':1 (;(;[1'011 '"i (' '')g ' : '1 ) I , ~ "I' (' I:,), ," ill' ' :.I , , I'"IVi l g 1, ,; ,111,, 00, 111>1
discl osed al' Ill :lg "iri c:llio ns po " i!>I, IV ill, II I(' POllllil' ili g l" i' I O" lIP' . (tI'II/ / tr 1I 1I / " '/111
ielllll IIISJi/II/ !': 11"/"/'1'111'(' ClllY "'/III '/lIk ) (1/) /\ll opl ,oI"' o , llll lVill l~ ' 1,1",.1, .: .1 1'"111",
(I)
llllllll lll' rllll" ~ (II' IlI dlo)" ilt ; ( I' ) P'", "dlll" ' \ II I',OIIl I 1'1 11 110, 01 " ,'1111,,11 11 ; ( " )
( X Il,OOO) "I)"IIII ~ .. r !ii(.I"I; '; (, ,) "" I iii" , 111111" . ill IIII 'ljllIl l ',IIIl; (J) ,,"I ,. IlIliI 1IIIIIdil l
f()I'''I ~ of' " '1'1.. 11111.
408
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
te.or..o~
tC
,..
,..
~
'"
o
o
'"
'"
'"
.-I
'" '"
"''''
...... ......
......
M
C'l
......
'"
o
tC'l
~I
'"'"
I
1""""11""""1 f"""4.-1
'".....
..... C'l
o
o
M"'''' '"
"''''''' .....I
"'M
C'l
..... C'l'"
C'l M M O
000 1
C'l
ooog
000
000
000
o
C'l
'"
1 M '"......I
I ......~'". o'"'"
~ --- '" ~
Q)
l.Ql.Q0')
'a
""
.....
~I
'"
C'l
'".....
oo::t4
.-I
~]~~~~r!.
.....
~
t-
l~
e:>
s'"
...... "''''~
'"
'"
!----~- ~
~
'I"""'f
C'lt-o
Q:l .-I 00
l.C '"
LC
'"
'"..:....l
~
I>l
.~ .~ ~ ~ ~
\.)
rtJ
....
'"
rtJ
C)
'"
"I
'"
M
'"
'"t-
._.....
C C
OIl OIl
C)
oo~~6bbbO
E-<E-<::E::E~~~
'"
<>
o
0:
o
::E::E::E::E
"o "
::E
::E
0:
0:
o
:~
lfl
o
p.
E
o
'"'
.'"'
'"
..c:
\.)
00
o
Ui
io
+1 +1
OC'lOOC'l~O
ic5 ii c5c5 i
C'l ._ C'l C'l ._ ._
.NUl
.;.
c.,CflW
~ ::x::::x:: ~
.:. ~. .
~
<:"I
c-I
('I
\.)
0
~q,q,0Il
...
q, q, q, q, q, q, q,
<
iii
~~"
~~~~
...
~~~'1~'1 ~
000
Uil
0 000
9+199+1+1
9
rn
rnrn
rn
~
~
.;.
::x::
o~o oo
l'
n" = 1.561
nf3 = 1.5G5
n-y = 1.566
2V variable ; Opt. (-)
or Z, C /\ a or X = 10 to 372"0
'Y
i.:
ii
Trielilli o
""""
o
0:
KAOLINITE
AI 20 3 .2Si0 2 .2H 2 0
<>
<=
<=
0:
"2l
o
0:
o
'0'000
o 0 0 0
I~
'"
:'"'
:5 :5 : :
g1
~~
Q)
Q)
....l
.-I
~"'''' I
............
o
'"
'"
......
t-
'"
409
<')
000
S
S?-
UiUiUi
<
~
::E...':~
oM .
"-;-:l"'''''
~ --. ~~
OIl
' ". M .
~
0 0
ow
z<
I ) -b
eX
111--1
00'
o~ . ~ 6=Z~ - - i
C'l~""
C'l
110
P.
::l
P.
"'
o....
"0
0:
a"''""'
o....
~
03
::l
I:,j)
.S
.~rtJ
ool
~
~
Q)Q)
~ .~
'a
.....
....
>.
.-$::::::0)
>< ~ .8 0~
;:::::1._._
-~ ~0.
o~~a;::::~o
ol <.~ ol ol >. 8
~,-"QZ~~ ....
"'o<="'
::E
P.
P.
::l
OIl
o
....
OIl
ol
'"
:';:;
..
aa;-.s.C)
8::=:
.s .~....
E ~ '2o.~
~~!;B
.@ ft ~
~eZrn~
.'"'
o....
"0
>.
::x::
"'gt::.
"''""'
.:;:
o
'"'::l"'
o....
io
::l
o....
:.g
rtJ
....
o
OIl
o.i~
"'"' "'"'
:';;;biJ
"'~
....
::l
'"
~ ~~
"0
~:::; .9
~ ~Jl
>.
(b)
lo lh ..
( - I ..\i~
111111
.25
>.
";
(0)
OIl
ol
~ P.
410
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
SllJCATES: S U E ET STRUCTURES AND J\ II N I': II III ,() II)S
Monoclinic
na = 1.560
n~ = 1.562
n ,. = 1.566
2V = 52 to 80 ; Opt. (+)
b = Z, c 1\ X = 15 to 20
Relief. / AlW,
11
>
411
balsam.
11"
O,( )()(j ;
O il
th e maximum interference
''l ~
< v.
"l,i
.,
Distinguishing Featlll'cs. /)iekit (, is disting uished from kaolinite by slig /,lIy higher birefrin gence, larger crys la l.~) :lIld a Jarger exFIC . 16-31. ( X 30) Sca ll \'r\'d
tin ction angle.
Occurrence. Th e m incral is commonly found dickite ~rystaJs on n ,"jero
. d Wlt1
. I mela..// IC
. ll1lJ)
. c]'a ls 111
' ore d e- Scope slIde. ( X meuls. )
aSSOCIate
posits. It is usually prod uced by hydrothermal action and may oce ll I' II ~
a replacement of qllartz in quartzi te.
fill
HALLOYSITE
A1 20 3.2Si 0 2.2H 20
II II I"
,i1 ,,",
'" 1\ II I
y
0 10
ZE
)0
'-b
0-'
ia
(0)
(b )
FIC.
C-axIS
and
FIll /" 'I ' ( X I.')) r""" glll,II' "'" "" ' ' 1 " I li ll I/II) , 1111 ( ",II 'Y) /1 "',0('/11 1, '" wI lli '''1,"11 11 ( hllir
and J"l il", " ' \ 111" 11) . ( X 11 1('01'1. \
412
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
Color. Colorless.
Form. Halloysite occurs in extremely nn e-grained or colloform masses
and commonly shows shatter cracks.
Relief. Low, n slightly> balsam.
Birefringence. Very weak, almost isotropic.
Distinguishing Features. H alloysite is distinguished by extremely weak
birefringence, an index of refraction almost equal to b alsam and shatter
cracks. It is commonly associated with other clay minerals.
Occurrence. The mineral occurs in altered areas in limestone associated with diaspore, alunite, or gibbsite; in elay b eds associated with
kaolinite; and probably in extremely weathered portions of some shales.
Hydrohalloysite . X-ray study shows that two forms of halloysite exist:
a more hydrous form, AI 2 0 3 .2Si0 2 .4H 2 0, known as endellite or hydrohalloysite; a less hydrous type, AI 2 0 o.2Si0 2 .2I-I 2 0 , which is halloysite. The
more hydrous form is found in mine workings under the influence of
groundwater. It changes to the less hychous form on standing in dry
atmosphere.
MONTMORILLONITE
41:3
Monoclinic
HYDROMUSCOVITE
n" = 1.492
n{3 = n-y = 1.513
2V = 10 to 25; Opt. (-)
(I-Iydromica)
(Illite)
IX
~
~,
12:50/" =.I
~
~
70/" - '
1<-
FIG. 16-34. Kaolinite prisms with intergrown hydrolllll scuvile pi :II('S, (A! /I'I' S. ( :.
Galpin, 1912.)
FIG. 16-33. ( X 15) Montmorillonite, more or less altered glass sha rd s, and felcl spar
frag ments i ll bentonile. ( X llicols.)
414
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
M onoclinic( ?)
2MgO.3Si0 2.4H 20
to
Ah0 3.5Si0 2 .QH 2 0
1 1.')
na = 1.510
n" = l.533
Color. Colorless to pale yellow or green.
Form. Found in compact fine aggregates.
Relief. Low, n < b alsam.
Birefringence. Moderate, ny - na = 0.023.
Extinction. Matted aggregates often tend to show a more or less uniform mass extinction in thin section.
Distinguishing Features. Resembles montmorillonite in thin section.
Electron micrographs exhibit a striking rodlike structme.
Occurrence. Widespread in full ers earth deposits of Georgia and
Florida, wh ere the name attapulgite has been used. Originally found in
the Ural Mountains of Russia. Found in France, Scotland, and Australia.
It is also reported to form by hydrothermal action in "mountain leather."
(0)
2MgO.3Si0 2.nH 20
(b )
F 1C. 16-35. ( X 16,000 ) Electron micrographs of serp entin e. (({) F laky II LLI ig()ll hl
SEPIOLITE
Monoclinic
na = 1.490 t o 1.506
n" = 1.505 to l.526
2V = 40 t o 60; Opt . (-)
Color. Colorless to gray.
Form. Frequently fibrous and in aggregates.
Relief. Low, n < b alsam.
Birefringence. Rather stron g, 11y - n" = 0.015 to 0.020.
Extinction. Approximately parallel with positive elon gation (lengthslow).
Distinguishing Features. Occurs in fibrous aggregates with curved and
matted fiber groups.
II lld
416
MINERAL PESCRIPTJ<"\N S
417
like habit. Patterns of serp entine minerals observed with the polarizing
microscope are aggregate effects due to crystals which range in dimensions within a fraction of one micron.
ANTIGORITE
Orthorhombic
H 4 Mg 3Si 20 9
na = ] .555 to 1.564
n f3
n~
= 1.562 to 1.573
= l. 562 to 1.573
2V = 200 to 90 0 ; Opt. ( - )
{3 or~Y , b = ex. or X, c = 'Y or Z
FIG.
FIG.
FIG . 16-36.
F IG. 16-37.
16-36. Orientation diagram of antigorite. Section parallel to (010).
16-37. ( X 15) Antigorite in serpentine. ( X nicols. )
FIG.
CIIHYSOTIL E
Orililll'lill il il, i o
17 "
/I ll
11)
2 1'
I. !f!) ;~ 1,0
1.!i 1(i
1.!iOI In 1.!i!i0
I .!i I 7 I n I .!)!)
00 I II :10 0 ; () p I.. ( I )
418
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
PREHNITE
Ort.horhombic
H 2 C a 2 Alz(Si0 4)a
=
n f3
= 1.621 to 1.642
= 1.645 to 1.665
2 V variable; Opt. ( +)
a = a or X, b = (3 or Y , c =
GLAUCONITE
I
oat
010
o :"x
FIG. 16-40.
Monoclilli(:('t)
1.590 to 1.612
1.609 to 1.643
n l'
1.610 to 1.644
2V = 16 to 30; Opt. (-)
a or X ca . ..1 {OOll
na
l'
419
1.615 to 1.635
na
nl'
I ) -- b
FIG. 16-41.
n f3
II .
420
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
421
D istinguishing Features. Glauconite much resembles some of the leptochlorites such as chamosite, but the latter has a highcr index of refraction
and weaker birefringence. Chamosite usually has an oolitic structure
lacking in glauconite.
Alteration. Glauconite is sometimes altered to limonite.
Occurrence. Glauconite occurs in sands, sandston es, and limestones. It
is espeCially abundant in the loosely consolidated sandstone known as
greensand, which is prominent in the Cretaceous of New Jersey. A common associate is collophane.
Origin. Glauconite is the product of interstitial scdimentation. Glauconite may be the res ult of the alteration of detrital biotite. The addition
of iron to a clay mineral in a marine environment is also possible.
MINERALOIDS
VOLCANIC GLASS
Amorphous
(Minaraloid)
n = 1.48 to 1.61
Color. Colorless to gray or reddish in thin sections.
Form, 'Usually massive, sometimes vesicular, perlitic, etc. Often contains spherulites of orthoclase, microlites, crystallites, microphenocrysts .
and phenocrysts.
Cleavage. Absent, but it may show p erlitic parting.
Relief. Low to moderate, n usually less than b alsam but sometimes
greater. The index of refraction increases as the silica decreases.
Birefringence. Usually nil, but some varieties show weak birefringence
that is due to strain.
b
FIG. 16-43. Volcanic glass and associated features as show n in thin seclion, ( X to ) .
(a) Banding caused by flowa ge; (b) acicular erystalli tcs in g las, ; ((. ) t'( ld ', pllI
spherulites ( X nicols); (d) extin ction crosses in spherulites ( X lIi culs) ; ((' ) p' " JIl l, '
texture and crystallites; (f) perlitie tex ture.
Distinguishing Features. Opal m ay he mi slaken for g la ss, l)[iI lili l 1'( ' .
fractive indcx of opal is distinctly lowe r.
Alteration. Vol cani c gl:1 ss is oftC'1I mOn' or I('ss (i<-vill'ifi( '" (s('(' " 'lglIl'O
16-43). The allcra lio ll prodll('l s III'( ' 1I ~ II : dl )' I'II IIH 'I' illddlllil(" hili 8 (11111'
tim es feld s pllr.~ , ll'id Ylllil(', ('I'i ~ l () b l t1il( ' l Or IlIlIIIIIIIOI'iliollil {1 11 1'0 llt( 1 I" \~ IIII
422
MINERAL DESCRIPTIONS
SILICA~;ES :
1,2:3
c
e
f
to basalt dikes. This variety is known as In ch!Jl!Jl e. G lass is :t pl'olllill('liI
constituent of vitrophyro ;l llcl O CC III'S ill th e gl'() III Hlll lass or 111 ; 111 ), vo l( 'l lI iI(J
rocks.
Si lica gb ss ti l lS 1)('(' 11 d('s(' l'il )('t\ 1111(1 ( , 1' 111 ( ' 11 11 111 ( ' /( .,.1/(/11'111'1' /1( ' (~ ( '( \ P IlI',11
2/[7 ) .
424
}'l1NERAL DESCHIPTI0NS
PALAGONITE
Amorphous
(Mineraloid)
(Altered Glass)
n = 1.47 to 1.63
Color. Usually yellow to yellowish brown but also brown and greenish
in thin sections.
Form. P alagonite is found as a rim or zone around glass fragments or
in massive form. It often shows an apparent oolitic structure tha t is due
to the filling of microvesicles.
Relief. Low to medium, n either less or great er than b alsam.
Birefringence. Nil to very w eak. Palagonite is a hydrogel, and the weak
birefringence sometimes noted is probably due to strain.
Distinguishing Features. Palagonite resembles opal, collophane, and
volcanic glass. The index of refraction is too high for opal and nearly
always too low for collophane. It is distinguished from glass by the high
water content.
Alteration. The palagonite formed from b asaltic breccia fragme nts at
Roseburg, Ore., h as, according to A. C. \ iVaters, b een altered to chlOlite.
Occurrence. Palagonite is found in palagonite tuffs and palagonite
rock. It is formed by the hydration of fragmental b asaltic glass. The glass
fragments are in whole or in part converted into the palagonite. Associates besides glass are calcite, zeolites, chlorite, pyroxene, olivine, and
plagioclase (the last three are relict minerals from the original glass) .
REFERENCES
Mica Group
Foster, M. D.: Correlation of dioctahedral potassium micas on the b asis of
their charge relations, U.S . Geol. Survey Bull. 1036-D, pp . 57-67, 1956.
Heinrich, E. W. , and A. A. Levinson: Studies in the Mica Group; Polymorphism among the High-Silica Sericites, Am. Mineralogist, vol. 40, pp.
983-995, 1955.
Levinson, A. A.: Studies in the Mica Group; Polymorphism among Illites and
Hydrous Micas, Am. Mineralogist, vol. 40, pp. 41-49, 1955.
Smith, J. V., and H. S. Yoder: Experimental and Theoretical Studies of the
Mica Polymorphs, Mineral. Mag. , vol. 31 , pp. 209-235, 1956.
Yoder, H. S.: SynthetiC and Natural Muscovites, Geochim. et Cosmochim.
Acta, vol. 8, pp. 225-280, 1955.
Chlorite Group
Brindley, G. W., K. Robinson: The Chlorite Minerals. X-ray Identification and
Structures of Clay Minerals, Mineralog. Soc ., London , pp. 173-198, 1951.
Hey, Max H.: A New Heview of the Chlorites, Min eral. Mag., vol. 30, pp
277-292 , 1954.
~ILICATES:
425
Lapham , Davis M.: Structural and Chemical Variation in Chromium Chlori l(.,
Am. Min eralogist, vol. 43, pp. 921-956 , 1958.
Winchell, A. N. : Chlorite as a Polycomponent System, Am. ]. Sci., vol. 2, pp ,
283- 300, 1926.
- - : A Third Study of Chlorite. Am, Mineralogist, vol. 21 , pp . 642- 65 1,
1936.
- -- : Additional Notes on Chlorite. Am. Min eralogist, vol. 13, pp. 161- 170,
1928.
Clay Mineral Group
Brindley, G. W.: X-ray Identification and Crystal Structures of Clay Mill('mls,
Clay Minerals Group , Mineralog. Soc., London, 1951.
Committee on Clay Minerals: Clays and clay minerals, Conferences 2, 3, lI lId
4, Nat. Research Council, W ashington , D .C., 1954, 1955, 1956.
Correns, C. W. , and H. Piller: Mikroskopie der feinkornigen Silikalllli ll (II!1( .,
Part 1: Mikroskopie der Gesteine; "Handbuch der Mikroskopio ill d"I'
Technik," vol. 4, Umschau Verlag, Frankfurt, 1955.
Grim, H.. E.: "Clay Mineralogy," McGraw-Hill Book Company, Inc., No'" Y(I ' k,
1953.
Keller, W. D .: "The Principles of Chemical Weathering," Lll cas IIrolll, ., s
Publishers, Columbia, Mo. , 1955.
Kerr, P. F. et a1.: H.eference Clay Minerals, Am. Petrol. In st . Res. Proj. 110 , Nil'"
York, 1950.
Serpentine Group
Gruner, J. W.: Notes on the Structure of Serpentines, A m. Mil/ em /ilgis/, vol.
22, p . 103, 1937.
Kalousek, G. L. , and L. E. Muttart: Studies on the Chr)'sotilo ;l l1 d AIIl i~~o l lin
Components of Serpentin e, Am. Min eralogist, vol. 42, pp. 1- 22, 10:'7.
Lodochnikov, Vl. N.: Serpentines and Serpentinites and th e Pel rologi( : .1 1" '(11 ,
lems Connected with them, Problems Soviet Geo!. , vol. 2, pp . 111:' - 1:'0,
1933.
Nagy, B. , and G. T. Faust : Serpentines : Natural Mixttlrcs o[ CII I'),so l/i" "".I
Antigorite, Am. Min eralogist, vol. 41, pp. 817-838, 1956.
Selfridge, G. C.: An X-ray and Optical Invcs ti gation of Lho Scrp(' III i ll ll ~ II"
erals, Am. Mineralogist, vol. 21, pp . 463-503, 1936.
Whittaker, E. J. W. , and J. Zussman: The Ch aracteriza tion or SCI'J WI1I Ill, ' Mill
erals by X-ray Diffraction , Min eral. Mag., vol. 31, pp. I07- 12Ci, 1<):'0.
Zussman, J., and G. W . Brindle),: El cctron DifTraclion Stlldi('s of Iii " f-, (" p( '"
tine Minerals, Am. Min eral. , vol. 42, pp . 133- 153, 1957.
Index
Akermanite, 289
Ala twins, 255
Albite, 276
crystallization of, 254
Albite molecule, 248
Albite twins, extinction on, 258
Alkali feldspars, 262-271
optic angles, 263
Allanite, 341-343
Alleghanyite, 199, 353
Allen, E. T. , 300
Allen, R. M. , 36
Allophane, 405, 408
AllotriomOlvhi c form , :I 32
Almandite, 353
Alnoite, 289, 351
Alundum, 7
Alunite, 226, 227, 4'1:1
American Op tical Coltlpnny 11l it- 1I "' " I"'.
14
Ameri can Pctrol ellrn In, titltfto, dO'( , ;j II,
Amici, C. B., 36
Amici-Bertrand Icns, 12, 25
Ammoniojarositc, 228
Amorphous min cral s, 12()
Amphibole group, 3 18-.1:1:1
chcmica! relatio ns, 3 19, :32 1
elcavagc, 3 18
monocli ni c spC'cil" , :)2 1
Amphibolitc, 329, :3:30
Ampli tud e of \\I:tw'S, t1 0
An alcimc, 291, 292
cuh cdral, 1.33
An alyzC'r, 21
Ann tns(', I\)7
AIIIlU ~ il C', t1 05 ' ' IIlH
1''''111.
111 1
1 ~ \ J l I : ~!~
l :l~
428
Andradite, 353
Angle, axial, 95
axial 2E, 102
axial 2V, 102
( See also Axial angles )
critical, 50
of extinction, 82-84
of incidence, 47
of inclination pericline twins, 262
of minimum deviation, 54, 56
of op tic axes 2V, 98
of refraction, 47
of rhombic section, 260
of total reflection, 50
Anhedral, 132
Anhydrite, 189, 22 1-223
cleavage, 137
fragments, 147
Anisotropic minerals (tables ), 167
Anisotropism, 51
caused by strain, 84
in mineral plate, 71
Ankerite, 213
Annular diaphragms, 30
Anomalous interference, 84
clinozoisite, 336
garnet, 355
idocrase, 360
penninite, 399
prehnite, 418
zoisite, 334
Anomite, 393
Anorthite, 281 , 282
Anorthite mol eculc, 248
Anorthoclase, 270, 271
Anthophyllite, 319
hydrous, 320
Antigorite, 416, 417
Antiperthite, 250, 252
Apatite, 230, 231
euhedral, 132
Apochromatic objective, 23
Aragonite, 189, 216-218
Aragonite group , 216-218
Ardennite, 351
Argentojarosite, 228
Armstrong, E., 300
Asbestiform, 324
Asbestos, chrysotile, 4 18
grunerite, 322
tremolite, 320, 324
INDEX
Baddeleyite, 197
Bakelite cement, 57
Balsam, Canada, 6
Barite, 218-220
orientation, 139
Barrett, C. S., 123
Barth, T. F . W. , 312
Basalt, 310, 312, 330, 348
Basaltic hornblende, 329
(See also L amprobolite )
Basanite, 330
Baskin, Y., 300
Bassett, William, vii
Bausch and Lomb microscope, 12
Bauxite, 204
Baveno twins, 255
Beam, 40
Beck, C., 36
Becke, F., 59, 63
Becke line, 59
Beidellite, 408
Bell, James F., 4, 9
Belling, J., 36
Bennett, Alva H., 30, 36
Bentonite, 413
Berek, M., 36, 78, 85, 123
Berek compensator, 27, 29, 78, 79
Berlin blue, 399
Berman, H ., 14 1, 142, 184, 318
Berthier, Pierre, 204
Bertrand, E. , 36
Bertrand, L. , 36
Bertrand lens, 86
Beryl, 375-377
'129
INDEX
Biaxial fi gure, 94
negative, 99
positive, 99
Biaxial mincral tables, 171
Biaxial ray surface, 98
sections of, 100
Biaxial sign, 104, 105
Binocular microscope, 11 , 144
Binormals, 101
Biotite, 392-394
adjustment with, 36
halos, 130
Biradials, 101
Bird, Paul H., 6
Birefrin gcnce, 66
with orientation, 72
tables, 167, 168
Bisectrix, acute, 95
obtuse, 95
Bladed crystals, 129
Boehmite, 204, 205
Bone structure, 127
Borax, 189
Borgstrom, L. H., 149, 151
Bosazza, V. L., 10
Bouasse, H ., 85
"Bow-tie" structure, 418
Bowen, N. L. , 300, 382
Bowenite, 316
Bradley, 0., 300
Bragg, W . L., 183
Brewster, D., 64
Brewsterite, 291
Bright contrast, 32
Brindley, G. W ., 424
Brittle mica group, 400-402
Bronzite, 304
Brookite, 115
Brown, C . S., 300
Brucite, 203, 204
Buchwald, E. , 109
Buddington, A. F. , 288
Burri, C., 37, 109
Bustamite, 318
Bytownite, 280, 281
n ul lll l, 128
128
430
Cleavage, one direction, 135
two direction s, 136
three directions, 136
four direction s, 138
six directions, 138
relation to fonn, 147
tables, 161 , 162
Cleavage examples, and alusite, 137
anhydrite, 137
fluorite, 137
hornbl ende, 136
muscovite, 137
pyroxene, 137
top az, 136
Cliachite, 126, 206, 207
Clinoamphiboles, 321
Clinochlore, 395, 397, 398
Clinoenstatite, 312
Clinohumite, 351 , 353
Clinopyroxenes, 306-318
indices of refraction, 307
Clinozoisite, 335-337
anomalous, 336
deuteric, 336
Clintonite, 400
Coes, L. J., 300
Coesite, 248
Coker, E. G., 44
Colemanite, 189
Collofornl opal, 242
Collophane, 233-235
replacement by, 127
Color, 181
application of, 77
chart in color (opposite 168)
of min erals, 124
and vibration a.xes, 124
Color b ands in fi gures, 95
Color relations, 76
Colored minerals, 156, 157
Columnar crystals, 158
Compensator, Berek, 29
mica, 29
Condenser, 25
circle, 16
front lens, 86
lens, 26
Cone of light, 22
Conoscopic observations, 15, 17, 18
Contact metamorphic occurrence, 308,
346, 351, 355, 366
I NDEX
D ahllite, 231-233
D ark contrast, 32
D atolite, 419
D ay, A. L. , 300
Deer, W. A ., 382
DeJessite, 400
Dengo, G. , 343
Diabase, 312
11:3 1
INDEX
Diallage, 308
Diamon d, Cullinan, 84
Diamond disp ersion, 49
Diamond indices, 49
Diamond saw , 8
Diaphragm, annular, 30
double-method , 62
iris, 58
substage, 15
Diaspore, 201 , 202
Diatomite, 244
D iatom s, 128
Dichroic, 124
Dickite, 405, 408, 410, 411
Diopside, 306, 309
Disp ersion , 108, 109
bia.xial fi gures, 107, 108
crossed, 108, 109
diamond, 49
flUOrite, 49
horizontal, 108, 109
inclined , 108, 109
Dolerite, 312
Dolomite, 189, 2 13, 214
cleavage, 137
twinning, 137
Donnay, J. D. H., 62, 300
Double-diaphragm method, 62
Double images, 67
Double refraction , 67, 78
variation with thickness, 78
Dravite, 377
Drew, E. R. , 45
Drude, P. , 85
Dmgman, J. L. E. , 240
Dumortierite, 371 , 372
crystal fOnll , 134
Dunite, 320, 349
Dunn, F . L., 57
I HI)
F arwell , II. W ., 45
F aust, G. T. , 1.15
Fayalite, 349, 350
Feldspars, 248-282
cleavage, 255
crystalli za ti on, 251
minerals, 248
tempera lures, 2/19
tern ary syslem, 2/10
F eldspar [winnin g, Acli ne', 2:':'
Ala, 255
Al bite, 257-260
Baveno, 255
Ca rl sbad, 255, 26 1
Ma neiJac il , 25:'
'tJerielille, 26 1, 2M.
fo'e'ldsPlI liloitis, 2112-211!)
1"," """ il l " 2:)0
l'\'lsnll lll , A. 1100
432
Fibrous aggregates, 119
Field, image, 15
source, 15
Filon, L . N. G., 44
Fine adjustment, 26
Fletcher, L., 109
Fluorite, 190, 191
cleavage, 138
dispersion, 49
fragments, 147
indices, 49
objective, 21
Focal length, 21
Foraminifera, 128, 212, 419
Forsterite, 345, 346
Foster, 'M. D., 424
Foster, W. R., 273, 274, 300
Fragments, 142
acicular, 147
form s, 146
immersion, 143
mounting, 142, 143
octahedral, 147
prismatic, 147
size, 144
temporary mounts, 143
Framework complexes, 182
Framework structures, 236-301
Francolite, 232
Franklinite, 198
Freund, H. , 183
Frondel, C., 382
Front lens, 26
Fuchsite, 385
Fulgurite, 247
I NDEX
113:1
INDEX
Halides, 188
Halite, ] 89, 100
Hallimond , A. I,'. , :17, :112, 400
Halloysitc, 11()5, IIOIl, 11 1 I, 11 12
Halos, 129, 1:30
in biotite, 393, 3901
Halowax on, Itl H, 1/19
H am ilton, P. K., viii
Hardy, A. C., 45
Harker, A. , 1011
Harmonic curve, 42
H armoni c motioll , 11 2
Harmotome, 29 1
Hartshorn e, N . J I. , 37, 85
Hatch, F. II. , 183
H aiiync, 287, 288
H eetorite, 408
H edenbergitc, 312, 313
extin ction illustration, 83
H einrich, K W ., 141, 424
Hematite, 195
Henderson, E. P., 189, 208
Herapath, W . B., 65, 66
H erapathite, 64, 65
Hercynite, 198, 199
Herringbone structure, 310
Hertz, I-I. R , 38
H ess, H ., 307, 343
Heulandite, 292, 293
H exagonal crystals, 133
H ey, Max H., 394, 424
Heyl, P. R , 45
Hiddenite, 317
High-index liquids, 149
Holmes, Ralph J., viii
Horizontal dispersion , 108, 109
Hornblende, 327-329
anhedral, 131
euhedral, 132
extinction illustration , 83
fragments, 147
orientation , 140
Hornfels, 322
IIortonolite, 349
lIot platc, 6
[Jotehkiss, W.O., 59, 60, 63
JTollrglass sll'lIclllre, 309
ehlorilnid , 11 0 I
1111('11( ', n. VUII , 01
I Itllllll " 1:1111'1" :lr. I :lfi: 1
Habit, 125
H afF, J. C ., 123
Hale, D.1\., 238, 300
Iceland spar, 67
Iddings, J. P., 183, 300
Iddingsite, 363, 364
Identification, key, 152
outline, 154
tables, 152-177
Idiomorphic form , :1 32
Idocrase, 359, 360
anom alous, 360
Igneous association, 252
Illite, 413
Illumination, 19
sodium, .57, 58
Illuminators, 30
Ilmenite, 195, 1.96
I1vaite, 351
Image Held , 15, '19
Imlilersion, cn l'e of li'lllids, IGO
medin, ] 48, 1/19
methud, 1/13, Ill tl
preparatiun of liqllids, I fi O, I II I
slandardi za ti on, 150
Impn.:gll atioll, 4
fn c; ir\"lIee, a llgl(' of, 11
g l'il zillg, 5:3
11('l pil '"1 t' l y~ l il lll i'lI l lo ll , I ~~; ,
111 (11111 '.1 dl ' I,,,,,III I1 , lOll, 1(1)
I ~J, H ,
I ~I)
434
Index of refraction, 57
tables, 163-165
Index ellipsoid, 98-100
Index liquids, 145
Indicatrix, biaxial, 68
uniaxial, 68
Indices, range of, biaxial minerals, 174,
175
isotropic minerals, 172
uniaxial minerals, 173
Ingcrson, E. , 123, 183
Inosilicates, 182, 302-343
Interference, anomalous, 84
Berlin blue, 85
caused by strain, 84
color chart, 168
colors, 75
first-order, 75
in monochromatic light, 76
with quartz wedge, 75
second-order, 75
Interference figure, biaxial, 88
fonnation of, 87
isochromatic curves, 95
isogyres, 95
uniaxial, 87, 88
Interlayer mixture, 414
Iodocinchonidine-sulfate, 65
Iolite, 379
Iris diaphragm , 26
Ironstone, 331, 400
Isachsen, Y. W ., 8, 9
Isoamyl isovalerate, 149
Isochromatic curves, 95
Isogyres, emergence, point of, 95
Isometric crystals, 132
Isomorphism, 183
Isotropic minerals, 126, 166
Isotropism, 51
Jade, 316
nephrite, 326
Jadeite, 315-317
Jarosite, 227, 228
Johannsen, A., 37, 85, 109 141, 184
Johnstone, A., 406
Kaersutite, 330
Kainite, 189
INDEX
INDEX
Leuchtenbergite, 398
Leucite, 282-284
cross 'twinning, 284
pseudoleucite, 284
Leucoxenc, 196, 197
Levinson , A. A. , 424
Light, 38
color, 42
frequ ency, 40
monochromatic, 40
polarized, 64
convergent, 86
red, 43
resolution, 71
sodium, 57, 58
sp eed, 4 1
theories, 38
vector, 41
violet, 44
Lignite, 127
Limburgite, 310
Limonite, 207
Liquids, care of, 150
high-index, 149
mixing, 150 .
standardization , 150
Lithophysae, 345
Lizarclitc, 415
Lodochnikov, V. W. N ., 415
Low-voltagc lamp , 31
Lucite mounting, 4
Luquer, L. M. , 141
Lussatite, 244
Luster, adamantine, 49
vih'eous, 49
Luxullianite, 129, 130, 374
MacCullagh, J., 85
MacKenzie, W. S. , 253, 262, 263, 267,
301
McLintock, W. F. P. , 381
Magma, basaltic, 343
matic, 343
Magnesioferritc, 198
Magncsite, 214, 215
Magncsium orthil'C, 242
Magnc ti c vcctor, 41
Mag nt'lil l', 200
Mag nific:lli,," , ('lllpl )" 2:)
illili ul, 22
435
Malcon,361
Mallard, M. E. , 244
Mallard's equation, 103
Manebach twin law, 255
Manganese antigorite, 415
Manganese chr),sotile, 415
Manganophyll, 394
Margarite, 400
Marialite, 289
Mariposite, 385
Marshall, C. R. , 37
Martens, J. H . C. , 235
Martin-Vivaldi, J. L., 406
Maschke, 0. , 142
Mason, B., viii
Mason, C. W., 37
Maxwell, James Clerk, 38, 42
Meionite, 289
Melanite, 355
Melatope, 95
Melilite, 288, 289
p eg structurc, 289
Melon, 402
Melts, immersion , 149
Merwin , H. E., 57, 142, 151
Mesitylene, 149
Mesolite, 297, 298
Metacryst, 358 , 375, 402
Metamict, 229, 343, 361
Metamorphism, dyn a mi (;, 338
Mcteor crater, 247
Methyl meth ac rylatc mOl 1111 ill g. II
Methylenc iodide, 53, '14 H, I/If)
Meyer, C., 8
Meyrowitz, R. , 150, :I 5 1
Mica, compcnsa tor, 29
of first class, 384
platc, 26, 28, 93
polymOll)hs, 384
of second cl ass, 384
Mi ca group , 381- 391
Mi ch cl, K ., 37
Mi chel-Levy mClhod , 2.'57, 2:;11, 2'( 1
Mi cro amorpholl s, 1.26
Mi croclinc, 268
Microgra nitc , 33 1
Mi crolil cs, 125
M icromcler, Ilil:ll', 20
gm l in g. 20
()(' Ili li l'. 20
foi 1ng n, 2 1
436
Microperthite, 250
Microscope, 57
accessories, 26
adjustment, 34
American Optical, 14
Bausch and Lomb, 12
binocular, 11
care of, 29
centering, 34
illumination, 19
lamps, 30
Leitz, 13
magnification, 23
phase, 11
polarizing, 11
precautions in use, 28
reHecting, 11
sectional view, 14, 16
stage, 34
Zeiss, 16, 17
Miers, H. A. , 85
Milner, H. B., 184
Mineral chip, 5
Mineral descriptions, 181
Mineral groups, 182
Mineral plate, 71
Mineral preparations, 3
Mineral saw, 5
Mineral tables, 152-177
axial angles, 176, 177
biaxial indices, 174, 175
birefringence, 167, 168
cleavage, 161, 162
color chart, 168
colored, 156, 157
form, 158-160
isotropic, 166, 172
key to, 152
negative (biaxial) , 171
opaque, 155
positive (biaxial) , 170
refractive indices, 163-165
structures, 160
uniaxial, 169, 173
Mineraloids, 420-424
Minimum deviation angle, 54
Mirror, 26
Molloy, M. , viii
Mon azite, 228, 229
a-Monobromn apthalene, 149
Monochlomapthalene, 149
l ",DEX
137
I NDEX
Orthoamphiboles, 319
Orthoehlorite, 396
Orthoclase, 263
crystallization, 254
fragme nts, 147
molecule, 248
twinning, 255
Orthopyroxenes, 304--306
Orthorhombic crystals, 134
Olt hoseopic observation , 13, 18
Ottrelite, 400, 401
Oxides, 191- 198
Palagonite, 424
Palygorskite, 406, 408, 414
Para woll astonite, 381
Parrish, W., 151
Parting, 135
Parts of microscope, 18
Peacock, M. A., 381
Pectolite, 318, 381
Peeled films, 8
Peg structure, 289
Pen nine, 398
Pennine law, 399
Penninite, 395, 398
Percussion figure, 384
Periclase, artificial, 192
Pericline twilmin g, 260, 261
inclination of, 262
Peri cline twins, 255
Peridotite, 310
Perlite, 420
Perovskite, 201
Perrin, F. H. , 45
Perthite, 250, 252, 269, 277
Peh'oleum di still atcs, 149
Petrotome, 8
Phase differcncc, 73
Phase microph otographs, 33
Phase mi croscope, 1 I
P hase mi croscopy, 30
P h:1se shift, 31
P henyldiodoa rsin <" 149
l'hlogop itc, 3DO- .'3 D2
I'IHlI lI)lill ', .'3 1/1., .'3 15
1'1 ""Jlli a l('S, 200, 22H 2:1;;
1'1" " 1'1 ,, " Ilo. 2:l2. 2:1"
l ' II () I IIIIIi" I () I~ " ll'l dl' ,"11111 "" , :H
111 11 ,IIl ill ie '11)1'\1" 1II 1111 : , ~~
438
Phyllite, 358
Phyllosilicates, 183, 383-420
Picotite, 198, 199
Piedmontite , 339-341
Pigeonite, 311, 312
Piller, H., 33, 37
Pilolite, 406
Pinite, 380
Piperine, 149
Pisolitic bau xite, 126
Pisolitic structure, 206
Pistacite, 337
Pitchstone, 420
Plagioclase, birefringence, 274
cleavage, 273
decimal grouping, 300
extinction on, 257
glass, 274
high temperature, 272, 275
methods, 271
normal, 272
2V, 275
twins, 259, 260
Plagioclase group , 271-282
Planck, M. , 39
Pleochroism , 124
Pleonaste, 198, 199
Plumbojarosite, 228
Plumose barite, 220
Pockels, F., 45
Polariscope, 64
Polarization, 64
by abso,ption, 65
by reflection, 64
by refra ction, 66, 67
by toum1aline, 65
Polarized light, 64
convergent, 86
Polarizer, 25
Polarizing microscope, 11
Polarizing plates, 12
Polaroid, 12, 64, 66
Polder va art, A. , viii, 307, 343, 361 , 382
Polished surfaces, 3
Polyhalite, 189, 225, 226
Polymorphism, 183
Polymorphs, 384
Polysynthetic twinning, 255, 257, 260,
261
Polzenite, 351
Porphyroblast, 375
INDEX
439
I NDEX
Prehnite, 418
Prescott, Basil, 350
Principal plane of ray surface, 91
Principal sections of ellipsoid, 100, 101
Prism method, 54, 56
Prisms, Ahrens, 70, 71
nicol, 69, 70
Thompson , 70
Proehlorite, 395, 396
Pseudoj ade, 316, 360, 399
bowenite, 316
ealifomite, 316
grossul arite, 317
pseudophite ( chlorite), 317
Pseudoleucite, 284
Pseudophite, 317, 399
Pseudoh'idymite, 244
Pseudowollastonite, 381
Ptilolite, 291
Pumice, 422
Pyralspite, 353
Pyrite, 187
Pyrope, 353
Pyrophyllite, 404, 405
Pyroxene, euhedral, 135
Pyroxene group , 302-333
chemical relation s, 303
extinction angles, 303
soda, 304
Pyroxenoids, 318
Pyrrhotite, 187
Ray, of light, 40
ordinary, 67, 68
surface, 96
biaxial, 98
Reaction series, 253
Reference clay minerals, 407
Reflectin g microscope, 11
Reflection of light, polarization by, 64
total, 50
Refraction, 46
angle of, 48
double, 51
index of, 51
of light, 49
Refractive index, 40
absolute, 48
Refractometer, 51
Abbe, 54, 55
hemispherical, 52
prism , 54, 56
Reinhm'd, M., 123, 275, 301
Relief, 62, 63, 181
Resolution, 24
in analyzer, 72, 73
Retardation, 72, 73
equation of, 72
full wavelength, 74
half wavelength, 74
Rev, George, 4
Rhodoclu'osite, 209, 210
Rhodonite, 318
Rhombic section, 260
Rhombohedral carbonates, 209
Riebeckite, 330
Rin g groups, 182
Ring structures, 375-382
Ripidolite, 396
Robelts, Fred , 4
Robinson, K. , 424
Rock salt (halite ), 190
Rock slice, 7
Rogers, A. F. , vii, 141, 142, 151, 231,
241, 244, 245, 329, 388
Rosenbusch , H., 184
Rosenthal, P., 34
Ross, C. S. , 57, 142,364,409
ROllballlt, M. , 36
Rowland, E. 0 ., viii, 8, 9
Howlall d saw, 8
Hulil p, 10
l'l ood lnlillll, 12\ )
Ra az, F. , 37
Radial aggregate, 127
Radiol aria, 126
Ram sdell, L. S., 141, 300
Ramsden ocular, 19
Rankama, K., 9
Rankin , G. A. , 381
Hay, 40
eX h'aordin ary, 67, 68
. I
Sandstone, 238
Sanidin e, 266, 267
Saponite, 406 , 408
Saund ers, F. A. , 45
Savchenkov, T. V., 406
Saylor, C. P., 62, 63
Scapolite group, 289- 290
Schairer, J. F ., 382
Schaller, W. T. , 189, 208
Schiller structure, 129, 130, 304
Schist, 333, 336, 358
glaucophane, 333, 336
hornblende, 336
staurolite, 358
Schmidt, E. , 262, 301
Sehorlite, 377
Schroeder VaI1 der Kolk, J. L. C. , 1/12,
151
Schuster, A., 85
Schuster's method, 256, 257, 27 1
Scolecite, 299, 300
Secondary optic axes, 101
Sectional view, 14, 16
Sections, thin, 4-9
Selenium melts, 149
Selfridge, G. c. , 415
Seminephrite, 326
Sensitive violet, 77
Sepiolite, 406, 408, 414 , 41 5
Sericite, 385, 387, 388
Serpentine group, 415
Serpentinite, 418
Serpophite, 416
Shannon, E. V. , 364
Shatter cracks, 125, 160
Sheet structures, 183, 383 .1120
Siderite, 215, 216
Sign, biaxial fi gurc, lOti , 105
uniax ial fi gure, 93
Silica brick, 245, 247
Silica group , 236-2 /18
min erals of, 237
Silicate gro llps, 182, 3t11- .'3H2
Sillimanite, 365-367
I1 a mboY::lIlt, 127
frag mcnts, 117
II ccdlc like, 128
Silliln :l llil c fa nlil y, 36 /1 :l7tl
Singl!' SiO" 3t1tl- 37 /1
~l ll g l ( . l< 'lrn J.I'ti nd g' () lIp.\ IH
SIIIII" , :11:3
440
Skeleton crystals, 131
Slow ray, 81
Smith, J. R., 249, 250, 251 , 253, 301 , 343
Smith, J. V. , 262, 263, 267, 272, 273,
:300, 301, 384, 424
Smithsonite, 209
Snell's law, 46, 48
Soda amphiboles, 319
Soda aplite, 315
Soda granit6, 315
Soda microcline, 270
Soda pyroxenes, 304
Soda-lime feldspars (plagioclase ), 271
Sodalite, 287
Sodium light, 57, 58
Sorosilicates, 182, 374, 375
Sosman, R. B., 237
South African jade, 316
Spectrum, electromagnetic, 44
visible, 43, 44
Speed of light, 41, 42
Spessartite, 353
Sphalerite, 186
Sphene, 358, 359
twin crystals, 129, 130
Spheroid, oblate, 68
prolate, 68
Sphemlites, 422
Spilites, 277
Spinel, 198, 199
Spinel group, 198-201
Spitta, E. J., 37
Spodumene, 317, 318
Stage, centering, 34
micrometer, 21
universal, 111
Staurolite, 356-358
euhedral, 135
Stereographic projection, 114, 115
Stewart, D. B. , 189, 208, 249-251, 301
Stewart, F. H. , 189
Stilbite, 293, 294
Stilpnomelane, 400, 401
Strontian apatite, 230
Stmctures, banded, 160
bone, 127
bow-tie, 418
cellular, 126
colloform, 160
flow with phenocrysts, 160
grid, 268
INDEX
4-11
INDEX
(
l
442
W ave period, 40
'Nave phase, 40, 43
W ave trough , 40
\Vave velocity, 69
Wavefront, 40
Wavelength, 39
W eatherhead, A. V., 10
W ebster, D. L. , 45
W einschenk, E., 85, 141, 184
Wells, A. K., 185
W ern erite, 289
W est, C. D. , 151
Weymouth, A. A., 10
Wheny, E. T., 413
Wh.ittaker, E. T. , 45, 415
Wilkeite, 230
Williams, H., 141, 184
Wilson, D . A. P. , 10
Winchell, A. N., 85, 110, 141, 184, 311,
343,354
Wollastonite, 318, 380-382
Wood tin, 374
INDEX